diff options
| author | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2009-05-24 00:31:38 +0000 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2009-05-24 00:31:38 +0000 |
| commit | 3db8854079e5f66bff8e115d3e53b74a9e6b1b94 (patch) | |
| tree | c76f77b61118c210746b2b9a513369908249ae7e /Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis | |
| parent | 631b5bbb9b2878fe0c658883d594124839413456 (diff) | |
move doc for lesser-used formats to subdirs
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@13440 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis')
43 files changed, 0 insertions, 11926 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/COPYING b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/COPYING deleted file mode 100644 index 2d35a8a1456..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/COPYING +++ /dev/null @@ -1,287 +0,0 @@ - Texsis Copyright, Warranty (lack thereof), - and Distribution Restrictions - - -License and Distribution -======================== - -TeXsis is free software which can be redistributed and/or modified -under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL), as -reproduced below. Any reference to "The Program" in the license -refers to TeXsis and its associated files. A list of the files -covered by the LPPL is provided in the file called MANIFEST. - - Note that TeXsis is based on Plain TeX, not LaTeX, and so the rules -for naming files with the extensions .ins, .fd, and .cfg do not apply. -The only special extension used by TeXsis is .txs for style files, and -these should be treated the same as the other TeXsis source files -unless a statement in that file says otherwise. - - -COPYRIGHT -========= - -Unless specified otherwise in individual files, TeXsis is Copyright -1987 1988 1989 1990 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000, 2001 by -Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige. Other copyrights exist and are noted -in the individual files that are affected. - - -HISTORY -======= - -Prior to TeXsis version 2.18 the source code to TeXsis was covered by a -simple copyright declaration and a statement that permission was granted -to use the software by any member the academic community in conjunction -with basic research, but that the software could not be used or -distributed for profit without permission. This was sufficient in the -1980's when TeXsis was being developed specifically for physics -researchers, but by the end of the 1990's the issues surrounding software -licensing had become more developed and we decided that we needed a more -explicit licensing statement and something a bit more open than just -"academic use only". - - We originally considered the GNU Public License (GPL) and the -"Lesser" or "Library" version of that license (the LGPL), as well as -the BSD License, the "Artistic" License, and in fact we looked at most -of the licences approved by the Open Source Initiative (see -http://www.opensource.org/licenses/ ). We also considered writing our -own custom licensing statement, but we eventually decided against -this. We felt that it was important to choose a well-known license so -that users would know the basic terms of the license without having to -read all the details. In the end we found that the LaTeX Project -Public Licence (LPPL) suited the needs and the spirit of TeXsis most -closely, and so versions 2.18 of TeXsis and beyond are covered by the -LPPL, which is reproduced below or can be obtained from the TeXsis -website. - - Please note that the LPPL only applies to the TeXsis source code and -code derived from it, but it does not apply to TeXsis style files (or -other files) which were written independently without using TeXsis -source code. We hope that the authors of style files will choose to -follow our lead and license their works under the LPPL, but they are -free to choose whatever license they deem appropriate. Note also that -under the terms of the LPPL it is possible to add further restrictions -to a file, as long as they are consistent with the "Conditions on -individual files" section of the LPPL (see below). - - TeXsis has always been an "Open Source" project, and so we chose the -LPPL as the best way to make TeXsis freely available to everyone but -protect it from the possible corruption of propagating different -versions of similar files. - ----------------------------------------------------------------------- - - - -LaTeX Project Public License -============================ - -LPPL Version 1.0 1999-03-01 - -Copyright 1999 LaTeX3 Project - Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies - of this license document, but modification is not allowed. - - -Preamble -======== - -The LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) is the license under which the -base LaTeX distribution is distributed. As described below you may use -this licence for any software that you wish to distribute. - -It may be particularly suitable if your software is TeX related (such -as a LaTeX package file) but it may be used for any software, even if -it is unrelated to TeX. - -To use this license, the files of your distribution should have an -explicit copyright notice giving your name and the year, together -with a reference to this license. - -A typical example would be - - %% pig.sty - %% Copyright 2001 M. Y. Name - - % This program can redistributed and/or modified under the terms - % of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN - % archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either - % version 1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. - -Given such a notice in the file, the conditions of this document would -apply, with: - -`The Program' referring to the software `pig.sty' and -`The Copyright Holder' referring to the person `M. Y. Name'. - -To see a real example, see the file legal.txt which carries the -copyright notice for the base latex distribution. - -This license gives terms under which files of The Program may be -distributed and modified. Individual files may have specific further -constraints on modification, but no file should have restrictions on -distribution other than those specified below. -This is to ensure that a distributor wishing to distribute a complete -unmodified copy of The Program need only check the conditions in this -file, and does not need to check every file in The Program for extra -restrictions. If you do need to modify the distribution terms of some -files, do not refer to this license, instead distribute The Program -under a different license. You may use the parts of the text of LPPL as -a model for your own license, but your license should not directly refer -to the LPPL or otherwise give the impression that The Program is -distributed under the LPPL. - - - -The LaTeX Project Public License -================================ -Terms And Conditions For Copying, Distribution And Modification -=============================================================== - - -WARRANTY -======== - -There is no warranty for The Program, to the extent permitted by -applicable law. Except when otherwise stated in writing, The -Copyright Holder provides The Program `as is' without warranty of any -kind, either expressed or implied, including, but not limited to, the -implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular -purpose. The entire risk as to the quality and performance of the -program is with you. Should The Program prove defective, you assume -the cost of all necessary servicing, repair or correction. - -In no event unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing -will The Copyright Holder, or any of the individual authors named in -the source for The Program, be liable to you for damages, including -any general, special, incidental or consequential damages arising out -of any use of The Program or out of inability to use The Program -(including but not limited to loss of data or data being rendered -inaccurate or losses sustained by you or by third parties as a result -of a failure of The Program to operate with any other programs), even -if such holder or other party has been advised of the possibility of -such damages. - - -DISTRIBUTION -============ - -Redistribution of unchanged files is allowed provided that all files -that make up the distribution of The Program are distributed. -In particular this means that The Program has to be distributed -including its documentation if documentation was part of the original -distribution. - -The distribution of The Program will contain a prominent file -listing all the files covered by this license. - -If you receive only some of these files from someone, complain! - -The distribution of changed versions of certain files included in the -The Program, and the reuse of code from The Program, are allowed -under the following restrictions: - - * It is allowed only if the legal notice in the file does not - expressly forbid it. - See note below, under "Conditions on individual files". - - * You rename the file before you make any changes to it, unless the - file explicitly says that renaming is not required. Any such changed - files must be distributed under a license that forbids distribution - of those files, and any files derived from them, under the names used - by the original files in the distribution of The Program. - - * You change any `identification string' in The Program to clearly - indicate that the file is not part of the standard system. - - * If The Program includes an `error report address' so that errors - may be reported to The Copyright Holder, or other specified - addresses, this address must be changed in any modified versions of - The Program, so that reports for files not maintained by the - original program maintainers are directed to the maintainers of the - changed files. - - * You acknowledge the source and authorship of the original version - in the modified file. - - * You also distribute the unmodified version of the file or - alternatively provide sufficient information so that the - user of your modified file can be reasonably expected to be - able to obtain an original, unmodified copy of The Program. - For example, you may specify a URL to a site that you expect - will freely provide the user with a copy of The Program (either - the version on which your modification is based, or perhaps a - later version). - - * If The Program is intended to be used with, or is based on, LaTeX, - then files with the following file extensions which have special - meaning in LaTeX Software, have special modification rules under the - license: - - - Files with extension `.ins' (installation files): these files may - not be modified at all because they contain the legal notices - that are placed in the generated files. - - - Files with extension `.fd' (LaTeX font definitions files): these - files are allowed to be modified without changing the name, but - only to enable use of all available fonts and to prevent attempts - to access unavailable fonts. However, modified files are not - allowed to be distributed in place of original files. - - - Files with extension `.cfg' (configuration files): these files - can be created or modified to enable easy configuration of the - system. The documentation in cfgguide.tex in the base LaTeX - distribution describes when it makes sense to modify or generate - such files. - - -The above restrictions are not intended to prohibit, and hence do -not apply to, the updating, by any method, of a file so that it -becomes identical to the latest version of that file in The Program. - -======================================================================== - -NOTES -===== - -We believe that these requirements give you the freedom you to make -modifications that conform with whatever technical specifications you -wish, whilst maintaining the availability, integrity and reliability of -The Program. If you do not see how to achieve your goal whilst -adhering to these requirements then read the document cfgguide.tex -in the base LaTeX distribution for suggestions. - -Because of the portability and exchangeability aspects of systems -like LaTeX, The LaTeX3 Project deprecates the distribution of -non-standard versions of components of LaTeX or of generally available -contributed code for them but such distributions are permitted under the -above restrictions. - -The document modguide.tex in the base LaTeX distribution details -the reasons for the legal requirements detailed above. -Even if The Program is unrelated to LaTeX, the argument in -modguide.tex may still apply, and should be read before -a modified version of The Program is distributed. - - -Conditions on individual files -============================== - -The individual files may bear additional conditions which supersede -the general conditions on distribution and modification contained in -this file. If there are any such files, the distribution of The -Program will contain a prominent file that lists all the exceptional -files. - -Typical examples of files with more restrictive modification -conditions would be files that contain the text of copyright notices. - - * The conditions on individual files differ only in the - extent of *modification* that is allowed. - - * The conditions on *distribution* are the same for all the files. - Thus a (re)distributor of a complete, unchanged copy of The Program - need meet only the conditions in this file; it is not necessary to - check the header of every file in the distribution to check that a - distribution meets these requirements. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Example.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Example.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 9de019e32c3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Example.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,232 +0,0 @@ -%% file: Example.tex (TeXsis version 2.17) -% $Revision: 17.0 $ : $Date: 1994/11/30 21:53:40 $ : $Author: myers $ -%======================================================================* -% This is a sample paper typeset with TeXsis, to give you a quick idea -% of how it's done. Note: this is just hacked together from an old -% conference proceedings, so it's not a real paper. -EAM - - -% This lets your manuscript run under either mTeXsis (from -% mtexsis.tex) or the full TeXsis distribution - -\ifx\texsis\undefined \input mtexsis.tex \fi - -\texsis % this turns on TeXsis - - -% Saying \draft puts a time-stamp, page number, etc. on the page, -% but you don't want it for the final version of the paper. -%%\draft - - -% Document Format: uncomment one of these lines to select the style -% in which the paper is printed: -% -%\preprint % Preprint style -%\nuclproc % Nuclear Physics Proceedings style -%\PhysRev % Physical Review style - - -% --- - -% some macros used in this paper: - -\def\Kb{{\bar K^2 \over \beta_R}} - -% --- -% BEGIN: - -\titlepage % begin title page material -\title -Noncompact nonlinear sigma models -and numerical quantum gravity -\endtitle -\author -Eric Myers, Bryce DeWitt, Rob Harrington, and Arie Kapulkin -Center for Relativity, Department of Physics\\ -University of Texas, Austin, Texas 78705 USA -\endauthor -\abstract -Studying the $O(2,1)$ nonlinear sigma model is a useful step toward -determining whether or not a consistent quantum theory of gravity (based -on the Einstein-Hilbert action) exists. Like gravity, the sigma model -is not perturbatively renormalizable, and corresponding Feynman graphs -in the two theories have the same na\"{\i}ve degrees of divergence. Both -theories also have a single overall dimensionful coupling constant, and -both have a configuration space which is noncompact and curved. The -sigma model allows one to study the renormalizability properties of such -theories without the added complications of local symmetries. -\endabstract -\bigskip -\endtitlepage % will start \doublecolumns for \nuclproc - -% --- -% Now start in on the text of the paper... -% --- - -Quantum Field Theory and the theory of General Relativity are, -separately, probably the two most successful physical theories of this -century. This notwithstanding, nobody has yet been able to bring the -two together into one complete and consistent quantum theory of gravity. -One major impediment to such a theory is that, unlike gauge field -theories, gravity with the Einstein-Hilbert action -$$ -S = {1 \over 16\pi G_N} \int d^4x\, \sqrt{g} R -\EQN 1$$ -is not renormalizable, at least not by the usual methods of perturbation -theory. This has lead a number of physicists to adopt the position that -General Relativity is only the low energy limit of some other quantum -theory, such as superstring theory. An alternative view which one -can adopt, however, is that the failure of perturbation theory in the -case of gravity is not an indication that the theory is inconsistent, -but only that the mathematical tools one has used are inadequate. To -pursue a quantum theory of gravity in this direction one needs a -nonperturbative method of calculation: the methods of lattice field -theory, which have already been applied to gauge theories, are -immediately suggested. One also needs a simple model with which to test -the ideas of nonperturbative renormalizability without the complicated -structure of the full theory of General Relativity. This paper -describes our work with such a model, the $O(2,1)$ noncompact nonlinear -$\sigma$-model.\reference{DeWitt, 1989} -B.S.~DeWitt, ``Nonlinear sigma models in 4 dimensions: a lattice definition,'' -lectures given at the International School of Cosmology and Gravitation, -``Ettore Majorana'' Centre for Scientific Culture, Erice, Sicily, May 1989 -\endreference\relax - -The model we consider consists of three scalar fields $\varphi_a$ -described by the action -$$ -S = \half \mu^2 \int d^4 x \, \eta^{ab} - \del_\mu \varphi_a \del^\mu \varphi_b \,, -\EQN 2$$ -with $\eta_{ab}={\rm diag}(-1,+1,+1)$ and with the fields obeying -the constraint -$$ --\varphi_0^2 + \varphi_1^2 + \varphi_2^2 = -1 - \qquad (\varphi_0 > 0) \,. -\EQN 3$$ -The manifold of constraint is the two dimensional surface of constant -negative curvature represented schematically -in \Fig{1}. It is the coset space -$O(2,1)/O(2)\times Z_2$, but for simplicity we refer to \Eqs{2} and -\Ep{3} as the $O(2,1)$ nonlinear $\sigma$-model. There are several -reasons this model is of interest: - -\item{1)} -For dimensionless fields $\varphi_a$ the coupling constant $\mu^2$ has -units of $(length)^2$, the same as $1/G_N$ in the Einstein-Hilbert -action. Thus $\mu$ plays the role of the Planck mass in the theory. -Furthermore this means that Feynman graphs in the $\sigma$-model have -the same na\"{\i}ve degree of divergence as similar graphs in gravity, -so that the model has the same renormalizability structure (actually the -same perturbative non-renormalizability structure) as the theory of -gravity. - -\item{2)} -As in gravity, the fields of the $\sigma$-model obey a constraint, -and the configuration space defined by the constraint is both {\it -curved} and {\it noncompact}. - -\item{3)} -The surface of constraint is invariant under global $O(2,1)$ -transformations, but -% unlike gravity -there is no local symmetry in the -model. This is a great simplification which lets us study just the -renormalizability properties of the model without the added -complications introduced by local symmetries. - -\item{4)} -Unlike gravity, the Euclidean action of the $\sigma$-model is bounded -from below. The unboundedness of the gravitational action is a serious -problem which must be dealt with at some point, but one which we want to -avoid entirely for now. - -\figure{1} -\forceleft -\vskip\colwidth % just leave some space to glue in figure -%%\epsfbox{o21.ps} % or include with epsf -\caption{The constraint surface of the $O(2,1)$ noncompact nonlinear -$\sigma$-model.} -\endfigure - -\medskip - -The transcription of the $\sigma$-model to the lattice is more or less -standard with one exception, our definition of the lattice derivative. -Rather than using the simple difference between field values at -neighboring lattice sites we use the geodesic distance between two -points on the constraint surface. The lattice action is thus -$$ -S = \half \mu^2 \sum_x a^4 \sum_{\hat\mu} - [{ \Delta(\varphi(x+\hat\mu a), \varphi(x)) \over a}]^2 \,, -\EQN 4$$ -where $\Delta(\varphi,\varphi^\prime)$ is the arc length between -$\varphi$ and $\varphi^\prime$ on the manifold, -$$ -\Delta(\varphi,\varphi^\prime) = - \cosh^{-1}(-\eta^{ab} \varphi_a\varphi^\prime_b) \,. -\EQN 5$$ -Our reason for this choice is that it is consistent with the idea that -the fields be restricted only to the constraint surface of the -$\sigma$-model. -In contrast, simply taking the na\"{\i}ve difference between fields, as -is usually done for compact $\sigma$-models, produces a difference -vector which does not lie in the manifold of constraint. While both -methods lead to the same classical continuum limit there is nothing that -guarantees that the quantum theories obtained from the two lattice -definitions will be the same. - - It is convenient to factor the dependence on the lattice spacing $a$ -out to the front of \Eq{4} and to define the dimensionless coupling -constant $\beta = \mu^2 a^2$. If the theory is nonperturbatively -renormalizable the Planck mass $\mu$ will be renormalized to $\mu_R$, -which results in a renormalized dimensionless coupling constant -$$ -\beta_R = \mu_R^2 a^2 \,. -\EQN 6$$ -The renormalized Planck mass defines a characteristic length scale -$1/\mu_R$ for the interactions of the theory. The lattice approximation -to the continuum theory will be reliable when $a \ll 1/\mu_R \ll L=Na$. -Considering each inequality separately, this requires -$$ -\mu_R a = \sqrt{\beta_R} \ll 1 -\qquad \hbox{\rm and} \qquad - N \gg {1\over \sqrt{\beta_R}} -\EQN 7$$ -In the continuum limit $a \to 0$, hence $\beta \to 0$, and for $\mu_R$ -to remain finite this requires $\beta_R \to 0$. If this condition is -not fulfilled then it would appear to be impossible to define a -consistent quantum field theory from the $\sigma$-model, even -nonperturbatively. - -%---------------------------- -\figure{2} -\forceright % force this to the righthand column -\vskip\colwidth % leave this much space -%%\epsfbox{beta.ps} % or include with EPSF -\caption{The renormalized dimensionless coupling constant $\beta_R$ -plotted against the bare coupling constant $\beta$ for an $N=10$ -lattice.} -\endfigure -%---------------------------- - -In \Fig{2} we show $\beta_R$ plotted as a function of $\beta$ as -obtained from Monte Carlo simulations on an $N=10$ lattice. As can -clearly be seen, $\beta_R$ vanishes nowhere. We therefore conclude that -the $O(2,1)$ nonlinear sigma model does not have an interacting -continuum limit. One may view $1/\mu_R$ as the renormalized coupling -constant in the theory, in which case our result implies that the model -is ``trivial'' (in the technical sense) in that the continuum limit is a -free field theory. - -This work was supported by NSF grants PHY\-8617103 and PHY\-8919177. - -\smallskip -%\nosechead{References} % header for references -%\nobreak -\ListReferences - -\bye - -%>>> EOF Example.tex <<< diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Fonts.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Fonts.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 70b6822f611..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Fonts.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,112 +0,0 @@ -%% File: Fonts.tex (TeXsis version 2.16) -% $Revision: 16.2 $ : $Date: 1994/09/14 14:57:08 $ : $Author: myers $ -%=======================================================================* -% TeXsis Manual -- TYPE SIZES AND STYLES : This file is a part of TeXsis -% (C) Copyright 1989, 1992 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige -%======================================================================* -% -\texsis\book -\singlespaced -\TeXquoteon % | is a TeX quote (printed tt) -\input TXSdocM.doc % macros for manual - -\titlepage -\line{\revdate \hfill \TeXsis\ \fmtversion} % a banner of sorts -\vbox{\vskip.75in} % some whitespace -\title -\TeXsis -\TeX\ Macros for Physicists -\bigskip --- Font Tables -- -\endtitle -% -\author -Eric Myers -Department of Physics and Astronomy -Vassar College -Poughkeepsie, New York 12601~USA -\endauthor -\and -\author -Frank E. Paige -Physics Department -Brookhaven National Laboratory -Upton, New York 11973~USA -\endauthor -% -\abstract -This supplement to the \TeXsis\ manual contains tables of the characters -in all of the available fonts. -\endabstract -\endtitlepage - -\parskip=\medskipamount % some extra space between paragraphs - -\appendix{B}{Font Tables} - -\midtable{Fonts} -\Caption -Fonts used in \TeXsis, with the design size names and the required -sizes in points. -\endCaption -\ruledtable - Base Name | Description | Sizes (pt) \crthick - cmr10 | Roman | 5~~7~~9~~10~~11~~12~~14~~16~~20~~24 \cr - cmti10 | Text italic | 5~~7~~9~~10~~11~~12~~14~~16~~20~~24 \cr - cmsl10 | Slanted | 5~~7~~9~~10~~11~~12~~14~~16~~20~~24 \cr - cmbx10 | Roman bold | 5~~7~~9~~10~~11~~12~~14~~16~~20~~24 \cr - cmmi10 | Math italic | 5~~7~~9~~10~~11~~12~~14~~16~~20~~24 \cr - cmsy10 | Math symbol | 5~~7~~9~~10~~11~~12~~14~~16~~20~~24 \cr - cmex10 | Math extended | ~~~~~~~~~10~~11~~12~~14~~16~~20~~24 \cr - cmtt10 | Typewriter | ~~~~~~~~~10~~11~~12~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ \cr - cmss10 | Sans serif | ~~~~~~~~~10~~11~~12~~14~~~~~~~~~~~~ \crthick - cmmib10 | Math italic bold | ~~~~~~~~~10~~11~~12~~14~~16~~20~~24 \cr - cmbsy10 | Bold symbol | ~~~~~~~~~10~~11~~12~~14~~16~~20~~24 -\endruledtable -\endtable - - The Computer Modern fonts that are used either by Plain \TeX\ or by -\TeXsis\ and the required sizes for each are listed in \Tbl{Fonts}. The -|cmmib10| and |cmbsy10| fonts may not exist in all installations, but -they will not be loaded unless |\mib| is used, so they are not required. -The command |\printfont{|\meta{font}|}| can be used to print a table of -the characters in any \meta{font}, e.g., -\TeXexample -\printfont{cmr10} -|endTeXexample -Such tables are given on the following pages. - - Most versions of \TeX\ now use Computer Modern fonts, but some -still use the older American Modern fonts. If you have problems with the -fonts, try editing |TXSfonts.tex|, replacing all occurrences of |=cm| -with |=am| and then recompiling \TeXsis. Mixing the two types of fonts -will produce errors. - -\vfil\eject - -% \Printfont uses \printfont from printfont.txs, but puts the font -% table in a nice table with a caption. - -\def\Printfont#1#2{% Print a nice font table, with caption - \table{#2}% - \printfont{#1}% - \caption{Font {\tt #1} -- #2}% - \endtable} - - -\Printfont{cmr10}{Roman} -\Printfont{cmti10}{Text Italic} -\Printfont{cmsl10}{Slanted} -\Printfont{cmbx10}{Roman bold} -\Printfont{cmmi10}{Math italic} -\Printfont{cmsy10}{Math symbol} -\Printfont{cmex10}{Math extended} -\Printfont{cmtt10}{Typewriter} -\Printfont{cmss10}{Sans serif} -\Printfont{cmmib10}{Math italic bold} -\Printfont{cmbsy10}{Math bold symbol} - -\bye - -%>>> EOF Fonts.tex <<< - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/INSTALL b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/INSTALL deleted file mode 100644 index 288b8ee4160..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/INSTALL +++ /dev/null @@ -1,17 +0,0 @@ -texsis/INSTALL - How to get the installation instructions - - A complete set of instructions for installing TeXsis on -Unix, VMS, and DOS PC's is given in the appendix of the TeXsis -manual. You can print this appendix using plain TeX with the -file Install.tex. (You must also have the files TXSinstl.doc, -TXSmacs.tex, TXSenvmt.tex and TXSdocM.doc in the current -directory or input path.) A pre-processed version is in the file -Install.ps. - - If you are running TeX 3.0 or later on a Unix machine you can -probably install TeXsis on your system by simply editing the -parameters in the Makefile and the proto-site file TXSsite.000 -and saying `make install`. If you have any problems with this -see the full instructions. - -Eric Myers <texsis@feynman.physics.lsa.umich.edu> 12 November 1994 diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Install.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Install.tex deleted file mode 100644 index afa76f3e66d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Install.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,66 +0,0 @@ -%% file: Install.tex (TeXsis version 2.17) -% $Revision: 17.2 $ : $Date: 1997/08/27 21:44:25 $ : $Author: myers $ -%======================================================================* -% Installation Instructions for TeXsis E. Myers and F.E. Paige -% -% This file can be used with Plain TeX to print the installation -% instructions for TeXsis (which is an appendix of the manual). -% -% For quick installation instructions see the Makefile. -% -% Dependencies: TXSmacs.tex, TXSenvmt.tex, TXSinstl.doc -%======================================================================* -% TeXsis -- Installation Instructions : This file is a part ot TeXsis -% (C) Copyright 1989, 1992, 1997 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige -%======================================================================* -% first load just the parts of TeXsis we need to do the job -% -\input TXSmacs % main macros common to all components -\input TXSenvmt % center and flush environments, etc.. -% -% now some stand-in definitions for full TeXsis macros -% -\def\appendix#1#2{\centerline{\bf\uppercase{#2}}\bigskip} -\def\revdate{17 September 1994}% -\def\subsection#1{\bigskip\goodbreak - \noindent{\bf\uppercase{#1}}\bigskip} -\def\subsubsection#1{\medskip\noindent{\bf{#1}}\medskip} -\def\nosechead#1{\medskip\noindent{\bf #1}\medskip} -\def\label#1{\relax} -\def\ORGANIZATION{} -\def\URL#1{{\tt #1}} -\def\checktags{\relax}\def\pagecheck#1{\relax} -\def\TeXsis{\TeX sis} -\def\square{\hbox{{$\sqcup$}\llap{$\sqcap$}}} % box -\def\ATunlock{\catcode`@=11}\ATunlock % @ is a letter -\def\singlespaced{\relax}\def\twelvepoint{\relax}% -\long\def\vfootnote#1#2{} -\def\idx#1{#1}\def\index#1{} - -% -\newskip\ttglue \ttglue=.5em plus.25em minus.15em -\newskip\sectionminspace\sectionminspace=0pt -\newskip\sectionskip \sectionskip=0pt -\newskip\subsectionskip \subsectionskip=0pt -% -\newcount\refnum \refnum=\z@ % counter for reference numbers -\newcount\@firstrefnum \@firstrefnum=1 % first of a series of refs -\newcount\@lastrefnum \@lastrefnum=1 % last of a series of refs -\newcount\tabnum \tabnum=\z@ % table number -\newcount\fignum \fignum=\z@ % figure number -\newcount\eqnum \eqnum=\z@ % equation number in section - -\def\@chaptID{}\def\@sectID{} % start with these null - -\newif\ifContents \newif\ifRunningHeads - -% Simpler versions of manual macros - -\def\meta#1{\leavevmode\hbox{$\langle$\rm #1\/$\rangle$}} % new \meta -\def\cs#1{{\tt\string#1}} \def\CS#1{{\tt\string#1}} - -\TeXquoteon -\parskip=0.75\baselineskip - -\input TXSinstl.doc % Installation instructions from manual -\bye diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/MANIFEST b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/MANIFEST deleted file mode 100644 index c1a8e5d40a4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/MANIFEST +++ /dev/null @@ -1,80 +0,0 @@ - File Name Description ------------------------------------- - AIP.txs American Institute of Physics style file - COPYING Copyright, Warranty, and Distribution Restrictions - CVformat.txs style file for Curriculum Vitae - Elsevier.txs style file for North Holland publications - Example.tex short example of a paper created with TeXsis - Fonts.tex Standalone fonttable printout - Formletr.txs macros for making form letters - IEEE.txs IEEE proceedings style file - INSTALL Info on how to get installation instructions - Install.tex TeXsis installation instructions, in Plain tex - LPPL LaTeX Project Public License - MANIFEST This shipping list - Makefile Unix makefile to build the format and Manual - Manual.aux label definitions for the TeXsis Manual - Manual.ind processed index for the TeXsis manual - Manual.tex TeXsis file to print manual - PhysRev.txs Physical Review style file - README General information about this distribution - TXSapxF.doc Appendix with font tables - TXSconts.tex table of contents - TXScover.doc Cover for the Manual - TXSdcol.doc double column documentation - TXSdcol.tex double column format - TXSdoc.doc documentation masterfile - TXSdoc0.doc documentation title page - TXSdocM.doc macros for manual - TXSend.doc end of Manual, acknowledgements and contents - TXSenvmt.doc documentation for center and list environments - TXSenvmt.tex special environments, \center, \Listing, etc - TXSeqns.doc Documentation for equation numbering - TXSeqns.tex equation numbering - TXSfigs.doc documentation for figures and tables - TXSfigs.tex figure and table macros - TXSfmts.doc documentation for layouts - TXSfmts.tex document layouts - TXSfonts.doc font documentation - TXSfonts.tex TeXsis font definitions - TXShead.tex running headlines and footlines - TXSinit.tex initialization stuff and some basic macros - TXSinstl.doc installation instructions, Manual appendix A - TXSintro.doc Manual introduction - TXSletr.doc documentation for letter and memo macros - TXSletr.tex LetterFormat for typing letters - TXSmacs.tex miscelaneous macros common to all components - TXSmemo.tex MemoFormat for typing memoranda - TXSmisc.doc Documentation for miscellaneous macros - TXSprns.doc documetation for paren sizing and balancing - TXSprns.tex automatic paren sizing and balancing - TXSrefs.doc documentation for reference numbering - TXSrefs.tex references and citations - TXSrevs.doc revision history, manual appendix C - TXSruled.doc documentation for ruled tables - TXSruled.tex TeX macros for ruled tables, vis. ruled.tex - TXSsects.doc chapter and section documentation - TXSsects.tex chapter and section divisions - TXSsite.000 proto (or example) site dependent info file - TXSsymb.doc documentation for extended math symbols - TXSsymb.tex extended math symbols for physics - TXStags.doc documentation for misc tags - TXStags.tex tags for ref and eqn numbers, labeling - TXStitle.tex title page macros for physics papers - Tablebod.txs old-style table making macros - WorldSci.txs World Scientific proceedins style file - color.txs macros to change colors for color PostScript - index.tex index making macros for Plain TeX & MakeIndex - nuclproc.txs style file for Nuclear Physics proceedings - penguin.eps sample encapsulated PostScript figure - penguin2.eps sample encapsulated PostScript figure - printfont.txs Macros for printing font tables - ruled.tex Plain TeX interface for ruled tables - spine.txs macro for making 3-Ring binder labels - texsis.1 man page for texsis, in troff -man format - texsis.bst BIBTeX reference style file for TeXsis - texsis.el emacs mode for TeXsis - texsis.tex master file to generate TeXsis format - thesis.txs style file for a thesis - twin.txs two pages side by side on one piece of paper - texsis.lsm Short description of the TeXsis package
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Manual.fgl b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Manual.fgl deleted file mode 100644 index b05bdc70273..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Manual.fgl +++ /dev/null @@ -1,11 +0,0 @@ -% List of Figures for job Manual - created: 2004/6/5 23:{0}2 -% ==================================== -% > Figure 7.1: -\FIGLitem{Figure} {7.1. } -Sample figure showing how easy it is -to insert numbered figures with captions in \TeXsis .\@endFIGLitem -{46} -% > Figure 1.17: -\FIGLitem{Figure} {1.17. } -A bizarrely placed figure for Section~\use {sect.intro}\@endFIGLitem -{63} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Manual.ref b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Manual.ref deleted file mode 100644 index 30bbfa60885..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Manual.ref +++ /dev/null @@ -1,174 +0,0 @@ -% List of References for job Manual - created: 2004/6/5 23:{0}2 -% ==================================== -% -% (1) Reference text for "Knuth" defined on page 1. -\@refitem{1}{Knuth} -D.E.~Knuth, -\booktitle {The \TeX book} (Addison-Wesley, 1986) -\@endrefitem -\@refpunct . -% -% (2) Reference text for "LaTeX" defined on page 1. -\@refitem{2}{LaTeX} -L. Lamport, -\booktitle {\LaTeX , A Document Preparation System}, -(Addison-Wesley, 1985) -\@endrefitem -\@refpunct . -% -% (3) Reference text for "Doob" defined on page 1. -\@refitem{3}{Doob} -M.~Doob, -\booktitle {A Gentle Introduction to \TeX \ (A Manual for Self-Study)}, -(\TeX \ User's Group, Providence). -Also available as a plain \TeX \ file from CTAN or at\n -\URL {ftp://ftp.texsis.org/pub/tex/gentle.tex} -\@endrefitem -\@refpunct . -% -% (4) Reference text for "Spivak" defined on page 1. -\@refitem{4}{Spivak} -M.~Spivak, -\booktitle {PC\TeX \ User's Guide.} -(Documentation distributed with PC\TeX ) -\@endrefitem -\@refpunct . -% -% (5) Reference text for "Feynman, 1949" defined on page 21. -\@refitem{5}{Feynman, 1949} -R.P.~Feynman, Phys.\ Rev.\ \vol {76}, 749 (1949) -\@endrefitem -\@refpunct . -% -% (6) Reference text for "Pauli and Villars, 1949" defined on page 23. -\@refitem{6}{Pauli and Villars, 1949} -W.~Pauli and F.~Villars, \journal Rev. Mod. Phys.;21,434(1949) -\@endrefitem -\@refpunct ; -% ... Reference text for "*Schwinger, 1948" defined on page 23. -\hfill \penalty -\@M -J.~Schwinger, \journal Phys. Rev.;74,1439(1948) -\@endrefitem -\@refpunct . -% -% (7) Reference text for "BCS" defined on page 31. -\@refitem{7}{BCS} -J.~Bardeen, L.~N.~Cooper, and -J.~R.~Schrieffer, -\journal Phys. Rev.;108,1175(1957) -\@endrefitem -\@refpunct . -% -% (8) Reference text for "DIS" defined on page 35. -\@refitem{8}{DIS} -E.D. Bloom, et al., -Phys.\ Rev.\ Letters \vol {23}, 930 (1969) \@endrefitem -\@refpunct . -% -% (9) Reference text for "makeindex" defined on page 44. -\@refitem{9}{makeindex} -Pehong Chen and -Michael A. Harrison, ``Index Preparation and Processing'', in {\sl -Software: Practice and Experience}, \vol {19}, 897-915 (1988) -\@endrefitem -\@refpunct . -% -% (10) Reference text for "Rokicki" defined on page 48. -\@refitem{10}{Rokicki} -Tomas Rokicki, \booktitle {{\tt dvips} -User's Manual}. -The source code for {\tt dvips} is available from CTAN -in the directory {\tt dviware/dvips} -\@endrefitem -\@refpunct . -% -% (11) Reference text for "FeynDiagram" defined on page 50. -\@refitem{11}{FeynDiagram} -Dimm, Bill, -\booktitle {FeynDiagram Tutorial}, -available at \URL {ftp://ftp.hepth.cornell.edu} -\@endrefitem -\@refpunct . -% -% (12) Reference text for "Masters" defined on page 52. -\@refitem{12}{Masters} -\relax -D.E.~Knuth, {\sl The \TeX book} (Addison Wesley, 1986), page 245 -\@endrefitem -\@refpunct . -% -% (13) Reference text for "Cowan" defined on page 52. -\@refitem{13}{Cowan} -Ray F.~Cowan, {\sl -Making Tables with Macros} (unpublished) -\@endrefitem -\@refpunct . -% -% (14) Reference text for "Bozek, 1991" defined on page 54. -\@refitem{14}{Bozek, 1991} -J.D.~Bozek, Ph.D. thesis (unpublished), Department of Chemistry, -University of Western Ontario, London, Ontario CANADA -\@endrefitem -\@refpunct . -% -% (15) Reference text for "Weinberg, 1972" defined on page 65. -\@refitem{15}{Weinberg, 1972} -S.~Weinberg, -\booktitle {Gravitation and Cosmology: Principles and Applications of the -General Theory of Relativity} -(Wiley, New York, 1972) pg.~3 -\@endrefitem -\@refpunct . -% -% (16) Reference text for "K&R" defined on page 67. -\@refitem{16}{K&R} -Brian W.~Kernighan and Dennis M.~Ritchie, -\booktitle {The C Programming Language}, -(Prentice Hall, Englewood Clifs, NJ, 1978) -\@endrefitem -\@refpunct . -% -% (17) Reference text for "Banzai, 1984" defined on page 69. -\@refitem{17}{Banzai, 1984} -\booktitle {The Adventures of Buckaroo Banzai across the Eighth -Dimension}, (Twentieth Century Fox, 1984) -\@endrefitem -\@refpunct . -% -% (18) Reference text for "colordvi" defined on page 79. -\@refitem{18}{colordvi} -Hafner, Jim, the {\tt COLORDVI.TEX} macros -are included in the {\tt dvips} distribution. See \Ref {Rokicki} -\@endrefitem -\@refpunct . -% -% (19) Reference text for "CRC" defined on page 93. -\@refitem{19}{CRC} -\booktitle {Handbook of Chemistry and Physics}, 56th Edition, -(CRC Press, Cleveland, Ohio, 1974), pg. B-9 -\@endrefitem -\@refpunct . -% -% (20) Reference text for "TeXsis-1.00" defined on page 116. -\@refitem{20}{TeXsis-1.00} -E.~Myers, -\booktitle {\TeX sis Version 1.00} (unpublished) -\@endrefitem -\@refpunct . -% -% (21) Reference text for "Myers, 1984" defined on page 116. -\@refitem{21}{Myers, 1984} -E.~Myers, -\booktitle {Calculation of the Gravitational Casimir Energy and Gauge Field -Couplings in Non-Abelian Kaluza-Klein Theories}, -Ph.D.\ thesis (unpublished), Yale University, 1984 -\@endrefitem -\@refpunct . -% -% (22) Reference text for "Groppe" defined on page 116. -\@refitem{22}{Groppe} -W.~Groppe, -\booktitle {TechRpt} (unpublished) -\@endrefitem -\@refpunct . -% >>> EOF Manual.ref <<< diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Manual.tbl b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Manual.tbl deleted file mode 100644 index 0e67908e451..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Manual.tbl +++ /dev/null @@ -1,24 +0,0 @@ -% List of Tables for job Manual - created: 2004/6/5 23:{0}2 -% ==================================== -% > Table 7.1: -\FIGLitem{Table} {7.1. } -Charged leptons.\@endFIGLitem -{51} -% > Table 7.2: -\FIGLitem{Table} {7.2. } -Example of a ruled table --- AT\&T Common Stock.\@endFIGLitem -{54} -% > Table 7.3: -\FIGLitem{Table} {7.3. } -Example of a ruled table --- Parameters used in the -MS-X$\alpha $ calculations for the chlorosilane molecules, -H$_{\rm x}$SiCl$_{\rm 4-x}$; x=0--4.\@endFIGLitem -{55} -% > Table 7.4: -\FIGLitem{Table} {7.4. } -Basic macros for {\tt \bs ruledtable}\@endFIGLitem -{58} -% > Table 7.4: -\FIGLitem{Table} {7.4. } -Additional macros for {\tt \bs ruledtable}\@endFIGLitem -{59} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Manual.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Manual.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 0b9f8fc9693..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Manual.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,22 +0,0 @@ -%% file: Manual.tex (TeXsis version 2.17) -% $Revision: 17.1 $ : $Date: 1997/07/08 22:09:47 $ : $Author: myers $ -%======================================================================* -% TeXsis Manual -- This file prints the TeXsis manual. -% -% First we look to see if this is being run under TeXsis, or -% Plain TeX. If \TeXsis is undefined then it must be Plain - -\ifx \TeXsis\undefined\relax - \input texsis \relax % read in TeXsis macros - \the\everyjob % start it up -\fi - -% Now go read in the manual Master file. The manual files are TXS*.doc - -\input TXSdoc.doc % read the manual -\bye - - - - - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/NEWS b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/NEWS deleted file mode 100644 index 03bc808bb10..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/NEWS +++ /dev/null @@ -1,61 +0,0 @@ - LATEST NEWS ABOUT TeXsis - ======================== - -The latest distribution version of TeXsis is in a file of the name -TeXsis-2.xx.tar.tz where 2.xx is the latest version number. - -The latest experimental version of TeXsis is in the beta subdirectory -ftp://feynman.physics.lsa.umich.edu/pub/texsis/beta/ but is not -mirrored by CTAN. - - ======================== - -13 May 2000: - The TeXsis ftp site has been moved to - ftp://feynman.physics.lsa.umich.edu/pub/texsis/ - There is now a TeXsis home page, which is at - http://feynman.physics.lsa.umich.edu/~myers/texsis/ - - -18 December 1997: - - Here is what is new in TeXsis 2.17: - - * Support for using BibTeX to extract references from bibliographic - databases. (Easier to use than in LaTeX!) - - * The ability to change the colors in PostScript output, which is - useful for making overhead transparancies. (The style file - color.txs is a functional superset of colordvi.sty, but also lets - you push/pop the PostScript color stack.) - - * Improvements in the organization of the manual, and slightly updated - installation instructions. Updated Makefile. - - * Change in the format of the .aux file. You shouldn't notice - this, but it will allow the use of tools and packages that use - this file (such as BibTeX) that were formerly only available in - LaTeX. - - * Form letter macros moved to a style file, Formletr.txs. - - Here is what is NOT in TeXsis, but expected in a later release: - - * Babel support for other languages. We had this working with Babel - 3.4, but then the author of Babel made a big revision (probably to - update to LaTeX/2e) and now it doesn't quite work. You can try to - find the older version of Babel if you really want this. - - * Hypertext: I had hyperTeX html links working, but have not - documented it. It seems that work on hyperTeX has either frozen - or changed direction with the anticipated arrival of tex2pdf. - Once I get a chance to read through the proper documentation and - figure out where things are going I will update TeXsis to put in - the proper pdf marks. - - * Alternate citation styles: numbered footnotes (rather than - endnotes) or citation by the label ("citation key"). It's almost - ready, but not quite. - -$Id: NEWS,v 1.1 2000/05/17 01:06:42 myers Exp $ - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/README b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/README deleted file mode 100644 index 08751ec580d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/README +++ /dev/null @@ -1,151 +0,0 @@ - TeXsis version 2.18 - 6 April 2001 - - - GENERAL INFORMATION - - TeXsis is a Plain TeX macro package for typesetting physics -documents, including papers and preprints, conference proceedings, -books, theses, referee reports, letters, and memos. Texsis macros -provide the following features: - - * Automatic numbering of and symbolic reference to equations, - figures, tables, and references; - - * Simpified control of type sizes, line spacing, footnotes, running - headlines and footlines; - - * Specialized document formats for research papers, preprints and - "e-prints," conference proceedings, theses, books, referee - reports, letters, and memoranda; - - * Table(s) of contents and lists of figures and tables, as well as - list of figure and table captions; - - * Specialized environments for lists, theorems and proofs, centered - or non-justified text, and listing computer code; - - * Specialized macros for easily constructing ruled tables; - - * Simplified means of constructing an index for a book or thesis; - - * Easy to use double column formatting. - -TeXsis was originally designed for use by physicists, but others may -also find it useful. It is completely compatible with Plain TeX. - - You can find out more about TeXsis from the TeXsis Home Page, at -http://www.texsis.org - - - SOURCE CODE - - Source code and documentation for TeXsis can be obtained from -ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis and is also mirrored by CTAN, the -Common TeX Archive Network, in CTAN:/tex-archive/macros/texsis/ . -Finger ctan@ftp.tex.ac.uk to find the nearest CTAN server. - - Small improvements and corrections to TeXsis are distributed as -patches in the patch file TXSpatch.tex. If there is such a file in the -texsis directory you should copy it as well. - - - INDEPENDENT MACRO PACKAGES - - Several components of TeXsis can be used independently under Plain -TeX: - - * index: index.tex contains Plain TeX macros for constructing an - index for a document, in conjunction with the MakeIndex program. - - * tables: ruled.tex (with TXSruled.tex) contain Plain TeX macros - for making nice ruled tables. - - * dcol: TXSdcol.tex contains Plain TeX macros for double column - formatting. - -For details on how to use these see the documentation files that -accompany them on the TeXsis ftp site (each has a separate directory). -The comments in the files are also very complete. - - - INSTALLATION - - TeX runs on many different platforms, not just Unix, and TeXsis -will run on any installation of TeX. It is best to perform a system- -wide installation of TeXsis so that everybody may use it, but it is -also possible to install it in a private directory for personal use. -Since TeXsis is a "format" the steps required to install it are the -same as the steps required to install any TeX "format", probably using -the `initex` program. It would be best if you would review the -documentation on how to do this for your own TeX installation. - - Very complete installation instructions for Unix, VMS, and PC-TeX -are given in an appendix to the TeXsis manual. You can print these -without having to have TeXsis installed by running the file -Install.tex through Plain TeX. - - That said, installation on Unix computers is rather simple. Unless -you have an unusual installation of TeX (in which case please read the -output from Install.tex) the steps are: - - 1. Edit the Makefile and change parameters and paths as - appropriate, following the directions given in the comments. - The defaults are set to work with teTeX, a common distribution - of TeX for Unix. You will probably only have to set the paths - to your top-level "texmf" directory and your local "bin" directory. - - 2. (Optional) Copy the file TXSsite.000 to TXSsite.tex and edit - this file to contain appropriate site dependent information, - such as definitions for the name of your \ORGANIZATION, or your - \letterhead, or change \LandscapeSpecial, etc... If you already - have a TXSsite.tex file then copy it to the current directory so - that it will be included when building the format file. - - 3. Give the command `make` to build the format file and the manual. - - 4. Give the command `make install' to install the files in the - appropriate directories. - - - MTEXSIS - - To make it easier for the casual reader of electronic preprints -("e-prints") to print a TeXsis document we have collected the core -TeXsis macros into one source file (called mtexsis.tex), with all the -comments and blank lines removed. A reader who does not have TeXsis -on her/his system can then simply get this file, add - - \input mtexsis - -to the manuscript file, and print the paper with Plain TeX. You can -make your e-print manuscript files automatically load mtexsis.tex, if -it is needed, by adding the following line at the begining of your -manuscript file: - - \ifx\TeXsis\undefined\input mtexsis.tex\fi - -It is suggested that you try running such a manuscript through Plain TeX -with mtexsis.tex first to make sure that it works. - - - MAILING LIST - - If you find TeXsis useful you may want to send a short e-mail -message to texsis@texsis.org to be put on the mailing list for any -notices of updates or changes. We will only use this list to inform -you of updates or changes, and we won't give the list out to anybody -else (we hate spam too). - - - AUTHORS - - Eric Myers <myers@umich.edu> Frank E. Paige <paige@bnl.gov> - Department of Physics and Physics Department - University of Michigan Brookhaven National Laboratory - Ann Arbor, Michigan, 48109 USA Upton, New York 11973 USA - - - --- ---- --- - -@(#) $Id: README,v 18.3 2001/04/06 23:12:48 myers Exp $ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSapxF.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSapxF.doc deleted file mode 100644 index 37b8be0e5b5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSapxF.doc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,55 +0,0 @@ -%% file: TXSapxF.doc - Font Table Appendix - TeXsis version 2.18 -%% @(#) $Id: TXSapxF.doc,v 18.1 2000/05/17 00:19:46 myers Exp $ -%======================================================================* -% (C) Copyright 1989, 1992 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige -% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications -% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL). -% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL -%======================================================================* -\ifx\undefined\meta\texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\draft\fi - - -\appendix{C}{Font Tables} - - The Computer Modern fonts that are used either by Plain \TeX\ or by -\TeXsis\ and the required sizes for each are listed in \Tbl{Fonts}. The -|cmmib10| and |cmbsy10| fonts may not exist in all installations, but -they will not be loaded unless \cs{mib} is used, so they are not required. -The command \CS{printfont}\arg{font} can be used to print a table of -the characters in any \meta{font}, e.g., -\TeXexample -\printfont{cmr10} -|endTeXexample -A separate file called |Fonts.tex| is included with the standard -distribution of \TeXsis. Running |Fonts.tex| through \TeXsis\ will -produce tables of all of the fonts used by your installation of \TeXsis. - - Most versions of \TeX\ now use ``CM'' (Computer Modern) fonts, but -some still use the older ``AM'' (Almost Modern) fonts. If you have -problems with the fonts, try editing |TXSfonts.tex|, replacing all -occurrences of |=cm| with |=am| and then recompiling \TeXsis. Mixing the -two types of fonts will produce errors. - -\midtable{Fonts} -\Caption -Fonts used in \TeXsis, with the design size names and the required -sizes in points. -\endCaption -\ruledtable - Base Name | Description | Sizes (pt) \crthick - cmr10 | Roman | 5~~7~~9~~10~~11~~12~~14~~16~~20~~24 \cr - cmti10 | Text italic | 5~~7~~9~~10~~11~~12~~14~~16~~20~~24 \cr - cmsl10 | Slanted | 5~~7~~9~~10~~11~~12~~14~~16~~20~~24 \cr - cmbx10 | Roman bold | 5~~7~~9~~10~~11~~12~~14~~16~~20~~24 \cr - cmmi10 | Math italic | 5~~7~~9~~10~~11~~12~~14~~16~~20~~24 \cr - cmsy10 | Math symbol | 5~~7~~9~~10~~11~~12~~14~~16~~20~~24 \cr - cmex10 | Math extended | ~~~~~~~~~10~~11~~12~~14~~16~~20~~24 \cr - cmtt10 | Typewriter | ~~~~~~~~~10~~11~~12~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ \cr - cmss10 | Sans serif | ~~~~~~~~~10~~11~~12~~14~~~~~~~~~~~~ \crthick - cmmib10 | Math italic bold | ~~~~~~~~~10~~11~~12~~14~~16~~20~~24 \cr - cmbsy10 | Bold symbol | ~~~~~~~~~10~~11~~12~~14~~16~~20~~24 -\endruledtable -\endtable - -% >>> EOF TSXapxF.doc <<< - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXScover.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXScover.doc deleted file mode 100644 index 34d8b6ebee8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXScover.doc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,28 +0,0 @@ -%% file: TXScover.tex - Binder Cover - TeXsis version 2.18 -%% @(#) $Id: TXScover.doc,v 18.1 2000/05/17 00:19:46 myers Exp $ -%======================================================================* -% (C) Copyright 1989, 1992, 1993 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige -% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications -% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL). -% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL -%======================================================================* -% SPINE LABEL: don't use any \special's here - -\parskip=12pt - -\noindent -(This file should be printed in Landscape mode.) -\emsg{This file should be printed in Landscape mode.} -\vskip 1in - -\hoffset=-1.0cm - -\spine{\vbox to 1in{\vfill - \hbox to 18cm {\hfil\twentyfourbf \TeXsis : %% - \TeX\ Macros for Physicists \hfil}% - \vfill} -} - -\end - -%>>> EOF TXScover.doc <<< diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSdcol.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSdcol.doc deleted file mode 100644 index 88c224e5ff3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSdcol.doc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,300 +0,0 @@ -%% file: TXSdcol.doc - Double Columns - TeXsis version 2.18 -%% @(#) $Id: TXSdcol.doc,v 18.2 2000/05/17 00:19:46 myers Exp $ -%======================================================================* -% (C) Copyright 1989, 1992, 1993 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige -% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications -% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL). -% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL -%======================================================================* -\ifx\undefined\bs \texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\input Manual.aux\draft\fi - - -\section{Double Column Output \label{sect.dcol}} - - Typesetting text in more than one column on a single page is more -involved than typesetting text in a single page-wide column, but this -extra effort can be rewarded with a document which looks much more -professional and which can be easier to read (provided that the -resolution of your printer is up to it). Many publishers of -``\idx{camera-ready}'' conference proceedings require double -column\index{double columns} \index{multiple columns|see{double -columns}} typesetting, and the {\sl \idx{Physical Review}} and other APS -and AIP journals are typeset in double columns. In order to make it -easy for authors to prepare manuscripts either for such camera-ready -conference proceedings or for submission to {\sl Physical Review}, we -have included some powerful double column typesetting macros in \TeXsis. -These macros can automatically balance columns which do not fill an -entire page, and there are also provisions for equations which must be -extended across both columns because they are too wide for a single -column. Figures and tables (or other such ``floating'' insertions) can -be put either in a single column or across both columns. The same is -true for footnotes. By changing a single instruction in the manuscript -file it is also possible to take a document which has been prepared for -double columns and to print it in single column mode. The converse is -not true --- typesetting text in double columns with automatic column -balancing is a nontrivial task. While the macros generally behave as -intended, more attention to the layout of the document is required, and -even then the macros will sometimes fail without some extra guidance. -It is not possible to divide three lines into two balanced columns! In -such cases you must rearrange text or the placement of figures and -tables, or explicitly select column or page breaks elsewhere in the -document, in order to give \TeXsis\ some extra guidance on how best to -format the page. - -%\bigbreak - - In order to use the double column formatting macros you must first -specify the size of the columns with the command -\CS{SetDoubleColumns}\arg{c-width}. The width and height of the full -page are taken from the current settings of \cs{hsize} and \cs{vsize}, -while the width of each column is \meta{c-width}. This re-defines -\TeX's \cs{output} routine, so it should be called shortly after you say -\cs{texsis}, before any output is actually produced, and it should only -be called if double column output is to be produced. - - \CS{SetDoubleColumns} only sets the column dimensions and -prepares the \cs{output} routine for double column output at some point -in the future --- it does not actually put you in double column mode. -Text will still be set in a single page-wide column until you say -\CS{doublecolumns}. After you say \CS{doublecolumns} text will be set -in double columns until you say \CS{enddoublecolumns}. This will cause -the text collected so far to be put into two ``balanced'' columns of the -same height. You can, if you desire, return to double column mode at -any later time by saying \CS{doublecolumns} again, and you can switch -back and forth as much as you like. However, keep in mind that -frequently switching between single and double columns will make it very -difficult for \TeXsis\ to choose good points to break columns and pages, -and you may get an error message warning you that a column cannot be -balanced. - -%\bigbreak -%\pagecheck{3cm} - -A simple example of the use of these double column commands is the -following: -\TeXexample -\SetDoubleColumns{0.47\hsize} -\doublecolumns\tenpoint -{\bf BISMUTH} (Ger.\ {\it Weisse Masse}, white mass; later -{\it Wismuth} and {\it Bisemutum}, Bi; at.~wt. 308.981; -at.~no. 83; m.p. 271.3$^\circ$C; b.p. 1560 $\pm$ 5$^\circ$C; -sp.~gr. 9.747 (20$^\circ$); valence 3 or~5. In early times -bismuth was confused with tin and lead. Claude Geoffroy the -Younger showed it to be distinct from lead . . . - . . . . . . . -. . . High purity bismuth metal costs about \$4/lb. -\enddoublecolumns -|endTeXexample -\noindent -Here the column size is chosen to be slightly less than half of the -\cs{hsize} (0.47 times the \cs{hsize}) to allow some space (called the -``gutter'') between the two columns. The result is the -following:\reference{CRC} -\booktitle{Handbook of Chemistry and Physics}, 56th Edition, -(CRC Press, Cleveland, Ohio, 1974), pg. B-9 -\endreference -\medbreak - -% set up double column mode: -\SetDoubleColumns{0.47\hsize} - -\doublecolumns\tenpoint\baselineskip=12pt plus 1pt \relax -{\bf BISMUTH} (Ger.\ {\it Weisse Masse}, white mass; later {\it Wismuth} -and {\it Bisemutum}, Bi; at.~wt. 308.981; at.~no. 83; m.p. -271.3$^\circ$C; b.p. 1560 $\pm$ 5$^\circ$C; sp.~gr. 9.747 (20$^\circ$); -valence 3 or~5. In early times bismuth was confused with tin and lead. -Claude Geoffroy\index{Geoffroy, Claude} the Younger showed it to be -distinct from lead in 1753. It is a white, crystalline, brittle metal -with a pinkish tinge. It occurs native. The most important ores are -{\it bismuthinite} or {\it bismuth glance} (Bi$_2$S$_3$) and {\it -bismite} (Bi$_2$O$_3$). Peru, Japan, Mexico, Bolivia, and Canada are -major \idx{bismuth} producers. Much of the bismuth produced in the U.S. is -obtained as a by-product in refining lead, copper, tin, silver, and -gold ores. Bismuth is the most diamagnetic of all metals, and the -thermal conductivity is lower than any metal, except mercury. It has a -high electrical resistance, and has the highest \idx{Hall effect} of any -metal (i.e., greatest increase in electrical resistance when placed in -a magnetic field). ``Bismanol'' is a permanent magnet of high coercive -force, made of MnBi, by the U.S. Naval Ordnance Laboratory. Bismuth -expands 3.32\% on solidification. This property makes bismuth alloys -particularly suited to the making of sharp castings of objects subject -to damage by high temperatures. With other metals, such as tin, -\idx{cadmium}, etc., bismuth forms low-melting alloys which are extensively -used for safety devices used in \idx{fire detection} and extinguishing -systems. Bismuth is used in producing malleable irons and is finding use -as a catalyst for making acrylic fibers. When bismuth is heated in air -it burns with a blue flame forming yellow fumes of the oxide. The metal -is also used as a \idx{thermocouple} material (has highest negativity -known), and has found application as a carrier for U$^{235}$ or -U$^{238}$ fuel in \idx{atomic reactors}. Its soluble salts are -characterized by forming insoluble basic salts on the addition of water, -a property sometimes used in detection work. Bismuth oxychloride is -used extensively in cosmetics. Bismuth subnitrate and subcarbonate are -used in medicine. High purity bismuth metal costs about \$4/lb. -\enddoublecolumns - -\nobreak -\medskip - - The \cs{IEEE}, \cs{PhysRev}, and \cs{NorthHollandTwo} document formats -described in \Sect{fmts} also use these double column macros. - -\bigbreak - - Any document prepared for double column output using the macros just -described can also be printed in the simpler single column mode very -easily, simply by leaving out the \CS{SetDoubleColumns}. Without the -initialization provided by \CS{SetDoubleColumns} the \cs{doublecolumns} -and \cs{enddoublecolumns} commands do nothing (they are, in fact, the -same as saying \cs{relax}). However, if you restore the -\CS{SetDoubleColumns} command, or invoke one of the specialized document -styles which use double column output (like \cs{PhysRev}) they will come -back to life and perform as required. - -\bigbreak - - In double column mode displayed equations that fit within a -single column are typed within the usual |$$|\ttdots|$$|. If an equation -is too long then it may have to be printed across both columns. This is -easily done by saying \CS{longequation} before the |$$| which begins the -equation and \CS{endlongequation} after the |$$| which ends the -equation, like so:\index{double columns!long equations}% -\TeXexample -|smalltt\longequation -$$ -\psi_{nlm}(r,\theta,\phi) - = [({2Z \over n a_0})^3 {(n-l-1)! \over 2n(n+l)!} ]^{1 \over 2} - \, (\rho)^l \, e^{-\rho / 2} \, \, - L_{n-l-1}^{2l+1} (\rho) \,\, Y_l^m(\theta,\phi) -$$ -\endlongequation -|endTeXexample -\noindent -The command \CS{longequation} invokes \cs{enddoublecolumns} to end -double column mode and balance the partial double columns, and it will -also draw a ruled line across the bottom of the left column. After the -equation has been completed \CS{endlongequation} invokes -\cs{doublecolumns} to go back to double column mode, and it also draws a -rule across the top of the right column. - - The purpose of these ruled lines is to guide the reader's eye from the -incomplete left column to the right column above the equation, and to -the top of the incomplete right column from the left column below the -long equation. The default style of these rules is the same as is used -by {\sl Physical Review}. The rules are drawn by macros called -\CS{leftcolrule} and \CS{rightcolrule}, and these can be changed either -by you or by a style file. For -example, if you don't want these rules you can turn them off simply -by redefining these macros to be \cs{relax}: -\TeXexample - \def\leftcolrule{\relax} - \def\rightcolrule{\relax} -|endTeXexample -\noindent -As with the other double column macros, \CS{longequation} and -\CS{endlongequation} do nothing if they are invoked when double column -mode has not been initialized with \CS{SetDoubleColumns}, to make it -easy to print the document in single column mode. - - Keep in mind that when dealing with long equations which span both -columns, switching frequently between single and double columns will -almost certainly cause trouble in balancing the double columns. Also -note that each separate piece of double-column material forms its own -group, so any definitions made inside that group will be forgotten -outside it. To avoid this problem put all definitions at the beginning of the -paper, before double column mode is begun. Alternatively, make your -definitions global by using \cs{gdef} rather than \cs{def}. - -\bigbreak - - Figures, tables, or other floating insertions can be inserted -within a single column using the usual insertion commands of \TeX\ and -\TeXsis:\index{double columns!insertions} \cs{topinsert}, \cs{midinsert}, -\cs{pageinsert}, \cs{bottominsert}, or \cs{heavyinsert}, all of which -are terminated as usual by \cs{endinsert}. A \cs{midinsert} or -\cs{heavyinsert} will appear in the column where it is called for, -unless it won't fit, in which case it migrates to the next {\sl -column} (rather than all the way to the next page). You can force an -insertion into a particular column by placing {\sl within} the -insertion either \CS{forceleft} or \CS{forceright}. Since insertions -which have been forced into the left or right columns are handled -separately, an insertion which fails to fit on a page is moved to the -same column of the next page and not just to the next column. This means -that if there are several figures per page, then the figures can -easily appear in the wrong order. Also, a \cs{topinsert} which follows -a wide equation on a page will be placed after the equation, not at -the top of the page. Such problems can easily be corrected by moving -the insertion to a better place in the manuscript file. - - -Besides putting insertions in one column or the other, it is also -sometimes desirable to be able to put an insertion across the full width -of the page. These ``wide'' insertions can be made with ``wide'' -versions of some of the the insertions already mentioned: -\CS{widetopinsert}, \CS{widepageinsert} and \CS{widebottominsert} -(there is no such thing as |\widemidinsert| or |\wideheavyinsert|). These -wide insertions behave just like their more conventional counterparts -when in single column mode. - - The standard \TeXsis\ macros for table and figure insertions -described in \Sect{tbls} use \cs{topinsert} and cousins, and so make -insertions within a single column in double column format. -There are also macros to make two-column wide tables and figures: -\index{double columns!figures and tables}% -\description{Xwidetable}\clump -% -\itm{\CS{widetable}\arg{label\/}} -Insert a two-column wide table, with the tag \meta{label\/}, at the top of the -current page. -% -\itm{\CS{widefigure}\arg{label\/}} -Insert a two-column wide figure, with the tag \meta{label\/}, at the top of the -current page. -% -\itm{\CS{widetopfigure}\arg{label\/}} -A synonym for |\widefigure|. -% -\itm{\CS{widefulltable}\arg{label\/}} -Insert a two-column wide, full-page table, with the tag \meta{label\/}. -% -\itm{\CS{widefullfigure}\arg{label\/}} -Insert a two-column wide, full-page figure, with the tag \meta{label\/}. -% -\enddescription -\noindent -These also behave correctly in single column document formats. - -\bigbreak -%================ - -Here is a summary of the commands which can be used to set-up and -control double column mode: -\description{Xdoublecolumns\quad}\clump -% -\itm{\CS{SetDoubleColumns}\arg{c-width}} -Set up the double column format, using the current \cs{hsize} and -\cs{vsize} for the total size of the page and \meta{c-width} for the -column width. -% -\itm{\CS{doublecolumns}} -Begin double column mode. -% -\itm{\CS{newcolumn}} -Force a \idx{column break}, much like \cs{newpage} forces a page break. -% -\itm{\CS{enddoublecolumns}} -End double column mode, making balanced double columns, -% -\itm{\CS{longequation}} -Begins a ``long'' equation which cannot fit within one column -and therefore must stretch across both columns. This balances the -columns, putting a \CS{leftcolrule} below the left column, and then -enters single column mode. -% -\itm{\CS{endlongequation}} -Ends a long equation, returning to double column mode and -putting a \CS{rightcolrule} above the right column of the text following. -% -\enddescription - -%>>> EOF TXSdcol.doc <<< diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSdoc.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSdoc.doc deleted file mode 100644 index 521fca0e85e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSdoc.doc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,55 +0,0 @@ -%% file: TXSdoc.doc - Manual Master File - TeXsis version 2.18 -%% @(#) $Id: TXSdoc.doc,v 18.2 2000/05/17 00:19:46 myers Exp $ -%======================================================================* -% (C) Copyright 1989, 1992, 1997 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige -% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications -% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL). -% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL -%======================================================================* - -\book % ``book'' document style (mostly) - -\input TXSdocM.doc % special macros for this manual -\markindexfalse % proof marks for index entries OFF! -\ContentsSwitchtrue % be sure contents pages are made - - -%% Save trees and print this double sided if you can. Otherwise, -%% Uncomment this to get the page numbers correct for single sided. -% \bookpagenumbersfalse - - -% Uncomment the following line to make a HyperTeXt linked -% version of the Manual: (Experimental) -%\htmltrue % HyperText links ON - - -\input TXSdoc0.doc % Title page -\pageno = 1 -\input TXSintro.doc % introduction -\input TXSfonts.doc % typestyles and line spacing -\input TXSeqns.doc % equation numbering, easyparens -\input TXSsymb.doc % special symbols -\input TXSprns.doc % easy parentheses -\input TXSrefs.doc % references -\input TXStags.doc % labeling things -\input TXSsects.doc % chapters and sections and titles -\input TXSfigs.doc % figures and tables -\TOCwrite{\string\pagecheck{2cm}}% skip to next page between major divisions -\input TXSenvmt.doc % special text environments -\input TXSfmts.doc % special document formats -\input TXSletr.doc % letter and memo formats -\input TXSdcol.doc % double column format -\input TXSmisc.doc % miscellaneous macros - -\TOCwrite{\string\bigskip\string\nosechead{Appendices:}}% title in TOC -\input TXSinstl.doc % appendix on installation -\input TXSrevs.doc % appendix on revision records -\input TXSapxF.doc % appendix on font tables -\input TXSend.doc % end material, references, etc... - -\tracingstats=1 % how much memory did that use? - -\bye - -%>>> EOF TXSdoc.doc <<< diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSdoc0.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSdoc0.doc deleted file mode 100644 index 254c56eaa70..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSdoc0.doc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,293 +0,0 @@ -%% file: TXSdoc0.doc - Manual Title Pages - TeXsis version 2.18 -%% @(#) $Id: TXSdoc0.doc,v 18.2 2000/05/17 00:19:46 myers Exp $ -%=======================================================================* -% (C) Copyright 1989, 1992, 1994, 1996 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige -% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications -% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL). -% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL -%======================================================================* -\ifx\undefined\meta\texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\input Manual.aux\draft\fi - -% First print the outside cover page and back - -\begingroup -\pageno=0 -\nopagenumbers - -% Just define needed large fonts; otherwise some systems may run out -% of font space! - -\font\fourteenbf=cmbx10 scaled \magstep2 -\font\sixteenbf=cmbx10 scaled \magstep3 -\font\twentybf=cmbx10 scaled \magstep4 -\font\twentyfourbf=cmbx10 scaled \magstep5 - -\titlepage -\pageno=0 -\null -\begingroup - \singlespaced - \line{\hfill \TeXsis~\fmtversion} - \line{\hfill \revdate} -\endgroup - -\vskip 1.0in plus 1fil - -\title -\endcenter \flushleft \Tbf\singlespaced -\twentyfourbf \TeXsis -\vskip .25 cm -\hrule height .2cm -\vskip .1cm -\hrule height .07cm -\vskip .25cm -\sixteenbf \TeX\ Macros for Physicists -\endflushleft\center -\endtitle - -\vskip 1.5in plus 1fil - -\flushleft -\singlespaced\parskip=0pt -{\fourteenbf Eric Myers} -\vskip 3pt \hrule \vskip 3pt -Department of Physics -University of Michigan -Ann Arbor, Michigan - -\vskip 2cm - -{\fourteenbf Frank E. Paige} -\vskip 3pt \hrule \vskip 3pt -Physics Department -Brookhaven National Laboratory -Upton, New York -\endflushleft -\endtitlepage - -% A blank page for the back of the cover page - -\null -\pageno=0 -\newpage -\endgroup - -%==================================================* -% Now the inside title page - -\titlepage % begin title page -\pageno=-1 -\nopagenumbers -\line{\revdate \hfill \TeXsis\ \fmtversion} % a banner of sorts -\vbox{\vskip.75in} % some whitespace -\title % the title -\TeXsis -\TeX\ Macros for Physicists -\endtitle -\author -Eric Myers -Department of Physics -University of Michgian -Ann Arbor, Michigan 48109-1120~USA -\endauthor -\and -\author -Frank E. Paige -Physics Department -Brookhaven National Laboratory -Upton, New York 11973~USA -\endauthor -% -\abstract -\TeXsis\ is a collection of \TeX\ macros for typesetting many kinds of -physics documents, including research papers, preprints -and ``e-prints,'' -conference proceedings, theses, books, -referee reports, -letters, and memoranda. -% -\TeXsis\ macros provide automatic numbering of equations, automatic -numbering and formatting of references, double column formatting, macros -for making tables and figures, with or without captions, and including -tables with horizontal and vertical rules. -% -\TeXsis\ supports a wide variety of type sizes and a number of -specialized document formats, and it even includes macros for making -form letters for job applications or letters of recommendation. -% -This document describes version \fmtversion\ of \TeXsis, and also serves -as an example of its use. -% -\endabstract -\endtitlepage -%======================================================================* -% back page of title - -\pageno=-2 % page ``ii'' -\begingroup -\tenpoint -\TeXquoteon - -\centerline{\TeXsis: \TeX\ Macros for Physicists} -\bigskip - - -\noindent -For the latest information about \TeXsis\ consult the \TeXsis\ home -page, at -\example -\URL{http://www.texsis.org} -\endexample - - -\noindent -Source code and documentation for \TeXsis\ are available via -the Internet at -\example -\URL{ftp://ftp.texsis.org}. -\endexample -[You can also use ``anonymous ftp'' instead of a Web brower. -In that case, run ftp on your computer and connect to -ftp.texsis.org, -give the login name "anonymous" and your e-mail address as the -password. Issue the command ``{\tt cd texsis}'' to change to the {\tt -texsis} subdirectory. ] - -The files for Unix machines are in a gzip compressed tar file -with a name like {\tt TeXsis-X.XX.tar.gz}, where {\tt X.XX} is the -version number. -There are also subdirectories for \TeXsis\ packaged for Macintosh, -PC's (DOS or Windows), VMS (Vax computers), Linux, and Amiga. -The code is the same in any case, it's just packed differently for -different machines. -See the {\tt README} file on the TeXsis ftp server for more details. -If you have problems with this server, please send e-mail to {\tt -texsis@umich.edu}. - -The \TeXsis\ distribution on the TeXsis ftp server is also mirrored by -CTAN (the Common TeX Archive Network). -You may find it easier to get \TeXsis\ from a nearby CTAN site. -To find the CTAN site nearest you finger -\linkto{/cgi-bin/finger?ctan@ftp.tex.ac.uk}{\tt ctan@ftp.tex.ac.uk}. -The files can be found in the directory {\tt macros/texsis/}. - - Small improvements and bug corrections for \TeXsis\ are distributed -as patches in the patch file |TXSpatch.tex|. -If there is such a file in the |/texsis| directory you should copy it -as well. - - -\vfill - - We would be grateful to hear of any errors found in this -documentation or in the software, and we also invite suggestions for -improvements to both. -We try to correct errors as quickly as possible, and we try to improve -\TeXsis\ as our time allows. -When reporting an error in the code it would help a great deal if you -would send us a copy of the relevant sections of the manuscript file, -the log file, and if possible a sample of any output generated. -It would be even better if you could break your example down into a -short file that demonstrates the error on a single page or two. - -\vskip 0.5cm plus 1 fill - -\noindent -To contact us send e-mail to {\tt texsis@umich.edu} or: -\bigskip -\settabs\+Internet Electronic Mail:\quad - & Boston Massachusetts 02215 USA\quad - & Brookhaven National Laboratory \cr % sample line -\+Electronic Mail: -& myers@umich.edu & paige@bnl.gov \cr -\bigskip -\+Surface Mail: - & Eric Myers & Frank E. Paige \cr -\+& Department of Physics & Physics Department \cr -\+& 2477 Randall Laboratory & Box 510A \cr -\+& University of Michigan & Brookhaven National Laboratory \cr -\+& Ann Arbor, MI 48109-1120 USA & Upton, NY 11973 USA \cr -\bigskip - - -% ----- DISCLAIMERS - -\vskip 0.25cm plus 1 fill - -\bigskip -\noindent -\TeX\ is a trademark of the American Mathematical Society. - -\noindent -UNIX is a trademark of Unix System Laboratories, Inc. - -\noindent -Copyright \copyright\ 1990, 1991, 1992, 1994, 1997, 1999 -by Eric A. Myers and Frank E. Paige. -\hfill\break\noindent -Distribution and/or modification of the \TeXsis\ source code and -documentation is allowed under the terms of the -\linkto{ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL}{LaTeX Project Public -License (LPPL)}. -\TeXsis\ is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the -implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. - - -\vskip 0.5cm plus 1fill -\line{\fmtname\ \fmtversion \hfil Printed \today} - -\endgroup % end \tenpoint -\eject - -% -- TABLE OF CONTENTS, page iii - -\vfill\eject % new page -\pageno=-3 % contents on iii, iv, ... -\nosechead{\fourteenbf \linkname{sect.TOC}{Contents}} % no section number -\bigskip % needs some space -\setHeadline{Table of Contents}% -\def\ContentsFormat{\parskip=0pt\singlespaced % - \advance\baselineskip by 0.5pt plus 1pt minus 1pt} -\tag{page.TOC}{\folio} % tag page for TOC -\Contents % make table of contents - - -% -- LIST OF TABLES AND FIGURES - -\vfill\eject - -\begingroup % keep changes local -\parskip=0pt\singlespaced % like contents -\advance\baselineskip by 1pt plus 1pt minus 1pt % like contents - -\vbox to 0.4\vsize{% - \nosechead{\fourteenbf List of Tables}% % no section number - \medskip % needs some space - \ListTables - \vfill} % list tables - -\bigskip -\bigskip -\nosechead{\fourteenbf List of Figures} % no section number -\medskip % needs some space -\ListFigures % list tables - -\endgroup - -% -- If the manual is to be printed double sided then we may need -% an extra blank page in the head material to get it right. -% if so, use this.... - -\vfill\eject % - -\ifbookpagenumbers % only if page numbers for double sided - \ifodd\pageno\else % only if even - \global\def\HeadText{{\hss}}% clear heading - \vbox to \vsize{\vss - \centerline{This page was intentionally left blank}% - \centerline{(for double sided printing)}% - \vss}% - \fi -\fi % end ifodd - -%>>> EOF TXSdoc0.doc <<< diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSdocM.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSdocM.doc deleted file mode 100644 index 5d0811e38c1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSdocM.doc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,142 +0,0 @@ -%% file: TXSdocM.doc - Macros for the Manual - TeXsis 2.18 -%% @(#) $Id: TXSdocM.doc,v 18.2 2000/05/17 00:19:46 myers Exp $ -%======================================================================* -% (C) Copyright 1989, 1992, 1997 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige -% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications -% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL). -% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL -%======================================================================* -% Document Format for the TeXsis manual: - -\ATunlock % allow @ macros here -\twelvepoint -\singlespaced % single spaced -\singlelinetrue % for \description -\Contentsfalse % don't bother with table of contents (DRAFT) - -\parskip=\medskipamount % some extra space between paragraphs -\EnvRightskip=0pt % allow environments all the way right -\RunningHeadstrue % do show running headlines - -\input epsf % epsf figures - -% We begin a new \section on a new page. This does it automatically: - -\def\everysection{\vfill\eject} - -\sectionminspace=0.25\vsize % subsections too -\subsectionskip=2\baselineskip - - -% -- Font selections: - -\def\Tbf{\sixteenpoint\bf} -\def\tbf{\sixteenpoint\bf} -\def\HeadFont{\tenpoint\sl} % print running headlines in slanted type -\def\smalltt{\tenpoint\tt} % for long \TeXexample's -\def\em{\sl} % \em for emphasis - -% -- some useful symbols and such - -\def\bs{\char92} % '\' for macro names -\def\VT{\char'174} % vertical bar -\def\offtt{\TeXquoteoff\tt} % \tt with | allowed -\def\ttdots{{\tt\phantom{0}...\phantom{0}}}% '...' with correct spacing -\def\lb{{\tt\char'173}} % { in \tt -\def\rb{{\tt\char'175}} % } in \tt -\let\rqbrack=\} % save right curly bracket -\let\lqbrack=\{ % save left curly bracket - - -% \meta{stuff} was our way of doing <stuff> in text. Knuth used -% \<stuff> in the TeXbook, so I use that too. The only change -% I made was to force \rm -EAM - -\def\<#1>{\leavevmode\hbox{$\langle$\rm #1\/$\rangle$}} % syntactic quantity -\def\meta#1{\leavevmode\hbox{$\langle$\rm #1\/$\rangle$}} % new \meta - -% \arg is like \meta but it put's the <thing> in braces too. - -\def\arg#1{\lb\<#1>\rb} - -\def\Sect#1{Sect\-ion~\use{sect.#1}} % section number -\obsolete\SEC\Sect % old synonym - -% \clump will ``clump'' closer together the material in a \definition -% or \itemize - -\def\clump{% % "clump" \definitions and \itemize - \parskip=\baselineskip % \parskip is what \baselineskip was - \advance \parskip by 0pt plus 2pt % add some stretch - \singlespaced % singlespaced - \singlelinetrue} % long guys on own line - -% -- the ``competition'' - -\def\TeXbook{{\sl The \TeX book}\index{TeXbook@{\TeXbook}}} % The TeXbook -\def\LaTeX{% the LaTeX symbol - {\rm L\kern -.36em\raise .3ex\hbox {A}\kern -.15em\TeX}} -\def\AmSTeX{% the AMSTeX symbol - $\cal A\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox{$\cal M$}\kern-.075em S$-\TeX} - -\def\BibTeX{{\rm B\kern-.05em\hbox{$\scriptstyle\rm IB$}\kern-.08em\TeX}} - -% modify \emsg to recognize thes - -\def\emsg#1{\relax% write an error/information message to the screen - \begingroup % disable special characters - \def\@quote{"}% % to output " - \def\TeX{TeX}\def\label##1{}\def\use{\string\use}% - \def\BibTeX{BibTeX}\def\LaTeX{LaTeX}% - \def\ { }\def~{ }% spaces are spaces - \def\tt{}\def\bf{}\def\Tbf{}\def\tbf{}% - \def\break{}\def\n{}\def\singlespaced{}\def\doublespaced{}% - \immediate\write16{#1}% - \endgroup} - - -% -- some goodies from manmac.tex - -\def\bull{\vrule height .9ex width .8ex depth -.1ex } % square bullet -\def\SS{{\it SS}} % scriptscript style -\def\|{\leavevmode\hbox{\tt\char`\|}} % vertical line -\def\dn{\leavevmode\hbox{\tt\char'14}} % downward arrow -\def\up{\leavevmode\hbox{\tt\char'13}} % upward arrow - -\def\pt{\,{\rm pt}} % units of points, in math formulas - -\def\oct#1{\hbox{\rm\'{}\kern-.2em\it#1\/\kern.05em}} % octal constant -\def\hex#1{\hbox{\rm\H{}\tt#1}} % hexadecimal constant -\def\cstok#1{\leavevmode\thinspace\hbox{\vrule\vtop{\vbox{\hrule\kern1pt - \hbox{\vphantom{\tt/}\thinspace{\tt#1}\thinspace}} - \kern1pt\hrule}\vrule}\thinspace} % control sequence token - -% -- The index is constructed with index.tex and MakeIndex - -\input index -\ATunlock % make sure @ is still a letter after index.tex -%%\markindextrue % proof marks for index entries (DRAFT ONLY) - -% Use \cs{foo} to get \foo in \tt type and make an entry in the -% index. Use \CS{foo} to get \foo in \tt type and make an BOLD -% (defining) entry in the index. - -\TeXquoteoff % be sure | in \index is not active - -\def\cs#1{% - {\tt\bs #1}\index{#1@{\tt\bs #1}|pg}% % put it in text and index it. - \ifmarkindex % mark index entries in right margin? - \llap{\lower\jot\vbox to 0pt{\vss % box it - \tightboxit{\loosebox{\phantom{\tt\bs #1}}}}\hskip-\jot}% - \fi} - -\def\CS#1{% - {\tt\bs #1}\index{#1@{\tt\bs #1}|bold}% % put it in text and index it. - \ifmarkindex % mark index entries in right margin? - \llap{\lower\jot\vbox to 0pt{\vss % box it - \tightboxit{\loosebox{\phantom{\tt\bs #1}}}}\hskip-\jot}% - \fi} - -\TeXquoteon - -%>>> EOF TXSdocM.doc <<< diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSend.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSend.doc deleted file mode 100644 index 2939ab55900..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSend.doc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,137 +0,0 @@ -%% TXSend.doc - End Material for the Manual - TeXsis version 2.18 -%% @(#) $Id: TXSend.doc,v 18.3 2000/05/17 00:19:46 myers Exp $ -%======================================================================* -% (C) Copyright 1989-1999 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige -% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications -% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL). -% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL -%======================================================================* -\ifx\undefined\meta\texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\draft\fi - -\fourteenfonts - -\vfill\eject % start new page -\nosechead{\fourteenbf Acknowledgments}% % no section number -\addTOC{1}{Acknowledgments}{\folio}% % add to contents -\global\def\HeadText{{\tenit Acknowledgments}} - -\noindent -\TeXsis\ began as a collection of macros used by -E.~Myers\reference{TeXsis-1.00} -E.~Myers, -\booktitle{\TeX sis Version 1.00} (unpublished) -\endreference -to typeset his Ph.D. thesis.\reference{Myers, 1984} -E.~Myers, -\booktitle{Calculation of the Gravitational Casimir Energy and Gauge Field -Couplings in Non-Abelian Kaluza-Klein Theories}, -Ph.D.\ thesis (unpublished), Yale University, 1984 -\endreference -These were in turn developed from a collection of macros -for creating technical reports known as \idx{TechRpt}. -We don't know for sure who wrote TechRpt, but the manual we used was -written by W.~Groppe\reference{Groppe} -W.~Groppe, -\booktitle{TechRpt} (unpublished) -\endreference -so he may be the author of the macros as well. -% -The original \BibTeX\ support, including {\tt texsis.bst}, was written -by Bernd Dammann. - - -\bigskip - - -We wish to thank Isabel Harrity\index{Harrity, Isabel} for her patience -in trying this code while it was originally being developed. -Various other people have also given us suggestions, criticisms, and -comments regarding the code and documentation for \TeXsis; among them we -would like to thank: - Vladimir Alexiev, - Betty Armstrong, - Akif Baysal, - Richard Brown, - Bernd Dammann, - Vickie Darnell, - Leo Eskin, - Mira Franke, - Ralf Gaertner, - Romano Giannetti, - Don Groom, - Donavan Hall, - Scott Hannahs, - Diab Jerius, - Arik Kapulkin, - Kate Logan, - Bob Love, - Michael Morrison, - T.C. Pierce, - Jeroen Rommers, - Norbert Roth, - Kurt Stump, - David Su\'arez de Lis, - Anil Trivedi, - and - Samir Varma. -Additional suggestions are welcome and will be incorporated in future -versions of \TeXsis\ when possible. - -This work was supported in part by the United States Department -of Energy under contracts DE-AC02-76CH00016 and DE-AC02-89ER40509, -and in part by the National Science Foundation under grant number -PHY8919177. - -% -- LIST OF REFERENCES - -\nosechead{\fourteenbf References}% % no section number -\addTOC{1}{References}{\folio}% % add to contents -\setHeadline{References}% % running head text -\ListReferences % print references - -% -- THE INDEX - -\vfill\supereject -\SetDoubleColumns{0.47\hsize} -\nosechead{\fourteenbf Index} -\addTOC{1}{Index}{\folio}% % add to contents -\tag{pg.index}{\folio} -\setHeadline{{Index}}% % running head text -\bigskip\bigskip -\def\bold#1{\linkto{page.#1}{\bf #1}}% % boldface for |bold -\def\italic#1{\linkto{page.#1}{\it #1}}% % italics for |italic -\def\slanted#1{\linkto{page.#1}{\sl #1}}% % slanted for |slanted -\def\pg#1{{\rm #1}}% % roman for |reg -\index{recursion|see{recursion}} % I couldn't resist this -EAM -% -\immediate\openin\patchfile=Manual.ind % try to open the index file -\ifeof\patchfile % EOF? Then it's not there - \closein\patchfile % so just close it. - \emsg{> Cannot find the processed index file Manual.ind.}%% tell them. - \meta{There is no index. I cannot find the file Manual.ind\/} -\else - \immediate\closein\patchfile % close it to read with \input - \footline={{\hfil\tenpoint (Boldface page numbers are the defining - entries) \hfil}}% % helpful footline - \doublecolumns % index in double columns - \singlespaced - \baselineskip=14pt plus 1pt\relax % allow stretch - \input Manual.ind - \vfill - \enddoublecolumns -\fi -% -\vfill\eject % next... -\footline={\relax} % footline back to nothing - -% if the last page is even then print ``nothing'', for duplex printers - -\ifbookpagenumbers - \ifodd\pageno\else - \global\def\HeadText{{\hss}}% clear heading - \vbox to \vsize{\vss - \centerline{This page was unintentionally left blank.}% :-) - \vss} - \fi % end ifodd -\fi -% >>> EOF TSXend.doc <<< diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSenvmt.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSenvmt.doc deleted file mode 100644 index 34de0ac5927..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSenvmt.doc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,610 +0,0 @@ -%% file: TXSenvmt.doc - Environments - TeXsis version 2.18 -%% @(#) $Id: TXSenvmt.doc,v 18.2 2000/05/17 00:19:46 myers Exp $ -%======================================================================* -% (C) copyright 1988, 1991, 1994 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige. -% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications -% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL). -% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL -%======================================================================* -\ifx\undefined\bs \texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\draft\input Manual.aux\fi - - -\section{Environments \label{sect.envmt}} - - \TeX\ ordinarily provides a layout appropriate for straight text -and equations. The \TeXsis\ macros described below create environments -which bypass the normal layout to format text in special ways, to create -different types of lists, to display theorems and proofs, to display -computer code, and even to print \TeX\ examples. With the exception of -some of the specialized \TeX\ example macros, the syntax for all of -these is generally of the form ``|\thing|...'' to begin the environment -and ``|\endthing|'' to end it. - -%==================================================* -\subsection{Flush or Centered Text} - - There are three environments in \TeXsis\ which center lines, set -them flush left, or set them flush right, respectively: -\description{~endflushright~\qquad}\clump - -\itm{\CS{center}} -Centers all lines which follow, up to |\endcenter|. - -\itm{\CS{flushleft}} -The lines which follow, up to |\endflushleft|, -are made to line up flush to the left margin. - -\itm{\CS{flushright}} -The lines which follow, up to |\endflushright|, -are made to line up flush to the right margin. -\enddescription -In all of these environments line endings -in the input file {\sl are} obeyed, as with \cs{obeylines}. -\index{lines!centering}\index{lines!flush left}\index{lines!flush right}% -For example, -\TeXexample -\center -A Centered Line -and Another -\endcenter -|endTeXexample -produces - -\center\singlespaced\parskip=0pt -A Centered Line -and Another -\endcenter -\noindent -There is also a \CS{raggedcenter} environment which does not respect line -breaks but instead produces centered lines each of which is made as long -as possible: -\description{~raggedcenter~\qquad}\clump -\itm{\CS{raggedcenter}} -Center lines without respecting line endings. -Terminate with |\endraggedcenter|. -\enddescription -\goodbreak\noindent -For example -\def\|{\ifmmode\Vert\else \char`\|\fi} -\TeXexample -\raggedcenter -In the ragged centering environment each line -is made as long as possible, and -the successive lines are centered. -\endraggedcenter -|endTeXexample -produces -\raggedcenter\baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip -In the ragged centering environment each line -is made as long as possible, and -the successive lines are centered. -\endraggedcenter -\noindent -Note that \cs{raggedcenter} does not hyphenate words. - - -%==================================================* -\subsection{Simple Examples and Quoted Text} - - The \CS{example} environment can be used to display an example of -something in a way that sets it off from the main text. The indentation -of an example is the same as in the list environments (see -\Sect{env-indent}). The text in an example will be single -spaced, even if the rest of the document is double spaced. End this -environment with \cs{endexample}. An example of the use of \CS{example} -is -\TeXexample -|tentt\example -Physics is not a finished logical system. Rather, at any -moment it spans a great confusion of ideas, some that -survive like folk epics from the heroic periods of the past, -and other that arise like utopian novels from our dim -premonitions of a future grand synthesis. -\endexample -|endTeXexample -which produces\reference{Weinberg, 1972} -S.~Weinberg, -\booktitle{Gravitation and Cosmology: Principles and Applications of the -General Theory of Relativity} -(Wiley, New York, 1972) pg.~3 -\endreference\relax\index{Weinberg, Steven} -\begingroup\tenpoint -\EnvRightskip=\parindent % need this to show off defaults! -\blockquote -Physics is not a finished logical system. Rather, at any -moment it spans a great confusion of ideas, some that -survive like folk epics from the heroic periods of the past, -and other that arise like utopian novels from our dim -premonitions of a future grand synthesis. -\endexample -\endgroup -Another example of \CS{example} is given in the next subsection as an -example of the |\theorem| environment. - -Since one of the uses of \CS{example} is to display block quotes, as -we've just done above, a synonym for \CS{example} is \CS{blockquote}, -which should be ended with \CS{endblockquote}. - - -%==================================================* -\subsection{Theorems and Proofs} - - Theorems,\index{theorems} \idx{lemmas}, and \idx{corollaries} are -typeset in a quasi-SIAM format, with the number in boldface and the text -in slanted type. -They are automatically numbered, including the chapter and -section numbers if \cs{showchaptIDtrue} and \cs{showsectIDtrue} are -being used. The syntax for a theorem is -\example -\CS{theorem}\arg{label} \n -\meta{text} \n -\cs{endtheorem} \n -\CS{proof} \n -\meta{text} \n -\cs{endproof} -\endexample -\noindent -and similarly for \CS{lemma}, \CS{corollary} and \CS{definition}. -Definitions are printed in Roman type, not slanted. The -\cs{endproof} macro inserts a black box to mark the end of the -proof. Subsequent references to theorems, lemmas, corollaries -and definitions can be made in the text automatically using -\CS{Theorem}\arg{label}, \CS{Lemma}\arg{label}, -\CS{Corollary}\arg{label}, and \CS{Definition}\arg{label}, -which give the appropriate name and number. An example of a -Theorem is: -\TeXexample -|tentt\example -\theorem{Cauchy} -If $f(z)$ is a function of $z$ which is analytic on and inside of -a contour $C$, then -$$ -\int_C f(z)\,dz = 0 -$$ -\endtheorem -\proof -Left as an exercise to the reader. -\endproof -\endexample -|endTeXexample -which produces -\begingroup -\EnvRightskip=\parindent % need this to show off defaults! -\tenpoint -\example -\theorem{Cauchy} -If $f(z)$ is a function of $z$ which is analytic on and inside of -a contour $C$, then -$$ -\int_C f(z)\,dz = 0 -$$ -\endtheorem -\proof -Left as an exercise to the reader. -\endproof -\endexample -\endgroup -\noindent -Note the use of \cs{example} to indent the theorem and proof and print -them single spaced. Had the \cs{example} been omitted the theorem and -proof would have had the same margins and spacing as the rest of the text. -This theorem would be referred to in the text with |\Theorem{Cauchy}|, -which gives ``\Theorem{Cauchy}.'' This should be sufficient in most -cases, but if necessary one can refer to theorem or lemma numbers with -the primitive \cs{use}|{|\meta{type}.\meta{label}|}|, where \meta{type} is -either |Thm|, |Lem|, respectively. See Section~\use{sect.labels} for -more on the use of \cs{use}. - - -%==================================================* -\subsection{Listing Computer Code} - - The \CS{Listing} environment can be used to display computer code -or fragments of computer code. \index{listing computer code}% -The text is printed in |\tt| type with line endings respected and every -space counted. You can still use \TeX\ control sequences in this -environment, but many of the special characters like |%|, |&|, and |#| -are simply printable characters, since they are used in languages like -C. (|$|, |_| and |^| also lose any special meaning in this -environment.) Since the curly brackets used by \TeX\ are also used in C -(and other languages) they are also simply characters in the |\Listing| -environment. To perform grouping you should use \cs{bgroup} and -\cs{egroup}. The backslash is also used in C as an escape character, so -there has to be some way to print it --- you simply use |\\|; thus \cs{n} -should be typed as |\\n|. You end the listing environment with -\cs{endListing}. As an example here is a very famous little -program,\reference{K&R} -Brian W.~Kernighan and Dennis M.~Ritchie, -\booktitle{The C Programming Language}, -(Prentice Hall, Englewood Clifs, NJ, 1978) -\endreference -\index{hello@``hello, world''}% -% -\Listing -#include <stdio.h> -main() -{ - printf("hello, world\\n"); -} -\endListing -\noindent -which was created by simply typing, -\TeXexample -|tentt\Listing -#include <stdio.h> -main() -{ - printf("hello, world\\n"); -} -\endListing -|endTeXexample - - -The indentation and spacing of the of the \CS{Listing} environment are -controlled by the same parameters that control the indentation of the -list environments, as described in Sect.~\use{sect.env-indent}. In -addition, at the begining of the \CS{Listing} environment the macro -\CS{everyListing} is executed, if it exists. You can define -\CS{everyListing} to change the typestyle, type size, or spacing in the -\CS{Listing} environment. - -An alternative way to list computer code is -\CS{ListCodeFile}\arg{filename}, which will list the contents of a -source code file exactly as it appears in the file (with no need to make -|\n| into |\\n| and such). The call to this macro should {\sl not\/} be -enclosed in a |\Listing| environment. If the example program above were -contained in the source file |hello.c| it could be listed simply by -typing -\TeXexample -\ListCodeFile{hello.c} -|endTeXexample -\noindent -Long lines can bump up against the right margin. -Some extra glue has been added to help allow for this, but another way -to make such lines fit is to make the type size smaller before you -invoke -\CS{ListCodeFile} (you can do this using \CS{everyListing}). -% MAYBE THE FOLLOWING GOES AWAY SOMEDAY SOON: -Note also that tab characters in the code file may not be treated -exactly correctly. In the present implementation of \TeXsis\ they will -simply be replaced with eight spaces. We hope to be able to improve how -this macro deals with tabs in in a future release of \TeXsis, but it is -difficult to do it exactly right in all cases, so for now it may be best -to change tabs to spaces in the source file if proper tab stops are -needed. Most good editors (like emacs) already do this for you, so this -should not pose much of a problem. - - -%==================================================* -\subsection{List Environments} - - When you want to make a list of things there are several ways -to do it. The items in the list can be marked by a simple marker -(like a bullet: $\bullet$), by a number or numbers and letters (as in -an outline), or by some sort of descriptive text in the margin. -In Plain \TeX\ you -would make all of these kinds of lists using the |\item| macro. The -``list environments'' described below are generalizations of |\item| for -making these various kinds of lists:\index{lists!different kinds} -\description{~description~\qquad}\clump -\itm{\CS{itemize}} -List of paragraphs marked by a bullet ($\bullet$) or other symbol. -\index{lists!itemized}% - -\itm{\CS{enumerate}} -List of paragraphs labeled by numbers or by combinations of -numbers and letters, as for an outline. -\index{lists!enumerated}% - -\itm{\CS{description}} -List of items and paragraphs describing them.\index{lists!text labels} -\enddescription -In each list environment \cs{itm} is used to introduce each individual -item. The environments are terminated with \cs{enditemize}, -\cs{endenumerate} and \cs{enddescription}, respectively. The three -different kinds of environments can be nested to produce a list with -several levels. The indentation of and spacing above and below the list -environments can be easily controlled. This is described in -Section~\use{sect.env-indent}. - - -% ---------- -\subsubsection{Itemized lists}\relax -\CS{itemize} produces paragraphs marked by \idx{bullets}~($\bullet$) -or some other appropriate symbol; {} % a little extra space in this line -this is usually used for a short list with only a single level of -nesting where the order \hbox{either} does not matter or is already -contained in the items of the list. -\index{lists!itemized}\index{itemizing}% -%% WE NEED A BETTER SHORT EXAMPLE THAN THIS -- SOMETHING SIMPLER? -For example, |\itemize| was used to produce the list of -sections of this manual which begins -on \linkto{page.itemize}{page~\use{page.itemize}}. The first few items in -this list were produced by saying: -\TeXexample -|tentt\itemize -\itm Sect.~\use{sect.intro}: -An introduction to \TeXsis\ and the philosophy behind the macros, and -instructions on how to begin using \TeXsis. -\itm Sect.~\use{sect.fonts}: -Selecting sizes and fonts of type, choosing single, -double, or triple spacing, and automatically handling -quotation marks. -\itm Sect.~\use{sect.eqns}: -Automatic numbering of equations, automatic sizing of -parentheses and brackets, and special symbols for -physics equations.... -|endTeXexample -\goodbreak\noindent -A paragraph begun by |\itm| is not indented beyond the new left margin, -but paragraphs that follow {\sl are} indented unless |\noindent| is -specified (or if they also begin with |\itm|). - -You can change the symbol used to mark each item in the list to be -anything you want by creating your own definition of \CS{itemmark}. -For example, if you want the symbol to be a \cs{square} you -would define \CS{itemmark} to be -\TeXexample -\def\itemmark{$\square$} -|endTeXexample -\noindent -before invoking \CS{itemize}, or at least before the first |\itm|. -An example is the following important checklist:\reference{Banzai, 1984} -\booktitle{The Adventures of Buckaroo Banzai across the Eighth -Dimension}, (Twentieth Century Fox, 1984) -\endreference -\itemize -\def\itemmark{$\square$} -\itm Event timer started (display: SINED) -\itm Antenna Aligned (display: SEELED) -\itm Oscillation overthruster armed (display: DELIVERED) -\enditemize -This was produced by saying: -\TeXexample -\itemize -\def\itemmark{$\square$} -\itm Event timer started (display: SINED) -\itm Antenna Aligned (display: SEELED) -\itm Oscillation overthruster armed (display: DELIVERED) -\enditemize -|endTeXexample -\noindent -\CS{itemize} starts a new group, which is ended by the \cs{enditemize}, -so in this example \CS{itemmark} reverts back to its -previous definition when the list is finished. -You can get a ``check-mark'' symbol instead of a square by -replacing \cs{square} with \cs{surd}, or you can use any other symbol -that suits you. Note though that in this example -the \cs{square} is enclosed in math -quotes --- you will have to remember this for any symbol which is defined -in math mode. - -% ---------- -\subsubsection{Enumerated lists} - - \cs{enumerate} produces numbered paragraphs, either with a single level -or nested several levels deep, like so: -\index{lists!enumerated}% -\TeXexample -|tentt\tenpoint\parskip=0pt % this just makes our examples smaller -\enumerate -\itm Paragraph 1. -\enumerate -\itm sub-paragraph 1a. -\enumerate -\itm sub-sub-paragraph 1a(i). -\itm sub-sub-paragraph 1a(ii). -\endenumerate -\itm sub-paragraph 1b. -\itm and so on... -\endenumerate -\itm Paragraph 2. -\itm and so on... -\endenumerate -|endTeXexample -\noindent -This produces the enumerated list: -\def\ListExample{% Define once, use several times... - \tenpoint\parskip=0pt\medskip - \itm Paragraph 1. - \enumerate - \itm sub-paragraph 1a. - \enumerate - \itm sub-sub-paragraph 1a(i). - \itm sub-sub-paragraph 1a(ii). - \endenumerate - \itm sub-paragraph 1b. - \itm and so on... - \endenumerate - \itm Paragraph 2. - \itm and so on...} -\enumerate -\ListExample -\endenumerate -The default form for the paragraph numbering is called \CS{enumPoints}, -which produces numbers of the form $ii.jj.kk$. You can also have the -list printed in a standard outline format with a mixture of Roman -numerals, letters, and Arabic numerals by saying \CS{enumOutline}. -\index{lists!enumerated!styles}% -Doing so to the example above produces: -\enumOutline\enumerate -\ListExample -\endenumerate -Unless enclosed within a group, -the \CS{enumPoints} or \CS{enumOutline} style selected remains in effect -until it is changed. The punctuation following the item number is -\CS{enummark}, which by default is a period (\hbox{.}) but which can be -redefined by the user [for example, you can change it to |\rparen| to -obtain numbering of the form ``\hbox{2\rparen}'']. \CS{enummark} can -also be used to change the spacing between the numbers and the text that -follows. - -A third enumeration style, called \CS{enumNumOutline}, is also available. -Top level items are labeled by arabic numbers, the level below by -lower case roman letters, and the level below that by lower case -roman numerals. With \CS{enumNumOutline} the example above becomes: -\enumNumOutline\enumerate -\ListExample -\endenumerate - -If you prefer a different style of enumeration you can create your -own |\enumWhatever| to use in place of \CS{enumPoint} or -\CS{enumNumOutline}. To do so, copy the definition of \CS{enumPoints} or -one of its brothers, along with the comments that go with them, from the -file |TXSenvmt.tex| into a file called |TXSmods.tex| (see -Appendix~\use{install}) and then make the appropriate changes as -described in those comments. -\index{lists!enumerated!styles}% - -% ---------- -\subsubsection{Lists Labeled by Text}\relax -\CS{description} is used to create a list of words or other -items labeled by some text. -The syntax is\index{lists!text labels} -\example\tenrm -\CS{description}\arg{sample text} \n -\cs{itm}\arg{label 1} |Paragraph 1...| \n -\cs{itm}\arg{label 2} |Paragraph 2...| \n -\cs{itm}|{...}| \n -|\enddescription| -\endexample -The argument \meta{sample text} is not printed, but its length is used -to determine the indentation for the labels on the items, so it -should be the longest item, followed by some extra space. For example, the -descriptions of the flush and centered environments at the beginning of -this section of the manual were typeset with -\TeXexample -|tentt\description{~flushright~\qquad} -\itm{\CS{center}} -Center each line. -\itm{\CS{flushleft}} -Set each line flush left. -\itm{\CS{flushright}} -Set each line flush right. -\enddescription -|endTeXexample -since |\flushright| is the longest of the three items. (|\CS| is a -special macro defined for this manual for printing control sequence -names.) Each item in the list is separated by a \cs{parskip}, -just as in itemized or enumerated lists. - -If the label text for an item comes out wider than the space -allowed, the text will usually be broken into several lines -so that it will fit in the indented margin (if this is possible!). -Saying \CS{singlelinetrue} will instead put the label text on a -line by itself, above the item. \CS{singlelinefalse} is the default, -but this manual has been printed with \CS{singlelinetrue}. - - -%==================================================* -\subsubsection{Spacing of List Environments \label{sect.env-indent}} - -Each of the list environments described above is surrounded by the -following skips: -\index{lists!indentation}% -\TeXexample -\EnvTopskip = \medskipamount % space above the list -\EnvBottomskip = \medskipamount % space below the list -\EnvLeftskip = 2\parindent % left indent for the list -\EnvRightskip = \parindent % right margin moves in too -|endTeXexample -\noindent -You can change these as you please to any legal \TeX\ dimension. The -space between -items which are begun by \cs{itm} is taken from the \cs{parskip}. Since the -list environment begins a group you can change the |\parskip| inside -this group to control the spacing between |\itm|'s. For example, if you -wanted no extra space between the items in the list you could say -set the |\parskip| to zero, as in, -\TeXexample -\itemize -\parskip=0pt \def\itemmark{$\triangleright$} -\itm Event timer started (display: SINED) -\itm Antenna Aligned (display: SEELED) -\itm Oscillation overthruster armed (display: DELIVERED) -\enditemize -|endTeXexample -\noindent -which would produce: - -\itemize -\parskip=0pt \def\itemmark{$\triangleright$} -\itm Event timer started (display: SINED) -\itm Antenna Aligned (display: SEELED) -\itm Oscillation overthruster armed (display: DELIVERED) -\enditemize - - -%==================================================* -\subsection{\TeX\ example macros} - - Typing \TeX\ examples can't be done in either the \cs{example} -environment nor the |\Listing| environment, because the backslash must -be turned into a simple printing character. There are several ways \TeXsis\ -allows you to show examples of \TeX\ code. First, to display \TeX\ -instructions separately, use -\index{TeX@\TeX, typing examples}% -\description{~TeXexample~\qquad}\clump -% -\itm{\CS{TeXexample}} -Prints like an \cs{example}, but verbatim in \cs{tt} type, with -``{\offtt |}'' made the escape character. Note that you must therefore -say {\offtt |endTeXexample} to end the example, since "{\tt\bs}" is no -longer the escape character! -\enddescription -To display \TeX\ instructions in running text use -\description{~TeXexample~\qquad}\clump -% -\itm{\CS{TeXquoteon}} -Make ``{\offtt |}'' a "\TeX\ quote" so that everything between -{\offtt |}'s is printed verbatim in |\tt| type. -% -\itm{\CS{TeXquoteoff}} -Turns off "\TeX\ quotes." -% -\enddescription - -All of the displayed examples in this document have been typed using -\CS{TeXexample}, and many of the inline examples have been typed by -putting \CS{TeXquoteon} at the beginning of the document and then typing -{\offtt |\bs whatever\ttdots|}. For both \CS{TeXexample} and -\CS{TeXquoteon} the only special character is the escape character -``{\offtt |}''. In particular one must type -\example\obeylines\tt -\bs TeXexample -\meta{TeX stuff} -\char124endTeXexample -\endexample -with {\offtt |endTeXexample} instead of |\endTeXexample|. All other -characters are set in |\tt| type without any interpretation. The input -line breaks and spacing are respected, including any leading spaces on -the lines. \TeX\ commands can be used within a |\TeXexample| environment -by typing {\offtt |macro} in place of |\macro|, {\offtt |bgroup} and -{\offtt |egroup} in place of |{| and |}|, etc. In particular, a {\offtt -|} can be obtained by typing {\offtt |char124}. If you want to display -the results of a complicated macro inside the |\TeXexample| environment -you should probably define a different macro to display these results -and then invoke that macro inside the environment. For example, in this -manual we have sometimes inserted ``meta'' constructions showing where -to insert a particular piece of text by using a |\meta| macro which -encloses its argument in angle brackets (see the example immediately -above). But in a |\TeXexample| you cannot say ``{\tt \VT meta\lb TeX -stuff\rb},'' because the ``|{|'' and ``|}|'' are no longer grouping -characters. Instead you could define the temporary macro |\tmp| as -\TeXexample -\def\tmp{\meta{TeX stuff}} -|endTeXexample -\noindent -and then inside the |\TeXexample| environment simply type {\tt \VT tmp} -to insert the phrase ``\meta{TeX stuff}''. - -The indentation and -spacing of the |\TeXexample| environment are controlled by the same -parameters that control the indentation of the list environments, as -described in Sect.~\use{sect.env-indent}. -The general method used by all of these macros to turn off \TeX's usual -mechanism for interpreting special characters is discussed in \TeXbook, -p.~421ff. The \cs{begintt} and \cs{beginlines} macros described there are -included in \TeXsis\ for completeness. - -%>>> EOF TXSenvmt.doc <<< diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSeqns.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSeqns.doc deleted file mode 100644 index d7c0e43aa90..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSeqns.doc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,370 +0,0 @@ -%% file: TXSeqns.doc - Equations - TeXsis version 2.18 -%% @(#) $Id: TXSeqns.doc,v 18.2 2000/05/17 00:19:46 myers Exp $ -%======================================================================* -% (C) Copyright 1989, 1992 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige -% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications -% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL). -% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL -%======================================================================* -\ifx\undefined\meta\texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\draft\fi - -\section{Equations \label{sect.eqns}} - -Plain \TeX\ was designed to make it easy to typeset equations -and mathematical formulae. \TeXsis\ provides additional features -that make the job even easier. Among these are the automatic -numbering of equations (with the ability to refer to numbered equations -by symbolic labels), automatic sizing of parentheses, and a -collection of special symbols which are often used by physicists. - -\subsection{Equation Numbering \label{sect.eqno}}% -In Plain \TeX\ equation numbers are added to displayed -equations with the \cs{eqno} command, as described in Chapter~19 of -\TeXbook. For example, typing -\index{equations!numbering} -\TeXexample -$$ E=mc^2. \eqno (47) $$ -|endTeXexample -will produce -\offparens -$$ -E = mc^2 \eqno (47) -$$ -With \TeXsis\ the procedure for getting -automatically numbered equations is similar, except that you use -\CS{EQN} instead of \cs{eqno}, and what follows this (up to the -``|$$|'') is not used as the number of the equation, but as an -internal {\it label}\, for the equation. For example, if you had -already used |\EQN| to create three numbered equations, then -typing -\eqnum=3 -\TeXexample -$$ \vec F = -{G_N Mm \over r^2} \, \hat r - \EQN Newton $$ -|endTeXexample -would produce -$$ -\vec F = -{G_N Mm \over r^2} \, \hat r - \EQN Newton -$$ -\TeXsis\ automatically assigns the next available equation number to -the equation and prints this number on the right, in parentheses. -The equations that follow the one above would be numbered 4.5, -4.6, and so on. - - The purpose of the "label" after the |\EQN| is to let you -refer to the equation in the text without knowing the equation -number that has been assigned to it. For example, to refer to -\Eq{Newton} above, which has the label ``Newton'', you might type -\index{equations!labeling} -\TeXexample -The dependence of the force on the inverse square of the distance -can be seen in \Eq{Newton}. -|endTeXexample -This would be printed as: -\example -The dependence of the force on the inverse square of the distance -can be seen in \Eq{Newton}. -\endexample -The control sequence \CS{Eq}\arg{label} gives the same result -as typing "|Eq.~(|$nn$|)|", where $nn$ is the appropriate -equation number for the given label. Two similar control -words allow you to refer to a range of equations, or to refer to -an equation simply by number, without the preceding "|Eq.~|." -Typing \CS{Eqs}\arg{label} produces "Eqs.~($nn$)", while -\CS{Ep}\arg{label} gives just the equation number associated -with the label, enclosed in parentheses. Thus typing -\TeXexample -The class of metrics defined by \Eqs{cond-1} through -\Ep{cond-5} can all be shown to satisfy inequality -\Ep{triangle}, as well as the condition in \Eq{Killing}. -|endTeXexample -would produce output something like -\example -The class of metrics defined by Eqs.~(14) through -(19) can all be shown to satisfy inequality -(23), as well as the condition in Eq.~(7). -\endexample - - Almost any sequence of characters can be used as a "label" for -an equation. This includes letters, numbers, and punctuation -marks, but it is best to avoid \TeX's special characters, such as -|\|, |&|, |}|, |{|, |$|, |_|, and |^|. Spaces may be included -but will be ignored, and there {\sl is} a difference between -uppercase and lowercase letters. Also, the semicolon (|;|) is -reserved for a special purpose, which is described below. - - You may want to give equations "names," as in the example -called "Newton" above, or you can give the equations labels that -are numbers. This is the best thing to do if the equations in -the original manuscript already have numbers, but if you do this -then you should be sure to remember that the internal label and -the number which is printed (the ``external'' number) are not -necessarily the same. If the equation {\it labeled} ``15'' is -the fifteenth equation in the document then it will also be -equation number 15, but if you move the equation around in the -file so that it is the sixth equation in the document it will be -printed as equation 6, even though it has the label ``15''. - - If you have a heavily edited document and the arrangement of -the numbers and labels gets confusing there is a useful aid to -help straighten things out. If you say -\example -\CS{eqnotracetrue} -\endexample -then the equation numbers will be printed as usual, but with the label -appearing next to it in the right margin in square brackets. -For example, the equation -\TeXexample -$$ -(i\gamma^\mu \partial_\mu - m)\psi (x) = 0 - \EQN Dirac $$ -|endTeXexample -when printed with |\eqnotracetrue| would appear as: -\begingroup\eqnotracetrue -$$ -(i\gamma^\mu \partial_\mu - m)\psi (x) = 0 -\EQN Dirac$$ -\endgroup -Since the label appears in the margin the spacing of your document -remains exactly the same. -Obviously you would not print the final copy of the document this way, -but it can be very useful for editing. You can turn off this -equation tracing feature anytime by saying \cs{eqnotracefalse}. If you -say \cs{draft} at the beginning of your document then the equation -tracing will be turned on automatically (along with some other useful -features). -\index{equations!labeling} - -\bigskip - - Sometimes when several equations are closely related you will -want to give the whole set the same equation number. To distinguish -separate formulae in such a group you then generally add a letter to -the number. You might, for example, have the equation -\index{equations!multiple} -$$ -J^2\ket{j,m} = j(j+1) \ket{j,m} \EQN eigen;a -$$ -and then a short while later you might have the related equation -$$ -J_z\ket{j,m} = m \ket{j,m} \EQN eigen;b -$$ -These may be referred to together as \Eqs{eigen} or may be -referred to separately as \Eqs{eigen;a} and \Ep{eigen;b}. To get -an equation number with a letter in it you still use \CS{EQN}, but -you add the appropriate letter to the end of the label, separated -{from} the label by a semicolon. The equations above were created -by typing: -\TeXexample -$$ -J^2\ket{j,m} = j(j+1) \ket{j,m} \EQN eigen;a -$$ -|endTeXexample -and -\TeXexample -$$ -J_z\ket{j,m} = m \ket{j,m} \EQN eigen;b -$$ -|endTeXexample -The semicolon is not printed --- it is just used to separate the -letter from the label. If the letter is ``a'' then the next -available equation number is used, as usual, but if the letter is -anything else then the equation number is not incremented and -instead the number from the previous equation is used. You can -use any sequence of letters you like, although it is usually best -to use ``a,b,c$\ldots$'' for consecutive equations. - - To refer to equations that have both numbers and letters you -can either use the letter to pick out a specific equation, or -simply leave out the letter and use the label to refer to the -whole set together. You can use either \CS{Eq} or \CS{Eqs} to do -this. For example, the sentence after \Eq{eigen;b} above was -created by typing -\TeXexample -These may be referred to together as \Eqs{eigen} -or may be referred to separately as -\Eqs{eigen;a} and \Ep{eigen;b}. -|endTeXexample -\index{equations!multiple} - -\bigskip - - You will eventually encounter an equation that is so long that -it has to be broken up into several lines, or you will want to -print several equations together, lined up by their "$=$" signs. -In plain \TeX\ you would use |\eqalign| to display these kinds of -equations, or |\eqalignno| to display them with equation numbers. -With \TeXsis\ you should use \CS{EQNalign} in place of -\cs{eqalign} or \cs{eqalignno} -to get automatically assigned equation numbers in aligned -equations. As in plain \TeX, the alignment of the -equations is controlled by |&| and |\cr|. An equation number is -assigned to a particular line by putting |\EQN| followed by a -label on that line, before the |\cr|. The label is everything -{from} the |\EQN| up to the |\cr|. For example, -\index{equations!alignment} -\TeXexample -|smalltt$$ -\EQNalign{ -{dp \over dt} &= - {\partial H \over \partial q} -\EQN Hamilton-1 \cr -{dq \over dt} &= {\partial H \over \partial p} -\EQN Hamilton-2 \cr} -$$ -|endTeXexample -produces the two aligned and numbered equations -$$ -\EQNalign{ -{dp \over dt} &= - {\partial H \over \partial q} \EQN Hamilton-1 \cr -{dq \over dt} &= {\partial H \over \partial p} \EQN Hamilton-2 \cr} -$$ - - \cs{EQNalign} can be used both for typing multi-part equations or for -splitting an equation which is too long to fit on a single line. -However, when splitting a single long equation into several lines it may -actually be better to use |$$\eqalign{|\meta{formula}|}| followed by -|\EQN| \meta{label}|$$|. For example, in -$$ -\eqalign{ -{\cal L}_{NC} &= {-g \over 2\cos\theta_W} \sum_i - \bar\psi_i [ (t_{3,i}-2Q_i\sin^2\theta_W) \gamma_\mu - - t_{3,i}\gamma_\mu\gamma_5 ]\psi_i Z^\mu \cr -&\quad - e \sum_i Q_i \bar\psi_i \gamma_\mu \psi_i A^\mu \cr} -\EQN{NC} -$$ -the equation number is centered between the two lines of the equation, -which looks better. -This equation was produced using \cs{eqalign} by typing: -\TeXexample -|smalltt$$ -\eqalign{ -{\cal L}_{NC} &= {-g \over 2\cos\theta_W} \sum_i - \bar\psi_i [ (t_{3,i}-2Q_i\sin^2\theta_W) \gamma_\mu - - t_{3,i}\gamma_\mu\gamma_5 ]\psi_i Z^\mu \cr -&\quad - e \sum_i Q_i \bar\psi_i \gamma_\mu \psi_i A^\mu \cr} -\EQN{NC} -$$ -|endTeXexample - - Closely related equations can be displayed together with the -same equation number by following the label with a semicolon and -a letter, as already described above. For example, the set of -equations, -$$ -\EQNalign{ -\nabla \cdot \vec D &= 4 \pi \rho \EQN EM;a \cr -\nabla \times \vec E &= - - {1 \over c} {\partial \vec B \over \partial t} - \EQN EM;b \cr -\nabla \cdot \vec B &= 0 \EQN EM;c \cr -\nabla \times \vec H &= {4 \pi \over c} \vec J - + {1 \over c} {\partial \vec D \over \partial t} - \EQN EM;d \cr} -$$ -is produced by typing: -\TeXexample -|smalltt$$ -\EQNalign{ -\nabla \cdot \vec D &= 4 \pi \rho \EQN EM;a \cr -\nabla \times \vec E &= - - {1 \over c} {\partial \vec B \over \partial t} - \EQN EM;b \cr -\nabla \cdot \vec B &= 0 \EQN EM;c \cr -\nabla \times \vec H &= {4 \pi \over c} \vec J - + {1 \over c} {\partial \vec D \over \partial t} - \EQN EM;d \cr} -$$ -|endTeXexample -Note that the alignment of the equations is controlled by |&| and -|\cr|, not by the arrangement used when the equation was typed -into the manuscript file. Still, it is recommended that you -arrange long sets of equations like these in some sort of clear -pattern when you type them. This will both reduce errors when -the equation is typed and make it easier for you to read the file -when you are looking at it later. Remember, \TeX\ ignores all -spaces and tabs when it reads material for equations or displayed -equations. -\index{equations!alignment} - - \CS{EQNdoublealign} is similar to \cs{EQNalign} but makes -equations with two alignment tabs. For example, -\TeXexample -|smalltt$$ -\EQNdoublealign{ -\sigma_i^2 &= 1 & \EQN Pauli;a \cr -\sigma_i\sigma_j + \sigma_j\sigma_i &= 0 \qquad & (i \ne j) - \EQN Pauli;b \cr -\sigma_i\sigma_j &= i\sigma_k \qquad & (i,j,k\ {\rm cyclic}) - \EQN Pauli;c \cr} -$$ -|endTeXexample -produces -$$ -\EQNdoublealign{ -\sigma_i^2 &= 1 & \EQN Pauli;a \cr -\sigma_i\sigma_j + \sigma_j\sigma_i &= 0 \qquad & (i \ne j) - \EQN Pauli;b \cr -\sigma_i\sigma_j &= i\sigma_k \qquad & (i,j,k\ {\rm cyclic}) - \EQN Pauli;c \cr} -$$ -with both the equal signs and the parentheses aligned. The second -|&| is required in the first line, because without it the |\EQN| would -have aligned the equation number with the parentheses enclosing $i\ne j$. - - Plain \TeX\ also lets you display formulae on several lines -without any alignment by using \cs{displaylines}. With \TeXsis\ you -can use the similar control sequence \CS{EQNdisplaylines} to get an -automatically assigned equation number for any line in such a -display. The pattern is the same as in |\displaylines|, but you -simply insert \cs{EQN}\meta{label} in front of the \cs{cr} on the -line you want numbered. \CS{EQNdisplaylines} produces less space -between the equations than would result from typing them -separately, and generally looks better for closely related equations. - - All of the equation alignment macros are special cases of the plain -\TeX\ macro \cs{halign}. Therefore, if necessary, the vertical spacing can -be adjusted by inserting -\example -\cs{noalign}\cs{vskip}\meta{dimen} -\endexample -where \meta{dimen} can be either a positive or a negative dimension. -\bigskip - - In a long document there are several different ways to number -the equations. You could just start at ``1'' and count up for -each new equation, but sometimes it is better to number the -equations consecutively within each chapter or section of a -document. In \TeXsis\ the default form for an equation number is -$cc.ss.nn$ where $cc$ stands for the chapter number, $ss$ is the -section number, and $nn$ is the equation number within that -section. Whenever you move to a new section or chapter (using -\cs{section} or \cs{chapter}, as described in -Section~\use{sect.sects}) the number $ss$ or $cc$ is incremented -by one and the number $nn$ is reset to one. If you are not using -chapter divisions in your document then the chapter number $cc$ -is not made a part of the equation number, and the number $nn$ is -reset only at the beginning of a section. If you are not using -section divisions in your document then the section number $ss$ -is not made a part of the equation number, and the number $nn$ is -reset to one only at the beginning of a chapter. If you use -neither chapter nor section divisions in your document then -neither the chapter number $cc$ nor the section number $ss$ will -be made a part of the equation number, and the equations will -simply be numbered consecutively, 1, 2, 3\dots. -\index{equations!numbering} - - Although the system just described for forming equation -numbers gives a result that is usually what you will want for -your equation numbering, you can change the method by setting -either of two switches. If you say |\showchaptIDfalse| then the -chapter number $cc$ will not be made a part of the equation -number even though you may be using chapter level divisions in -your document. Similarly, saying |\showsectIDfalse| prevents the -section number $ss$ from being used in the equation number. The -opposites of these two switches are \cs{showchaptIDtrue} and -\cs{showsectIDtrue}. The equation number $nn$ is reset to one only -when a section or chapter number that is supposed to be visible -is incremented, as you might expect. - -%>>> EOF TXSeqns.doc <<< diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSfigs.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSfigs.doc deleted file mode 100644 index 06d77bc35d9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSfigs.doc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,703 +0,0 @@ -%% file: TXSfigs.doc - Figures and Tables - TeXsis version 2.18 -%% @(#) $Id: TXSfigs.doc,v 18.2 2000/05/17 00:19:46 myers Exp $ -%======================================================================* -% (C) Copyright 1989, 1992,1993,1994, 1997 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige -% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications -% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL). -% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL -%======================================================================* -\ifx\undefined\meta \texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\input Manual.aux\draft\fi - -% Select the Penguin shown at the end of the section -% (the one in the middle is always the Feynman diagram). - -%\def\penguin{penguin2} % to use Larry Ewing's Linux Penguin -\def\penguin{penguin} % to use the Feynman diagram. - - - -\section{Figures and Tables \label{sect.figures}} - -Technical papers often include tables and/or figures. Regardless of how -the contents of the figures or tables are created, these have a lot in -common in the way they are generally treated. \TeXsis\ makes use of -\TeX's \idx{floating insertion} capabilities (see Chapter~15 of -\TeXbook) to insert figures and tables on the current page or on a -following page. It is also possible to have figures or tables saved and -printed at the end of the document. Captions are easily added either -above or below the figure or table. Both kinds of objects are -automatically assigned numbers, which are associated with internal -labels so that they may be referred to in the text without having to -know their order. It is possible to create a list of the figures and -tables which appear in a document, much like creating a table of -contents. Figures themselves -are generally created outside of \TeX, either by hand -or by computer graphics programs, while tables can be created using -\TeX\ commands. The most complicated tables have vertical and -horizontal lines (called ``rules'') to guide the reader's eye and to -make the table more readable. \TeXsis\ has some very easy to use -commands for making ruled tables. - -Before discussing \TeXsis's figure and table making macros in detail we -should mention that \TeXsis\ also adds a new insertion class to those of -Plain \TeX. In Plain \TeX\ saying \cs{topinsert}, \cs{midinsert} or -\cs{pageinsert} begins a \idx{floating insertion} (ended by -\cs{endinsert}) which will appear somewhere on the current page or a -following page. Material entered with a \cs{topinsert} appears at the -top of the current page, if there is room for it, or at the top of the -next page where there is room. A \cs{midinsert} attempts to insert the -text into the current page right where it is invoked, but if the -insertion won't fit it becomes a \cs{topinsert}. Saying \cs{pageinsert} -creates an insertion which takes up a whole page by itself. -% -In \TeXsis\ you can also say \cs{bottominsert} to make a \idx{floating -insertion} that will appear at the bottom of the current page, if it -will fit, or at the bottom of the next page where it will fit. -There is also \cs{heavyinsert}, which like \cs{midinsert} tries first to -insert the material into the current page right where it is called, but -in this case becomes a \cs{bottominsert} if the material wont' fit. - - -%==================================================* -\subsection{Figures \label{sect.figs}} - -\TeX\ is designed for technical typesetting, but does not include a -graphics standard, so to include a figure or drawing in a document -it is necessary to -leave blank space and to either glue the drawing in later or to arrange -for the figure material to be inserted by some mechanism outside of -\TeX\ when the page is actually printed (e.g., using the \cs{special} -command or the \cs{epsfbox} command described later). - - Imagine that you wish to insert into the text a drawing of a -``\idx{penguin} diagram,'' which is about 6~cm tall. You could create -the space for this figure at the top of a page, along with a caption, -with the following commands:\index{figures}% -\TeXexample -|smalltt\figure{Penguin} -\hrule -\vskip 2cm -\line{\hss (glue your penguin here) \hfil} -\vskip 2cm -\hrule -\Caption -Sample figure showing how easy it is to insert -numbered figures with captions in \TeXsis. -\endCaption -\endfigure -|endTeXexample -\noindent -This produces \Fig{Penguin} (we put the \cs{hrule}'s in just to show -off the empty space). ``Penguin'' is the -label for the figure, so to refer to the figure in the text we typed -\CS{Fig}|{Penguin}|, which produced ``\Fig{Penguin}.'' The caption can be -placed either before or after the figure: if it is to be at the top then -\CS{Caption} must be the first token after |\figure|. As shown, the -caption text must be terminated with \CS{endCaption}. When the caption is -printed it will automatically start with the figure number in bold type, -followed by the caption text. The caption is indented on both sides if -it is more than one line long and centered otherwise. - - \CS{caption}\arg{text} is equivalent to \CS{Caption}\meta{text} -\CS{endCaption} and may be more convenient for short captions. -It should be avoided for very long captions to keep from overflowing \TeX's -internal memory. - -\figure{Penguin} -\hrule -\vskip 2cm -\line{\hss (glue your \idx{penguin} here) \hfil} -\vskip 2cm -\hrule -\Caption -Sample figure showing how easy it is to insert -numbered figures with captions in \TeXsis. -\endCaption -\infiglist{Sample figure showing how easy it is -to insert numbered figures with captions in \TeXsis.} -\endfigure - - There are commands to create figures for each of the \idx{insertion -classes} of Plain \TeX (that is, \cs{midinsert}, \cs{topinsert} and -\cs{pageinsert}) along with the new insertion class -added by \TeXsis\ (\cs{bottominsert}) . -In addition, there are special commands for creating wide or full page -figures while in double column mode (which is described later in -Section~\use{sect.dcol}): -\index{figures!placement}% -\singlelinetrue -\description{XfullFigureXXXXXX}\clump -% -\itm{\CS{figure}\arg{label\/}} -Inserts a figure at the top of the current page, if there is enough room for -it, or at the top of the next available page. -% -\itm{\CS{midfigure}\arg{label\/}} -Inserts a figure at the current position, if there is enough room for it, or at -the top of the next page if there is not. -% -\itm{\CS{fullfigure}\arg{label\/}} -Inserts a figure on a separate page. The body of the figure should -normally contain a \cs{vfill} to allow the figure to stretch to fill the -whole page. -% -\itm{\CS{bottomfigure}\arg{label\/}} -Inserts the figure at the bottom of the current page, if there is room -for it, or on the bottom of the next page where there is room. -% -\itm{\CS{heavyfigure}\arg{label\/}} -Inserts a figure at the current position, if there is room for it on the -page, or at the bottom of the page following if there is not. This is -therefore like \CS{midfigure}, except that if the figure can't be fit on -the page it ends up on the bottom of a following page, not the top. -% -\itm{\cs{widetopfigure}\arg{label\/}} -Inserts a figure at the top of a page across both columns in -double column format. Equivalent to \CS{figure} in single column -format. \cs{widefigure} is a synonym. -% -\itm{\cs{widefullfigure}\arg{label\/}} -Inserts a full page figure across both columns in double column -format. Equivalent to \CS{fullfigure} in single column format. -% -\itm{\CS{endfigure}} -Ends any of the figure insertions described above. -% -\enddescription -\noindent -In all cases \meta{label\/} is an internal label which is assigned to -the figure number. The figure number will include the chapter and -section numbers in the format ``$cc.ss.nn$'' if \cs{showchaptIDtrue} and -\cs{showsectIDtrue} have been selected. -\index{figures!placement}% - - The body of the figure can include any vertical mode -commands, as in the example above. When you are simply leaving -space for a figure to be glued in later a convenient way to specify the -amount of space to leave is to \cs{vskip} by some amount proportional to -the width of the current column or page. The dimension \cs{colwidth} is -the width of the page (the \cs{hsize}) in single column mode and the width -of the current column in double column mode. So for example, if you -have a figure which was half again as tall as it is wide you could say -\index{figures!size}% -\example -\cs{vskip} |1.5|\cs{colwidth} -\endexample -Another way to standardize the space reserved for figures is to define -your own dimension, such as |\myfigsize|, to use in the \cs{vskip} -above. For example, -\TeXexample -\newdim\myfigsize -\myfigsize= 1.5\colwidth -|endTeXexample -\noindent -and then |\vskip\myfigsize|. This has the same effect as the previous -example, but |\myfigsize| can be changed to any valid dimension. -\index{figures!size}% - - -%==================================================* -\subsection{Encapsulated PostScript Graphics} - -Instead of simply gluing figures into a paper by hand it is possible to -have computer generated graphs and drawings automatically inserted into -a document. Unfortunately, the method can vary from -computer to computer and printer to printer. Recall that \TeX\ -produces as output a \idx{DVI file}, which contains device independent -instructions for typesetting the document. To actually print the -document the \idx{DVI file} must be translated into instructions for -the specific printer being used by a suitable device driver. It is at -this stage, when the device driver is converting the \idx{DVI file} to -printer instructions, that graphs and drawings may be inserted. -However, since different printers may require different kinds of -instructions, there are many different device drivers, each having its -own way of including drawings in the document. - -In recent years some standardization has become possible, because many -printer manufacturers have chosen \idx{PostScript} as the ``language'' -for giving instructions to their printers. PostScript contains -commands both for drawing and for typesetting text. Still, there are -some problems, because there are many different device drivers for -converting \idx{DVI file}s to \idx{PostScript}, and they all treat the -inclusion of figures slightly differently. Also, while all of these filters -require that the drawings to be included are themselves already in -PostScript, there are several variations of \idx{PostScript}, leading to -further problems of incompatibility. - -Until there is some standardization for inserting drawings into \TeX\ -documents (and perhaps to encourage it) we recommend using the scheme -which (a) seems to be the easiest to use and the most well thought -out, and (b) is potentially available to the widest group of users. -Our choice is, first, to use a specific variation of PostScript known -as ``Encapsulated'' \idx{PostScript} (EPS). -\index{Encapsulated PostScript|see{PostScript}} Most newer computer -programs which produce graphics output, including Mathematica, |xfig|, -and |paw|, can produce EPS output files. To include these in the text -we have chosen to rely on the program |dvips| \index{dvips} by Tomas -Rokicki,\reference{Rokicki} Tomas Rokicki, \booktitle{{\tt dvips} -User's Manual}. -The source code for {\tt dvips} is available from CTAN -in the directory {\tt dviware/dvips} -\endreference -\index{Rokicki, Tomas} along with his \TeX\ macros for including EPS -graphics, called |epsf.tex|. Be warned that there are other programs -called ``dvips,'' but as far as we know only Rokicki's version will -work with |epsf.tex|. We expect that when including drawings in \TeX\ -is standardized, it will be based on Rokicki's scheme or something -close to it. - -\bigskip - -To include EPS graphics in a document using the |epsf.tex| macros you -must first input the macros. Somewhere early in your manuscript file you -should put: -\TeXexample -\input epsf.tex -|endTeXexample -You can have the macros report the size of a figure when it is -included by saying: -\TeXexample -\epsfverbosetrue -|endTeXexample -At the point where you want a graph or drawing included -you simply say: -\example -\CS{epsfbox}|{foo.ps}| -\endexample -This will include the drawing from the file called `|foo.ps|,' which must -already exist in the current directory. \TeX\ will leave enough room -for the figure (by creating a box of the correct size) and will use a -\cs{special} command to insert instructions into the DVI file telling -the DVI to PS translator to read in the \idx{EPS file} |foo.ps|. - -Once the document has been processed by \TeXsis\ and the DVI file has -been produced you will convert it to a PS file with the ``\idx{dvips}'' -program. If your DVI file is called |myfile.dvi| then the command is -simply: -\TeXexample -dvips myfile -|endTeXexample -This will convert |myfile.dvi| to PostScript, -and depending on how dvips is set up at your installation it will either -put the output in the file |myfile.ps| or it will send it directly to -the default printer (see the man pages for dvips on how to change this -behavior, or try a short example to see how it is set up on your computer). -Note that the EPS files to be included must be in the same directory as -|myfile.dvi| when you run dvips, so that they can be merged into the final -output file (or you can specify the full path filename in the -\CS{epsfbox} command). - -On Unix systems you may not be able to use the |lpr -d| -command if you have included EPS files in the document. This command -runs the DVI file through dvips (or some other DVI to PS filter) in a -different directory, and the EPS files will therefore not be included -unless you have used a full path name for the file. - - -If you use the latest version of -the |xdvi| program to preview DVI files on your workstation -you will find that it automatically includes EPS graphics in the -display, but some other previewing programs (such as |texsun|, or older -versions of |xdvi|) will not. Even if the previewer does not know how -to deal with the \cs{special} commands in the DVI file, you will -see that \TeX\ has left room for the figure. Once you have converted -your DVI and \idx{EPS file}s into a PS file you can preview that file -if you have a PostScript previewer, such as GhostScript. Then your -graphs and drawings will appear just as they would if you had printed -the PS file. - -\bigskip - -Sometimes you will find that more room has been left for the figure than -is really needed. The way \CS{epsfbox} decides how much room to leave is -by reading the first part of the \idx{EPS file} to find a line -which looks like: -\TeXexample -%%BoundingBox: 67 176 544 616 -|endTeXexample -\noindent -The two pairs of numbers are the coordinates of the lower left and upper -right corners of the figure, respectively. They are measured in -printer's points (1/72${}{\hbox{nd}}$ of an inch). If you don't like -the positioning of the figure given by the original bounding box in the -PostScript file you can override it by specifying a new bounding box -like so: -\TeXexample -\epsfbox[0 180 540 700]{file.ps} -|endTeXexample -\noindent -You may have to experiment with positioning the BoundingBox for the best -effect, and it may help to look at the \idx{PostScript} file to see what the -default BoundingBox is and adjust things using that coordinate system. - -\bigskip - -You can also control the size of the included graphic using -\CS{epsfxsize} or \CS{epsfysize} before you call \CS{epsfbox}. The -figure will be enlarged or reduced to fit the dimension you specify. -Saying -\example -\CS{epsfxsize}|=|\meta{dimen} \CS{epsfbox}|{figure.ps}| -\endexample -will scale the drawing in the file |figure.ps| so that its {\sl width\/} -is \meta{dimen}, with the height scaled accordingly, while saying -\example -\CS{epsfysize}|=|\meta{dimen} \CS{epsfbox}|{graph.ps}| -\endexample -will scale the drawing in the file |graph.ps| so that its {\sl height\/} is -\meta{dimen}, with the width scaled accordingly. You can only specify -the width or height, but not both at the same time. Whatever change of -size you specify will only be applied to the \CS{epsfbox} command which -immediately follows. After that, subsequent included graphics will -revert to their natural sizes unless you also specify a particular size -for them. - -The \CS{epsfbox} command creates a box of the proper size, into which -the figure is later drawn. -That is all. -If you want the figure to be centered across the page then you will -have to do so yourself, using \cs{centerline} or something similar. -The advantage of this is that since figures are simply treated as -boxes, you can stack them or arrange them in a row, or do whatever -else you would with boxes. -This gives you much more flexibility to construct complicated figures -from several EPS files. - -\figure{Penguin2} -\centerline{\epsfysize=4cm\epsfbox{penguin.eps}} -\Caption -Example of including EPS graphics in a figure. -\endCaption -\endfigure - -So now consider the earlier example of including a 4~cm tall -\idx{penguin} diagram in a figure, but now assuming that the drawing -exists as an EPS graphic in the file |penguin.eps|. -Assume also that we need to override the default bounding box in that -file. -The commands to do this are: -\TeXexample -\figure{Penguin2} -\centerline{\epsfysize=4cm \epsfbox{penguin.eps}} -\Caption -Example of including EPS graphics in a figure. -\endCaption -\endfigure -|endTeXexample -\relax -The results are shown in \Fig{Penguin2}. -The drawing was created with Bill Dimm's {\sl FeynDiagram} -package,\reference{FeynDiagram} -Dimm, Bill, -\booktitle{FeynDiagram Tutorial}, -available at \URL{ftp://ftp.hepth.cornell.edu} -\endreference -which is a set of C++ objects which make it fairly easy to create EPS -\idx{Feynman Diagrams} by writing short C++ programs. It was converted -from a |.ps| to a |.eps| file using |ps2epsi|. - -%==================================================* -\subsection{Simple Tables \label{sect.tbls}} - - Simple tables\index{tables!simple} (without ruled lines) are constructed -in \TeX\ with \idx{alignment tabs} or with \cs{halign}. The reader who -is not familiar with these should look at Chapter~22 in \TeXbook. In -\TeXsis\ simple tables with table numbers and captions are -treated much the same as figures. For example, saying -\TeXexample -|smalltt\midtable{table example} -\caption{Charged leptons.} -\centerline{\vbox{\halign{#\ \hfil & #\ \hfil & #\hfil \cr -Name & Mass & Lifetime \cr -$e^-$ & .511 MeV & $>2 \times 10^{22}$ yr. \cr -$\mu^-$ & 105 MeV & $2.197 \times 10^{-6}$ sec. \cr -$\tau^-$ & 1784 MeV & $3.3 \times 10^{-13}$ sec. \cr}}} -\endtable -|endTeXexample -\noindent -produces the following table, in the middle of the page: -\vskip 0pt -\midtable{table example} -\caption{Charged leptons.} -\centerline{\vbox{\halign{#\ \hfil & #\ \hfil & #\hfil \cr -Name & Mass & Lifetime \cr -$e^-$ & .511 MeV & $>2 \times 10^{22}$ yr. \cr -$\mu^-$ & 105 MeV & $2.197 \times 10^{-6}$ sec. \cr -$\tau^-$ & 1784 MeV & $3.3 \times 10^{-13}$ sec. \cr}}} -\intablelist{Charged leptons.} -\endtable -\noindent -Note the use of \cs{centerline} and a \cs{vbox} to center the table. The -reference to this table in the text was produced by typing ``|\Tbl{table -example}|.'' Note also that we used \cs{caption} followed by the text in -brackets as an alternative method of defining the caption; -However \cs{caption} -should only be used when the caption is short. Table captions are -traditionally placed above the table, so \cs{Caption} or \cs{caption} should -be the first token after \CS{table}\arg{label\/} and its siblings. - -There are a number of different kinds of table insertions, and they -match closely the different kinds of insertions used for figures: -\description{xwidefullTablexx\qquad}\clump -% -\itm{\CS{table}\arg{label\/}} -Inserts a table at the top of next available page. -% -\itm{\CS{midtable}\arg{label\/}} -Inserts a table at the current position if there is room or at -the top of a page if necessary. -% -\itm{\CS{fulltable}\arg{label\/}} -Inserts a table on a separate page. The body of the table -should normally contain a \cs{vfill}. -% -\itm{\CS{bottomtable}\arg{label\/}} -Inserts the table at the bottom of the current page, if there is room -for it, or on the bottom of the next page where there is room. -% -\itm{\CS{heavytable}\arg{label\/}} -Inserts a table at the current position, if there is room for it on the -page, or at the bottom of the page following if there is not. This is -therefore like \CS{midtable}, except that if the table can't be fit on -the page it ends up on the bottom of a following page, not the top. -% -\itm{\cs{widetoptable}\arg{label\/}} -Inserts a table at the top of a page across both columns in -double column format. Equivalent to \CS{table} in single column -format. -% -\itm{\cs{widefulltable}\arg{label\/}} -Inserts a full page table in double column format. Equivalent to -\CS{fulltable} in single column format. -% -\itm{\CS{endtable}} -Ends any of the tables above. -% -\enddescription -Again, in these macros \meta{label\/} is an internal label which is assigned to -the table number. The table number will include the chapter and section -numbers in the format ``$cc.ss.nn$'' if |\showchaptIDtrue| and -|\showsectIDtrue| have been selected. The table can then be referred to -in the text by saying \cs{Tbl}\arg{label\/}. - -%==================================================* -% RULED TABLES: - -\subsection{Ruled Tables \label{sect.ruled}} -\input TXSruled.doc - -%==================================================* -\subsection{Lists of Figures and Tables} - -In large technical documents it is often desirable to have a list of the -figures and/or tables which appear in the document, along with a brief -caption and the number of the page on which the figure or table appears. -This is similar to -a table of contents, but is separate from it. In \TeXsis\ you can add a -figure or table to a list of figures or tables by using \CS{infiglist} -after \cs{figure} or \CS{intablelist} after \cs{table}, similar to the -way you would use \cs{caption}. The syntax is \CS{infiglist}\arg{text}. -The text is the text of the (possibly abbreviated) caption which is to -appear in the list of figures. Remember though, if a table has a -caption it should -appear above the table body, so the \cs{caption} must still be the first -thing after \cs{table}; the \CS{infiglist} can come later. -\index{lists!of figures}\index{lists!of tables}% - -As an example, consider the ``penguin diagram'' already discussed. -To add an entry for this figure in the list of figures it -would be entered as follows: -\TeXexample -\figure{Penguin} -\centerline{\epsfbox{/home/fermi/qcd/penguin.eps}} -\caption{Example of including EPS graphics in a figure.} -\infiglist{Example of including a figure in the list of figures.} -\endfigure -|endTeXexample -\relax -The \cs{caption} text is what is put under the figure in the body of the -paper, while the \CS{infiglist} text is what shows up in the list of -figures, and these do not have to be the same. - - To produce the list of figures at the end of the document you say -\CS{ListFigures}, and similarly to produce the list of tables say -\CS{ListTables}. Even if the list is to appear at the front of the -document, along with the table of contents, you should print it at the -end and move the list to the front afterwards. This is because until -the document is actually processed \TeX\ does not know on which page the -figure or table appears. - - One word of caution: figures and tables are produced by putting them -in ``floating inserts'', which \TeX\ saves up and prints when there is -room. The entry into the list of figures or tables is not made until -the item actually makes its way into the output DVI file. If you ask -for the list of figures or tables before one of these items is output it -will not be in the list, and in fact that entry for the figure or table -list will later end up spewing out on your terminal. To be sure that -all floating insertions have been output you should say \cs{supereject} -before you print the list of figures or tables. - -%==================================================* -\subsection{Listing Figure and Table Captions} - -When a manuscript is submitted to some journals, like the Physical -Review, one is supposed to include a separate list of the captions of all -figures and tables. This is similar to the lists created by -\CS{ListFigures} and \CS{ListTables}, but the page numbers are not -supposed to be included. It is very easy to use the caption information -stored by \CS{infiglist} and \CS{intablelist} to make just a list of -captions, without including the page numbers. The command to make a -list of all the figure captions is \CS{ListFigureCaptions}, and -similarly all the table captions can be listed with -\CS{ListTableCaptions}. Just as with \CS{ListFigures} and -\CS{ListTables} these should appear at the end of the job, so that all -of the caption information will have already been stored. - -It should be said that this method of making a list of captions assumes -that you have put the same captions under the figures, with \cs{Caption} -or \cs{caption}, as the caption in the list of figures entered with -\CS{infiglist}. - - It may help to know a little bit more about how the macros -\CS{ListFigures} and \CS{ListFigureCaptions} work. The \CS{infiglist} -command writes the figure caption information you provide to a file -which has the same name as your manuscript file but with the extension -|.fgl|, meaning ``figure list'' (for tables the file name extension is -|.tbl|). The page number on which the figure appears is also recorded -in this file. When the whole document has been processed all of the -figure captions will have been saved in this file, and \CS{ListFigures} -and \CS{ListFigureCaptions} simply read this file back in. One of them -uses the page numbers to construct a table of contents for the figures, -while the other just prints out the figure captions by themselves. In -either case, it is important that all the caption information be in the -file when the list is to be made, which is why a \cs{supereject} may be -necessary to flush all floating insertions to the output. - -%==================================================* -\subsection{Printing Figures and Tables at the End of a Document} - -When working on a paper to be sent for publication it is sometimes -necessary to print all of the figures at the end of the document. To cause -this to be done you simply have to say -\example -\cs{FiguresLast} -\endexample -at some point before you call \cs{figure} and its relatives, and then put -\example -\cs{PrintFigures} -\endexample -\index{figures!at end of document}% -\index{tables!at end of document}% -\noindent -at the end of the document. \cs{FiguresLast} causes \cs{figure} to save the -definition of your figure in an auxiliary file instead of immediately -creating the figure, and \cs{PrintFigures} reads the material back in from -that file. If you say \cs{PrintFigures} without first saying -\cs{FiguresLast} nothing will happen. You can return to having the -figures printed where they are defined by saying \cs{FiguresNow}. -In that case \cs{PrintFigures} does nothing; you have to have said -\cs{FiguresLast} for \cs{PrintFigures} to read any stored figures back in. - -Tables can also be saved until the end of the document by saying -\cs{TablesLast} and then \cs{PrintTables}. \cs{TablesNow} is the -opposite of \cs{TablesLast}. - -\pagecheck{4cm} - -One important note: Since the figure or table material is copied to the -file in which it is held one line at a time it is important to use -\cs{Caption} and \CS{endCaption} for long captions instead of \cs{caption}. -If you use \cs{caption} \TeX\ will try to read the whole caption at once, -which may result in the error message -``{\tt TeX capacity exceeded, sorry.}''\index{TeX capacity -exceeded@{\tt TeX capacity exceeded, sorry}} - - -%==================================================* -\subsection{Nonstandard Figure and Table Placement} - -On rare occasions you may need to have a figure or table from one -section of your document appear in another section of the document. For -example, if the introductory section is very short but has a figure, -that figure might end up at the top of the first page when you really -want it to appear at the top of the second page. You can cause the -figure to come out later by moving it farther back in the manuscript -file, but if it is moved into the next section it will then have the -wrong figure number. -\index{figures!nonstandard placement}% -\index{tables!nonstandard placement}% - -The solution to this problem is to have a way to override or modify the -way figure and table numbers are assigned. Since the first part of the -figure or table number is the chapter or section number you need to change -this by saying -\example -\cs{setSectionID}\arg{something-else} -\endexample -This changes the section number part of the figure and table numbers to -whatever you put as \meta{something-else}. It will also effect equation -numbers, so it is best to have this inside of a group, so that the -change goes away at the end of the group. Next you have to change the -figure or table number. \TeXsis\ keeps count of tables and figures in -global variables, and increments these counters globally when a new -figure or table is created. Thus just changing the counter inside a -group won't work, because the counter outside of the group would still -be modified. To temporarily change the value of such a counter you use -\example -\cs{setcnt}\arg{counter}\arg{value} -\endexample -where \meta{value} is the temporary value to assign to the counter -\meta{counter}. This should be done inside of a group, and when the -group ends the counter will go back to its previous global value. You -should only use \cs{setcnt} once within a given group! - -An example will make this procedure clear. -Suppose that Figure~\use{Fg.intro.17} is a part of -Section~\use{sect.intro}, but we wanted to show it much later in this -Manual (such as right about now). -It can be created in this section by saying: -\TeXexample -\begingroup % changes are temporary -\setSectionID{1} % changes the section ID -\setcnt\fignum{16}% figure counter is 1 less than we want -\midfigure{intro.17} -\centerline{\epsfysize=4cm\epsfbox{|penguin.eps}} -\caption{A bizarrely placed figure for Section~\use{sect.intro}} -\infiglist{A bizarrely placed figure for Section~\use{sect.intro}} -\endfigure -\endgroup % everything goes back the way it was -|endTeXexample - -\begingroup % changes are temporary -\setSectionID{1} % changes the section ID -\setcnt\fignum{16} % figure number is 1 less than we want -\midfigure{intro.17} -\centerline{\epsfysize=4cm\epsfbox{\penguin.eps}} -\caption{A bizarrely placed figure for Section~\use{sect.intro}} -\infiglist{A bizarrely placed figure for Section~\use{sect.intro}} -\endfigure -\endgroup % everything goes back the way it was - -In this case the figure number in the counter \cs{fignum} is set to one -less than the value we want, so that it comes out correctly when -\cs{bottomfigure} increments the count. You can use \cs{setcnt} to -modify any of \TeXsis's global counters. The complete list is given in -Section~\use{sect.labels} (where the use of \cs{use} is also described). - -% If we are using Larry Ewing's penguin2.eps then we need to -% acknowlege it: - -\def\tmp{penguin2} -\ifx\penguin\tmp - The drawing in \Fig{intro.17}, which is the official \idx{Linux} - Penguin, was created by \idx{Larry Ewing} of Texas A\&M University - and turned into a scalable vector based postcript file by \idx{Neal - Tucker}. -\fi - - -By the way, you should never move a figure out of a {\sl Chapter}, -unless you move it to the end of the document, and the appropriate way -to do that is with \cs{FiguresLast}. - -%>>> EOF TXSfigs.doc <<< diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSfmts.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSfmts.doc deleted file mode 100644 index 7923cea3982..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSfmts.doc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,604 +0,0 @@ -%% file: TXSfmts.doc - Formats and Style Files - TeXsis version 2.18 -%% @(#) $Id: TXSfmts.doc,v 18.3 2001/04/06 21:52:07 myers Exp $ -%======================================================================* -% (C) copyright 1994-2000 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige. -% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications -% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL). -% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL -%======================================================================* -\ifx\undefined\bs \texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\input Manual.aux\fi - -\section{Style Files and Specialized Formats \label{sect.fmts}} - -Section~\use{sect.papers} described the basic layout of a \TeXsis\ -document and the |\paper|, |\preprint|, |\Manuscript| and |\book| macros -for typesetting simple documents. It is often necessary to modify the -details of the layouts for such documents, particularly when submitting -camera ready manuscripts for conference proceedings. Since \TeXsis\ is -built on plain \TeX, you can of course use the full power of \TeX\ to -format a document as you please. However, \TeXsis\ contains macros to -produce documents in several of the common formats used in the physics -community. These and other specialized formats are described in this -section. - -It would be very inefficient for \TeXsis\ to load the definitions of all -of the possible document styles listed below when at most only one of -them will be used. \TeXsis\ therefore puts these specialized -definitions in files known as ``style'' files (which generally have -filename extensions of ``|.txs|'') and only loads the particular style -file when it is needed. Besides saving space this also allows for quite -a bit of flexibility, because it is easy to modify style files or to -create new ones. For example, if the proceedings of a conference must -be typeset in a particular way (as is often the case) then the commands -to set-up a document in exactly the right way can be put in a style file -and e-mailed to all conference participants. Another use of specialized -style files is to define a \cs{thesis} format which conforms to the -rules and regulations of a particular university. - - -%=========================* -\subsection{Specialized Document Styles \label{sect.styles}} - -The following styles for various conference proceeding formats, -journals, and thesis formats are distributed with \TeXsis~\fmtversion. -Use these in place of |\paper| or |\preprint|. The name of the style -file from which the definitions are loaded is shown in brackets. -% -\description{XNorthHollandTwo\quad}\clump -% -\itm{\CS{AIPproceedings}} -Similar to |\paper|, but specialized to the American Institute of -\hbox{Physics} (AIP) format. [AIP.txs] -% -\itm{\CS{IEEEproceedings}} -An IEEE format using oversized double column paper. See \Sect{dcol}. -[IEEE.txs] -% -\itm{\CS{IEEEreduced}} -An IEEE format reduced to 75\% of full size and printed with 9~pt.\ -type for $8\frac{1}{2}\,{\rm in} \times 11\,{\rm in}$ paper. [IEEE.txs] -% -\itm{\CS{NorthHolland} } -Format for producing camera-ready copy for proceedings published by -North-Holland/Elsevier. This is a single column format with titles -and authors left justified and in eleven point type. [Elsevier.txs] -% -\itm{\CS{NorthHollandTwo}} -The North-Holland double column format for oversized paper. -[Elsevier.txs] -% -\itm{\CS{nuclproc}} -The ``NUCLPROC'' style for Nuclear Physics Proceedings. [nuclproc.txs] -% -\itm{\CS{WorldScientific}} -Similar to |\paper|, but specialized to the World Scientific -proceedings format. [WorldSci.txs] -% -\itm{\CS{PhysRev}} -Emulates the page layout and appearance of the {\sl Physical Review}. -[PhysRev.txs] -% -\itm{\CS{PhysRevManuscript}} -Similar to |\Manuscript| but customized for papers submitted to the -{\sl Physical Review}. [PhysRev.txs] -% -\itm{\CS{thesis}} -Similar to \cs{book}, but for printing a thesis. The default -|\thesis| format conforms to the requirements of the Yale -Graduate School, but it can (and probably should) be modified for -your own installation. [thesis.txs] -% -\enddescription -Other even more specialized styles are available, and some of them -can be found on the \TeXsis\ anonymous ftp server, in the directory -|/pub/texsis/styles|. - -\bigskip - -The IEEE and North Holland double column formats in the list above use -the double column macros described in Sect.~\use{sect.dcol}. For -example, \cs{NorthHollandTwo} sets up a document with an overall width -of 21.3~cm, a page length of 27.1~cm and a column width of 10.0~cm. -(Note that this is just about as wide or a little wider than most -small laser printers can print, so provisions have been made for -shifting the printed page horizontally to print one column at a time -if necessary.) A document printed with this format might have the -following basic structure: -\TeXexample -|smalltt\texsis -\NorthHollandTwo % set up double columns -\titlepage % but still single column mode - - |<title page material> - -\endtitlepage % ends the title material -\doublecolumns % now start double column mode - - |<text of paper> - -\enddoublecolumns % balance the final columns -\bye -|endTeXexample -\noindent -Saying \cs{NorthHollandTwo} only defines the double column layout; it -does not turn on double column mode. The title material is printed in -single column format across the full page width, then the main body is -printed in double column format once \cs{doublecolumns} appears. It is -important to say \cs{enddoublecolumns} at the end of the document to -balance the columns on the last page. Formatting text in balanced -double columns can be quite tricky, so you should read \Sect{dcol} -carefully before trying to use any of the double column macros. - -%==============================* -\subsubsection{Physical Review Formats} - -The \CS{PhysRevManuscript} style is similar to \cs{Manuscript} but is -customized to satisfy the requirements for manuscripts submitted to -the {\sl Physical Review}. It uses true double -spacing, and it places the tables and figure captions at the end of -the document. By simply switching from this to \cs{preprint} you should -be able to produce a version suitable for distribution as a preprint -from the same manuscript file. - -The \CS{PhysRev} and \CS{PhysRevLett} styles are not intended for -submission but rather emulate the page layouts in the {\sl Physical -Review} and {\sl Physical Review Letters} respectively. We have -attempted to reproduce accurately the double column layout, headlines, -footlines, reference style, etc., used in the actual journals. This -is still work in progress, but it may be useful both to see how a -paper would look in print and as an example for constructing other -styles. Setting up the headlines and page numbering requires calling -a few extra macros: -% -\example -|\texsis| \n -|\PhysRev| \n -|\TitleBanner{|\meta{Running Title Headline}|}| \n -|\AuthorBanner{|\meta{Running Author Headline}|}| \n -|\VolumeBanner{|\meta{series}|}{|\meta{vol}|}{|\meta{issue}% -|}{|\meta{page}|}| \n -|\titlepage| \n -... -\endexample -% -In |\VolumeBanner| the \meta{series} should be one of A, B, C, D, E, -for the {\sl Physical Review} or L for {\sl Physical Review Letters}; -the volume, issue, and starting page arguments are self-explanatory. -Both \CS{PhysRev} and \CS{PhysRevLett} typeset the document in double -columns, so to make full use of these layouts you will need to read -about the double column macros described in \Sect{dcol}. -In particular, you should be aware of the following: in both the -\CS{PhysRev} and \CS{PhysRevLett} styles, double column mode is begun -automatically at the end of the title material (\cs{endtitlepage}). -Since any double column material is inside a group, any definitions made -at that point will only be defined inside that group. If you want to -define macros for use in the rest of your paper, you should do so before -the title material (or use \cs{gdef}). - - -%=========================* -\subsubsection{Thesis or Dissertation Format} - -The style file {\tt \idx{thesis.txs}} contains two alternative -definitions of \CS{thesis}, one for Yale University (called -|\YaleThesis|) and the other for the University of Texas at Austin -(called |\UTthesis|). The default is that saying \CS{thesis} gives you -|\YaleThesis|, but this is easily changed by saying |\let\thesis=\UTthesis|. - -If you are not at Yale or UT you will need to change the -macros in |thesis.txs| to create your own version of the \CS{thesis} -macro. Every university has different requirements for how a thesis is -typed or typeset, and these requirements often conflict. Perhaps the -first thing you should do if you want to write a thesis using \TeXsis\ -is find out if someone else at your university has already done so, and -then copy their definition of \CS{thesis}. If you end up creating a -new style file for your university then we hope that you will make it -available for other students to use. We would also be willing to help, -by putting such style files on the \TeXsis\ anonymous ftp server. -If you have such a file (or other macros) you would like to contribute, -send us e-mail at {\tt texsis@texsis.org}. - - -%=========================* -\subsection{Creating New Styles} - -It is very easy to create a new document style and style file. -By convention, \TeXsis\ style files end with the filename extension -``|.txs|,'' so all you need to do is put the definitions and macros -defining this new document style into such a file, and then read that -file in when beginning the document. For example, suppose you create a -style file called |mine.txs| which contains a document style called -|\mystyle|, which is a slightly altered version of \cs{paper}: -\TeXexample -\def\mystyle{\paper - \hsize=|<dimen> - \vsize=|<dimen> - \showsectIDfalse - ... - } -|endTeXexample -\noindent -You could then simply read in this file at the beginning of the document, -with \cs{input}, and then invoke |\mystyle|, like so, -\TeXexample -\input mine.txs -\mystyle -|endTeXexample - -However, you may have noticed that none of the special document styles -mentioned in \Sect{styles} were actually loaded with \cs{input}, -although they are in fact read from a style file. This was done using -the \CS{autoload} command. Saying -\TeXexample -\autoload\AIPproceeings{AIP.txs} -|endTeXexample -defines |\AIPproceeings| to be a simpler instruction which, if invoked, -automatically loads the style file |AIP.txs|, which contains the real -definition of |\AIPproceedings|. After the style file has been loaded -this real |\AIPproceedings| is automatically called. It then appears as -if the definition of the macro was in \TeXsis's memory all the time, -though it really was only loaded from the file when called for. - -As a practical example of using \CS{autoload}, suppose that you are a -student at Excited State University and you want to create a customized -\cs{thesis} macro which will load automatically from a style file called -|ESUthesis.txs|. You could copy the macros in the file |thesis.txs| -to this new file, and then edit them as needed. Then, to make the -new definition load automatically you would say -\TeXexample -\autoload\thesis{ESUthesis.txs} -|endTeXexample -\noindent -To make this new definition of \cs{thesis} available to -anyone using \TeXsis\ on your machine you would want to put this -\CS{autoload} command in the file |TXSsite.tex| before building the -\TeXsis\ format. This is described in more detail in Appendix~\use{install}. -To make the new definition automatically available just to you in your -thesis directory you could put the command in a file called -|TXSmods.tex| in that directory. - -Important note: many \TeXsis\ style files and source files use the ``|@|'' -character in the names of macros which are to be ``hidden'' from the -casual user. Since ``|@|'' is not a letter these macros can't normally -be used. If you are writing a style file which needs to use these -hidden macros you should say \CS{ATunlock} first, to make ``|@|'' a -letter, and then \CS{ATlock} when you are done to turn ``|@|'' back -into a non-letter. - - - - -\Ignore % The stuff below is maybe way too technical? - -You may also need to make changes in some of more complicated macros. -This is most easily made by copying the original definition from one -of the |TXSxxxx.tex| files into |mine.txs| and editing it. For -example, if you want the abstract to be in 9~pt.\ type, copy the -definition of |\abstract| from |TXStitle.tex| and add |\ninepoint| to -it: -% -\TeXexample -|smalltt\def\abstract{% begin abstract of a paper or treatise - \endmode % end any previous field - \bigskip\bigskip % some space above - \centerline{ABSTRACT}% % ``ABSTRACT'' - \medskip % space below that - \bgroup % begin \abstract group - \let\endmode=\endabstract % \endmode ends \abstract - \narrower\narrower % bring in margins - \ninepoint % NEW FOR \mystyle STYLE - \singlespaced} % single spaced -|endTeXexample - -While some of the macros you need to change may be complicated, the -changes \hbox{you} will actually need to make will probably still be fairly -simple. For example, in the definition of |\section| in |TXSsects.tex| -you probably want to change only the part that actually prints the -section heading. This is a small part of the whole and is reasonably -well commented. The default is to print the section head left -justified, ragged right, with a hanging indentation whose width is set -by the section number: -% -\TeXexample -|smalltt% -% Print the Section title: -% - \ifx\tbf\undefined\def\tbf{\bf}\fi % default \tbf is \bf - \vbox{% % keep heading in \vbox - {\raggedright % - \pretolerance=2000\hyphenpenalty=2000 % no hyphenation - \setbox0=\hbox{\noindent\tbf\@fullID}%% find width of ID - \hangindent=\wd0 \hangafter=1 % for hanging indent - \noindent\unhbox0{\tbf{#1}}\relax % number and title - \medskip}}% % - \nobreak % -|endTeXexample -% -If instead you want the section headings to be centered with two -spaces (|\ \ |) after the number, you can replace this part of the -|\section| macro -% -\TeXexample -|smalltt% -% Print the Section title: -% - \ifx\tbf\undefined\def\tbf{\bf}\fi % default \tbf is \bf - \vbox{% % keep heading in \vbox - {\raggedcenter % USE RAGGED CENTER - \tbf\@fullID\ \ #1 % ID AND TITLE - \endraggedcenter % END RAGGED CENTER - \medskip}}% % - \nobreak % -|endTeXexample -% -\noindent -You can leave the rest of the \cs{section} macro alone and it will work -as before. - -\endIgnore - - - -%==================================================* -\subsection{Overhead Transparencies (Slides)} - -\TeXsis\ contains a simple \CS{slides} format for making overhead -transparencies or similar material. -While \TeX\ is not a convenient language for graphical page layout, it -is sometimes useful to be able to convert a paper to transparencies or -visa versa.\Footnote*{However, until recently one of the -authors of \TeXsis\ preferred to make neatly lettered transparencies by -hand, using colored pens, rather than using a printer that could only -print in black and white. -He's changed his mind now that it is possible to produce text -in color.} -If you want to use |\slides|, simply begin your manuscript file with -% -\TeXexample -\slides -|endTeXexample -instead of (or in addition to) |\texsis|. -% -This will produce -%% NOT ANYMORE $8\frac{1}{2}\,{\rm in} \times 10\frac{1}{2}\,{\rm in}$ -pages with $1\,{\rm in}$ margins in -the ``portrait'' orientation with 24~pt.\ type, with a ragged right -margin and lots of incentive to suppress hyphenation. -%% NOT ANYMORE and bottom margins. -\CS{slides} also defines \CS{bl} to insert a blank line and -\CS{np} to create a new page, since these are often useful for slides. -Since the \CS{slides} format is very simple, it is not loaded from a -style file. - -%==================================================* -\subsection{Color PostScript Output \label{sect.color}} - -Now that color printers are fairly common, it is useful to have some -way to produce text that is printed in different colors. -The simplest use of this is for producing overhead transparencies, as -with the \CS{slides} format. -\TeXsis\ has a simple set of macros, in the style file {\tt -color.txs}, which lets you change the colors of text printed using -PostScript. -This only works for PostScript output produced by\index{Rokicki, -Tomas} Tom Rokicki's {\tt dvips} program,\cite{Rokicki} using the -profile file {\tt color.pro} that is usually included with {\tt -dvips}. - -To use these macros, you must first input the definitions, -\TeXexample -\input color.txs -|endTeXexample -To change the color of all text which follows, use the command \CS{SetColor}, -as in -\TeXexample -\SetColor{Green} -|endTeXexample -Keep in mind that this will change \undertext{all} -text, including page numbers and headlines and footlines. To print a -small portion of text in some other color, use -\CS{colorit}, -as in -\TeXexample -\colorit{Red}{The text inside these brackets is colored Red} -|endTeXexample -You can change the color of the background using \CS{background}, -as in -\TeXexample -\background{Yellow} -|endTeXexample - -\bigskip -\pagecheck{2in} - -The 12 basic colors available are -\example -\settabs 4\columns -\+& Black & White & Gray \cr -\+& Red & Green & Blue \cr -\+& Cyan & Magenta & Yellow \cr -\+& Purple & Orange & Brown \cr -\endexample -Note that the case is important---the names must begin with an initial -capital letter. - -For the basic colors listed above some shortcuts are also defined. -Specifically, you can simply use the color name as a command, with the -text to be colored as a single argument, as in -\TeXexample -\Red{This text is colored Red} -|endTeXexample -or you can say |\text|\meta{Color} to change the text color, -as in -\TeXexample -\textGreen -|endTeXexample -You can add shortcuts for other colors besides the basics -with the \CS{addColor} command. Saying -\TeXexample -\addColor{Salmon} -|endTeXexample -will define |\Salmon| and |\textSalmon| as shortcuts -for |\colorit{Salmon}{|\meta{text}|}| and |\setColor{Salmon}|. - -Although the basic colors listed above should be enough for most -simple applications, there are actually a whole host of other colors -available. In fact, all of the colors found in a box of 64 Crayola -Crayons are defined in {\tt color.pro} for |dvips|. You can define -short-cuts for all of these simply by saying \CS{Crayolas}. -You can produce a list of all of the colors, with each printed in its -own color, by saying \CS{ListColors}. - -The commands so far have just about the same syntax as those in the -macro package called {\tt COLORDVI.TEX}, by Jim -Hafner\reference{colordvi} Hafner, Jim, the {\tt COLORDVI.TEX} macros -are included in the {\tt dvips} distribution. See \Ref{Rokicki} -\endreference\space -(although the internal workings are slightly different). -Any plain \TeX\ file which uses {\tt COLORDVI.TEX} should also work -using {\tt color.txs}. -But the {\tt color.txs} macros also include commands to specifically -manipulate the PostScript color stack. -To change the color temporarily by pushing it onto the stack, and then -revert to the previous color by popping the stack, use \CS{PushColor} -and \CS{PopColor}, as in -\TeXexample -This text is in some color, probably black. -\PushColor{Purple} -This text will be purple. -\PopColor -This text will be back in the previous color. -|endTeXexample - -Be aware that the color changes have nothing to do with TeX's grouping -mechanism (\ie\ curly brackets), but are based only on the PostScript -color stack. -If you really want the color to change back when a \TeX\ group ends -(whenever that might happen), you can use -\cs{aftergroup}, as in -\TeXexample -\begingroup\PushColor{Red}\aftergroup\PopColor -|endTeXexample -Then later when the group is ended, the \CS{PopColor} is automatically -executed and the color reverts to its previous value. -One nice way this can be used is to color all displayed equations, -by putting this all in \cs{everydisplay}, like so -\TeXexample -\everydisplay={\PushColor{BurntOrange}\aftergroup\PopColor} -|endTeXexample -A displayed equation is always constructed within a new group, and -when it ends the \CS{PopColor} on the \cs{aftergroup} stack is invoked -automatically and the text reverts to the previous color. - -\bigskip - - -If the 64 colors listed by \CS{ListColors} are not enough for your -purposes, you can also define your own, using \CS{SetCmykColor} or -\CS{PushCmykColor}. -Colors are specified as a quadruple of intensity values between 0.0 and 1.0 -(CMYK means Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and blacK). For example: -\TeXexample -\SetCmykColor{.2 .3 .4 .1} -|endTeXexample -will give you a nice tan, while -\TeXexample -\PushCmykColor{.5 .5 .1 .2} Old Blue Eyes \PopColor -|endTeXexample -will print the text in the shade of blue specified by that particular -CMYK quadruple. - - -%==================================================* -\subsection{Twin Page Output} - -It is sometimes desirable to produce preprints or other documents in a -compact format with two pages on each physical page in landscape -orientation. While this can be done with \cs{SetDoubleColumns}, a much -simpler approach is sufficient. \TeXsis\ contains a macro called -\CS{twinout} which redefines the output routine to produce two pages -per page, without attempting to balance columns or allowing spanned -equations, tables, etc. (thus avoiding many of the possible problems -with the more powerful double column macros). \CS{twinout} can be used -with any of the standard formats described in \Sect{papers} or -\Sect{fmts} or even with Plain \TeX. Since \CS{twinout} does not -select fonts, the user must do so:\index{twin page output} -% -\TeXexample -\texsis -\tenpoint -\def\Tbf{\twelvebf} -\def\tbf{\tenbf} -\twinout - |<text> -|endTeXexample -Alternatively, the \CS{twinformat} command can be used to produce any -\TeXsis\ format in \CS{twinout} layout with 10~pt fonts. Thus the above -commands can be replaced by -\TeXexample -\texsis -\twinformat - |<text> -|endTeXexample -Here \CS{twinformat} automatically sets up 10~pt fonts and appropriate -values for the title bold face fonts, just as in the previous example. -\CS{twinout} use the following dimensions: -% -\description{Xnormhsize\qquad}\clump -% -\itm{\CS{twinhsize}} -Total width for twin column output. -% -\itm{\CS{twinvsize}} -Column height for twin column output. -% -\itm{\CS{twincsize}} -Column width for twin column output. -% -\itm{\CS{normhsize}} -Normal value of \cs{hsize} in portrait mode. -% -\itm{\CS{normvsize}} -Normal value of \cs{vsize} in portrait mode. -% -\enddescription -All of these have sensible default values for $8.5\,{\rm in} \times -11\,{\rm in}$ paper but can be reset before \CS{twinout} is called. The -"normal" sizes should print properly with the default device driver -and printer. Appropriate default values for all these dimensions can -be set in |TXSsite.tex|. - - \CS{twinout} puts \cs{LandscapeSpecial} on each page. This is null by -default but can be redefined to be an appropriate \cs{special} command -to produce landscape output with your device driver and printer. For -example, with |dvips|\cite{Rokicki}\index{dvips}\index{Rokicki, Tomas} -and a PostScript printer, use -\TeXexample -\def\LandscapeSpecial{\special{papersize=11in,8.5in}} -|endTeXexample -A default value can be set in |TXSsite.tex|. - - \CS{twinprint} is a substitute for \cs{preprint} which sets the -title, author, and other titlepage material full size in landscape mode -and then switches to \CS{twinout} twin column output with 10~pt type for -the text of the paper. A typical preprint might read: -\TeXexample -\twinprint -\titlepage -\title - |<paper title> -\endtitle -\author - |<author's name and address> -\endauthor -\abstract - |<text of abstract> -\endabstract -\endtitlepage - |<text of paper> -\bye -|endTeXexample -\nobreak\noindent -This produces a nice, compact format for preprints. - -%>>> EOF TXSfmts.doc <<< diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSfonts.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSfonts.doc deleted file mode 100644 index dd722d2a74b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSfonts.doc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,279 +0,0 @@ -%% file: TXSfonts.doc - Type Sizes and Styles - TeXsis version 2.18 -%% @(#) $Id: TXSfonts.doc,v 18.2 2000/05/17 00:19:46 myers Exp $ -%======================================================================* -% (C) Copyright 1989, 1992 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige -% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications -% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL). -% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL -%======================================================================* -\ifx\undefined\meta\texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\draft\fi - - -\section{Type Sizes, Type Styles, and Line Spacing \label{sect.fonts}} - -This section describes the \TeXsis\ commands for changing font sizes, -typestyles and the spacing between lines. It also describes how you -can make footnotes, and a special feature for balancing quotation -marks. - -\subsection{Type Sizes and Styles} - -Plain \TeX\ is set up to use 10\pt\ type, with smaller sizes for -superscripts and subscripts. -\TeXsis\ expands the available type sizes to include 11, 12, 14, and -16\pt\ type, and \TeXsis\ makes it easy to change from one size of -type to another. -Type sizes are selected with the following commands: -\index{type sizes}% -\description{Xtwentyfourpointpoint\qquad} -\itm{\CS{ninepoint}} -Gives 9 \pt\ type (not illustrated). -\itm{\CS{tenpoint} } -Gives {\tenpoint 10 \pt\ type, like this.} -\itm{\CS{elevenpoint} } -Gives 11 \pt\ type. (not illustrated). -\itm{\CS{twelvepoint} } -Gives {\twelvepoint 12 \pt\ type, like this.} -\itm{\CS{fourteenpoint} } -Gives {\fourteenpoint 14 \pt\ type, like this.} -\itm{\CS{sixteenpoint} } -Gives {\sixteenpoint 16 \pt\ type, like this.} -\itm{\CS{twentypoint}} -Gives 20 \pt\ type (not illustrated). -\itm{\CS{twentyfourpoint}} -Gives 24 \pt\ type (not illustrated). -\enddescription -In some implementations of \TeX\ there is insufficient room to load -all of these fonts, so \idx{fonts} are loaded only when they are first -used, and not all of them can be illustrated here. -\TeXsis\ starts out with \CS{tenpoint}, just like Plain \TeX, but -switches to \CS{twelvepoint} once you say \cs{texsis}. - -In Plain \TeX\ you can switch between Roman, Bold, or Italic -typestyles with the commands \cs{rm}, \cs{bf}, and \cs{it}. -The same is true with \TeXsis. -These commands change the style of the type, but not the size. -The complete set of commands to change typestyles is: -\index{typestyles}% -\description{~rm~\qquad} -\itm{\cs{rm} } -Gives Roman type. Available in all sizes. -\itm{\cs{it} } -Gives {\it italic type} for emphasis. Available in all sizes. -\itm{\cs{sl} } -Gives {\sl slanted type} for book titles, etc. Available in all sizes. -\itm{\cs{bf} } -Gives {\bf bold face type} for emphasis. Available in all sizes. -\itm{\cs{tt} } -Gives {\tt typewriter type} for listing computer programs, \TeX\ -examples, etc. Available in 10, 11, and 12~pt. -\itm{\CS{mib}} -Gives math italic bold in math mode (|$...$|) for titles. Available in -10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 20, and 24~pt base sizes, but the minimum size for -subscripts and superscripts is 10\pt. -\itm{\CS{scr}} -Gives script capital letters (using Ralph Smith's Formal Script fonts, -the |rsfs| fonts, if they are available on your computer). -Use |\scr| as you would use |\cal|. -\enddescription - - \TeXsis\ includes the mathematics fonts in all sizes; these are -used automatically when you type equations between the math quotes, -|$...$|. Limited \idx{sans-serif fonts} are also available using the commands -\cs{tenss} and \cs{twelvess}. - - Two special symbols, \CS{Tbf} and \CS{tbf}, are used to produce -``\idx{Title bold face}'' and ``\idx{small title bold face}.'' The first is -used to print the title of a paper and titles of the chapters of a -paper, and the second is used to print the titles of sections of a -paper. You are free to change the definitions of these control words, -but if you do not they default to 14\pt\ boldface for \CS{Tbf} and 12\pt\ -boldface for \CS{tbf}. - - Math italic bold (\CS{mib}) is listed with the other fonts but -is actually slightly different: it substitutes boldfaced versions of -the math italic and math symbol fonts for the normal ones {\sl -everywhere\/} in math mode (|$...$|). These fonts are available only -with with Computer Modern fonts and only in 10\pt\ and larger sizes; -the standard math fonts are used for smaller superscripts. Since -\CS{mib} effectively redefines |$..$|, it must be placed before the -math material (i.e., outside the math quotes) and the whole formula -will be bold. For example, -\TeXexample -{\tbf\mib Observation of $Z^0 \to \mu^+\mu^-$} -|endTeXexample -will produce the indicated text in \CS{tbf} size with a bold formula, -provided you have the right fonts. The easiest way to find out is to try -it. Since the \CS{mib} fonts are not available everywhere, they are never -loaded or used unless you explicitly ask for them. - - Plain \TeX\ includes a \idx{calligraphic script} font known as -\cs{cal}, but the letters in this font are not quite what most -physicists are accustomed to using for things like \idx{Lagrangian} -densities or \idx{functional measure}s. -Ralph Smith\index{Smith, Ralph} of U.C. San Diego has created a new -``\idx{formal script}'' font with much better letters for such -purposes, and \TeXsis\ supports this font provided that it is -available on your computer. -To get this new font you simply use \CS{scr} in place of \cs{cal}. -An example is: -\TeXexample -$$ - {\scr L} = - \del^\mu \phi^\ast \del_\mu \phi + m^2 \phi^2 -$$ -|endTeXexample -\noindent -Unfortunately, we don't know if your computer has the |rsfs| -fonts\index{rsfs font} so we won't try to show you the output from -this example. -The quickest way to determine whether the fonts are available on your -system is to try this example and verify that \TeX\ does not complain -about the font. -If your system does not have the font then you can obtain it from -CTAN, or from the \TeXsis\ ftp server. (See the front cover of this -manual for instructions.) - -\bigskip -\pagecheck{0.65\vsize} - -\subsection{Interline Spacing} - - When you use the macros \cs{tenpoint}, \cs{twelvepoint}, etc., the -style of the type is reset to Roman, as if you'd also typed \cs{rm}. The -\idx{baseline skip} (the \idx{distance between lines}) is also set to be -suitable for the type size. -Several commands are provided that vary the interline spacing, both in -the text and in auxiliary material such as tables. -These are: -\description{~doublespaced~\qquad}\singlespaced\parskip=12pt -% -\itm{\CS{doublespaced}} -Makes the baseline skip 1.5 times its normal value. -True double spacing looks too wide with typesetting. -% -\itm{\CS{singlespaced} } -Resets the baseline skip to its normal value. -% -\itm{\CS{TrueDoubleSpacing}} -Makes the baselineskip twice its normal value. -This usually looks too wide for a final document, but it is desirable -in a manuscript being submitted to journals such as Physical Review. -% -\itm{\CS{triplespaced}} -Makes the baseline skip 3~times its normal value. -This should only be used for drafts of papers to leave room for notes -or corrections. -% -\itm{\CS{widenspacing}} -Increases the current spacing by a factor of 1.25. -With single spacing this is the analog of $1 {1\over2}$ spacing on a -typewriter. -Repeating |\widenspacing| increases the spacing by 1.25~times whatever -it already was; it does not reset the spacing to singlespaced first. -\enddescription -When \TeXsis\ is first started the default is |\singlespaced|, but once -it is initialized with the |\texsis| command (or |\preprint| or -|\paper|, etc...) the spacing is set to |\doublespaced|. - - -\bigskip -\pagecheck{0.65\vsize} - -\subsection{Footnotes} - - Even when a paper is double spaced, you may want to have the -footnotes single spaced. Also, if the text is in 12~point type you may -nevertheless want to have the footnotes in 10~point type. -In \TeXsis\ you can do this easily using \CS{Footnote} in place of -\cs{footnote}, as in this example:\Footnote\dag{This is an example of -the use of {\tt\bs Footnote} in \TeXsis.}\index{footnotes}% -\TeXexample -... as in this example:\Footnote\dag{This is an example of -the use of {\tt\bs Footnote} in \TeXsis.} -|endTeXexample -\noindent -|\Footnote| also automatically puts the reference mark (in this case the -dagger symbol |\dag|) in a superscript.\Footnote{*}{The footnote -character is typeset in math mode, as if it were between two {\tt -\$}'s.}\ \ -% -The typestyle used for the text of the footnote is -controlled by \CS{FootFont}, which defaults to: -\TeXexample -\def\FootFont{\tenpoint} -|endTeXexample -\noindent -If you want to change this you can do so somewhere near the beginning of -your document. The spacing between multiple paragraphs in a |\Footnote| -(if you are prone to being so verbose) is set to zero, regardless of the -\cs{parskip} in the main part of the document, but you can also change -this by adding \cs{parskip}|=|\meta{amount} to your new definition of -|\FootFont|. If you want a singlespaced footnote in the |\FootFont| -typestyle but without putting a reference -mark in the text you can use -\CS{Vfootnote} just as you would use \cs{vfootnote} in Plain \TeX. And -of course if |\Footnote| or |\Vfootnote| cannot do what you need even -after changing |\FootFont| then you can always use \cs{footnote} or -\cs{vfootnote} from Plain \TeX.%% -% -\Footnote{\ddag}{A technical footnote: With -|\footnote| from plain \TeX\ the group is closed before the footnote is -typeset, so any line spacing you set inside the footnote is lost. You -can solve this by putting a |\par| or |\vskip 0pt| at the end of your -footnote, but then the final strut is put on a separate line. Getting -footnotes to work just right is tricky business, which is why we wrote -\CS{Footnote}.} - -\bigskip - -Sometimes it is desirable to have footnotes numbered consecutively. -This is easily done with \CS{NFootnote}, which keeps a count of the -footnotes it has created and uses the numbers for the reference marks. -Just as with \CS{Footnote}, the text is single spaced and printed in -the \CS{FootFont} typestyle.\NFootnote{This is an example of a -numbered footnote, which was created by saying ``|...printed in the -{\tt\bs FootFont} typestyle.\NFootnote{This is an example ... }|''} -The footnote counter is called \CS{footnum}, so if you want to start -over numbering footnotes (at the begining of a new chapter, for -example), then simply set this back to zero, by saying -\TeXexample -\footnum=0 -|endTeXexample - - -%==================================================* -\pagecheck{0.65\vsize} - -\subsection{Automatic Quote Balancing} - -One of the differences between typing and typesetting is the way in -which quote marks are handled. -On a typewriter you would simply use the non-oriented double-quote -mark (|"|) both to begin and end the quoted material. -In typesetting, however, quoted text begins with a left-quote mark -(``) and ends with a right-quote mark (''). -To produce these in \TeX\ you have to type two single-quote marks, -either |``| or |''|. -This is not very difficult to do, but unless you have an editing -program which does it for you, it is easy to forget and use the -double-quote marks instead. -With \TeXsis\ that's okay. -If you say\index{quote balancing}% -\example -\CS{quoteon} -\endexample -then the next time a double-quote mark comes along it will be -translated into a left-quote mark. -The double-quote mark after that will become a right-quote mark, and -so on, so that material enclosed in double-quote marks will be typeset -correctly. -All you have to do is remember to use the double-quote marks in pairs. - - In some special cases you may not want \TeXsis\ to be so smart -about double-quotes. You can turn this feature off by saying -\example -\CS{quoteoff} -\endexample -The default though, once you have said |\texsis|, is |\quoteon|. - -%>>> EOF TXSfonts.doc <<< diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSinstl.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSinstl.doc deleted file mode 100644 index e6a112c75b4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSinstl.doc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,358 +0,0 @@ -% file: TXSinstl.doc - Installation Instructions - TeXsis version 2.18 -%% @(#) $Id: TXSinstl.doc,v 18.2 2000/05/17 00:19:46 myers Exp $ -%======================================================================* -% Copyright (c) 1990, 1992, 1995, 1997 by Eric Myers and Frank Paige. -% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications -% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL). -% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL -%======================================================================* -\ifx\undefined\meta \texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\input Manual.aux\draft\fi - - -\appendix{A}{Customization and Installation of \TeXsis \label{install}} - -\centerline{(\TeX sis version \fmtversion, as of \revdate)} - -\noindent -This appendix contains information about how to install \TeXsis\ on -several types of computer systems, and how to customize \TeXsis\ for a -particular installation. The discussion below on ``Local -Modifications'' may be of interest to any user, but the rest of this -Appendix is probably only of interest to someone who is responsible for -installing or maintaining \TeXsis. - - -\subsection{Customization} - - There are three different mechanisms for making modifications to -the basic \TeXsis\ macro package. It is better to use one of these -mechanisms rather than modifying the original code. - -\subsubsection{Local Modifications} - - \TeXsis\ will read the file {\tt TXSmods.tex}, if it exists, from -the current directory or search path every time you run \TeXsis. This -lets you make your own \idx{custom modifications} or additions to -\TeXsis. For example, say you have a directory specifically for a -particular project you are working on and you are writing several -different papers or other documents related to this project. You could -add a file called {\tt TXSmods.tex} to this directory to contain extra -macro definitions that are used in all of these documents, and these -will be loaded automatically whenever you run \TeXsis\ in this -directory. If you run \TeXsis\ from another directory these macros will -not be loaded. - -\subsubsection{Site Modifications} - - If a file called {\tt TXSsite.tex} exits in the current directory -at the time the \TeXsis\ format file is created (see below) then it is -automatically read in at this time. The purpose of this file is to -allow you to add definitions and macros that are local to your computer -installation. For example, in this file you would define the control -word \cs{ORGANIZATION} to give the name of your organization or -institution. \cs{ORGANIZATION} is used at the top of memos and at the -top of the title page of a \cs{preprint}. You might also put a -customized \cs{letterhead} macro in this file, and you may well want to -change the definition of \CS{LandscapeSpecial}, which controls how your -laser printer is put into landscape mode. Note that the file {\tt -TXSsite.tex} is only read {\sl once}, when the \TeXsis\ format file is -created, not every time \TeXsis\ is run. -A prototype site file, called |TXSsite.000|, is included in the standard -distribution of \TeXsis. - - -\subsubsection{Patches} - - \TeXsis\ will also automatically read in a file called -{\tt TXSpatch.tex} from the standard input path, if it exists, -every time \TeXsis\ is run. -This file should contain additions or corrections (``patches'') to -\TeXsis. This patch file lets you correct minor problems or make minor -changes to \TeXsis\ without having to rebuild the format file. - -Whenever we find a problem with \TeXsis\ we try to correct it as soon -as possible. -To make the correction available to users before the next version of -\TeXsis\ is released we issue patch files containing the corrections. -The most current patch file should always be available at -\URL{ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis}, or in {\tt -macros/texsis} on any CTAN server. - - - -%==================================================* - -\subsection{Installation of \TeXsis} - -To use \TeXsis\ or any large macro package effectively you should run -the |initex| program to create a pre-compiled format. The general method -of doing this is machine independent, but the specific commands depend -on the operating system on your computer. This appendix gives the -appropriate commands for running |initex| and installing \TeXsis\ on a -computer running UNIX, a VAX or Alpha running VMS, and for an IBM PC running -PC\TeX\ under \idx{MS-DOS}. We assume that you are familiar with the -operating system and that \TeX\ and the Plain format have already been -installed. -Notes on how to install \TeXsis\ on other kinds of machines (such as -Atari or Apple computers, or on Linux) are available on the \TeXsis\ -ftp server (\URL{ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis}). - -VMS users should note that \TeXsis\ is also available with the latest -release of DECUS \TeX, and much of the installation work has already -been done or can be done almost automatically. You may want to get this -version from CTAN rather than the ``raw'' distribution from the TeXsis -ftp site. -If you are installing from the DECUS distribution you should read the -file |INSTALL.VMS| with that distribution. - - -\subsubsection{Quick Install for Unix and \TeX~3.x} - -The current version for \TeX\ as of 1997 is 3.14159. If you have -anything earlier than version 3.x then it is strongly recommended that -you first upgrade your \TeX\ installation. Assuming that you have a -current \TeX\ installation on a Unix computer, you can build and -install \TeXsis\ by simply doing the following: - - -\EnvRightskip=\parindent -\enumerate\enumpoints -\itm\llap{\square\qquad}% -Edit the file |Makefile| and change parameters and paths as -appropriate, following the directions given in the comments. -The TEXDIR variable should point to the top-level \TeX\ directory -on your system. The default directories under TEXDIR are those -recommended by the TeX Directory Structure (TDS) working group of the -\TeX\ Users Group. - -\itm\llap{\square\qquad}% -(Optional) Copy the file |TXSsite.000| to |TXSsite.tex| and edit -this file to contain appropriate site dependent information, such as -definitions for the name of your |\ORGANIZATION|, or your -\cs{letterhead}, or change \cs{LandscapeSpecial}. -If you already have a |TXSsite.tex| file then copy it to the current -directory so that it will be included when building the format file. - -\itm\llap{\square\qquad}% -Give the command `|make|' to build the format file and the manual. - -\itm\llap{\square\qquad}% -Give the command `|make install|' to install the files on the system. -\endenumerate - - -\pagecheck{0.20\vsize} -\subsubsection{Detailed Installation} - -To install \TeXsis\ follow the steps below or their equivalents for -your computer and operating system. If you are installing a system-wide -version of \TeXsis\ then you may want to review the appropriate -documentation on how \TeX\ itself is installed on your system. -\enumpoints -\enumerate -\itm\llap{\square\qquad}% -Create a separate directory to hold the \TeXsis\ files. This is not -strictly necessary, but it is strongly recommended, since there are -more than 70~files for the source code and -documentation. On a Unix machine we recommend using -|/usr/local/share/texmf/tex/texsis| or |/usr/local/lib/tex/texsis|, depending on -where your other \TeX\ files are kept. For a VMS system, -you should use a subdirectory of the main \TeX\ directory, whatever that -happens to be. On an IBM PC -it is best to use a top-level directory |C:\TEXSIS| on your hard disk, -rather than a subdirectory of |C:\PCTEX|, to simplify backing up your -files. - -\itm\llap{\square\qquad}% -Copy all of the \TeXsis\ files into this directory. The \TeXsis\ source -files all have names of the form |TXS|$xxx$|.tex|, and -most of the documentation -files have names |TXS|$xxx$|.doc|. \TeXsis\ style files end with -the extension |.txs|. There will also be several other files in your -distribution of \TeXsis, such as |texsis.tex| and |Manual.tex|. -A complete list of the files can be found in a file called |MANIFEST|. - - -\itm\llap{\square\qquad}% -Make any necessary changes in the source code. You will probably want to -copy the file |TXSsite.000| to |TXSsite.tex| and edit this file, -changing the definition of \cs{ORGANIZATION}, \cs{LandscapeSpecial}, -and the letterhead macros. - -On VMS systems you may (or may not) want to define |\TeXsisLib| to be -the \TeXsis\ directory and |\TXSpatches| to be the patch file in that -directory. - -If you have problems with missing fonts, look at the documentation -in the file |TXSfonts.tex|. - - -\itm\llap{\square\qquad}% -Create the format file |texsis.fmt| by running |initex|. \index{initex} -On a Unix machine the command is: -\example -|% initex \&plain texsis '\dump'| -\endexample -You must remember the ``|\|'' to escape the ``|&|.'' - -On a VMS system replace the |initex| command with |TEX/INIT|. You must -also tell \TeX\ where to find the input files for both \TeXsis\ and -Plain \TeX. The commands are: -\example\obeylines\advance\rightskip by -1cm -|$ DEFINE/USER TEXIN | \meta{texsis} \meta{plain} -|$ TEX/INIT/NOFORMAT/TEXINPUTS=TEXIN: "&plain texsis \dump"| -\endexample -where \meta{texsis} is the specification for the device, directory, and -subdirectories of \TeXsis, and \meta{plain} is the specifiation for -the standard files like |PLAIN.TEX|. - -For an IBM PC with PC\TeX\ give the command, -\example -|TEX TEXSIS /I| -\endexample -and reply to the |*| prompt with ``\cs{dump}.'' (In some versions of -PC\TeX\ the |TEX| command is replaced with |TEX386| or |TEX386b|. Check -your manual to be sure.) \TeXsis\ will also work with |emtex| or any -other version of ``big'' \TeX\ for the PC, but you will have to check -the documentation for that particular implementation of \TeX\ for -specific instructions for creating a preloaded format. - -In any case |initex| will load the Plain \TeX\ format and then the -various pieces of \TeXsis, displaying a message for each piece. -Finally it will spew out a list of fonts used and other information. -This should contain near the end the statement ``No pages of output -produced.'' (If it does not, something may be wrong with your distribution, -although it is probably a minor problem. Check your editing of the -|TXSsite.tex| file.) The preloaded format will be -written to the file |texsis.fmt|. - -\itm\llap{\square\qquad}% -Copy or move various files to where they need to be: -\enumerate -\itm -Copy the format file to the place where your version of \TeX\ looks for -pre-loaded formats. On Unix systems this is usually -\example -|/usr/local/share/texmf/tex/formats|. -\endexample -or some variation of this. -For VMS machines make sure the file is in the directory named by -|$TEX_FORMATS|. -With PC-\TeX\ the file goes into |\PCTEX\TEXFMTS|. - -\itm -Copy the \TeXsis\ style files (which end with the extension |.txs|) to -the place your version of \TeX\ usually looks for input. Under Unix -this should be -\example\obeylines -|/usr/local/lib/tex/inputs| -(or sometimes |/usr/local/lib/tex/macros|). -\endexample -For VMS machines make sure these files are in the directory included -in the path defined by the |TEX_INPUTS| logical. For PC-\TeX\ the -proper place is |\PCTEX\TEXINPUT|. - -\itm -If you have any run-time patches to add to \TeXsis\ copy the -file |TXSpatch.tex| to the same \TeX\ inputs directory. -If there is a |TXSpatch.tex| from a previous release of \TeXsis\ you -should be sure to remove the old file if it is not being replaced. - -\endenumerate - -\itm\llap{\square\qquad}% -Having created the format file, you need to make a command |texsis| to -run \TeX\ using it. The way to do this is very dependent on the -operating system. - -\enumerate - -\itm -On a Unix system running \TeX~3.0 or higher you need only to make a link -to the executable |virtex|\index{virtex} with the same name as the -format you want to load. |Virtex| probably lives in |/usr/local/bin| or -some similar place. The command to make the link is something like: -\example -|ln /usr/local/bin/virtex /usr/local/bin/texsis| -\endexample - -For \TeX\ versions 2.9x you can build an ``undumped'' version of -\TeXsis. You will have to see the \TeX\ distribution notes for a -description of |undump|. \index{undump} However, this is now a very old -version of \TeX\ (as of this writing \TeX\ is up to version~3.1415), so -you should seriously consider upgrading to a newer version of \TeX. - - -If you are going to create a ``private'' version of \TeXsis\ rather than -installing it for the whole system then you need to add your \TeXsis\ -directory to the environment variables |TEXFORMATS| and |TEXINPUTS| and -define the command |texsis| as follows. For the C-shell, put in your -|.cshrc| file: -\example\obeylines -|alias texsis virtex \\\&texsis| -|setenv TEXSIS_LIB $HOME/texsis/| -|setenv TEXFORMATS ".:$TEXSIS_LIB:$TEXFORMATS"| -|setenv TEXINPUTS ".:$TEXSIS_LIB:$TEXINPUTS"| -\endexample -(This assumes that |TEXFORMATS| and |TEXINPUTS| are already properly -defined. If not, insert the proper directories.) - -\itm -Under VMS, place in your |login.com| file the commands -\example\obeylines -|$ DEFINE TEXSIS_LIB| \meta{disk}|:[|\meta{directory}|]| -|$ TEXSIS :== $TEX$:TEX.EXE &TEXSIS_LIB:TEXSIS| -\endexample -where |TEX$| is the logical name for the main \TeX\ directory. You can -also put these commands in a \TeX\ initialization |.COM| file. - - - -\itm -For PC\TeX\index{PCTeX@{PC\TeX}} you should find in the distribution a file -|TEXSIS.BAT|. If you don't, you can create it. The file should contain: -\example\obeylines -|ECHO OFF| -|\PCTEX\TEX &TEXSIS %1 /F 25000| -\endexample -(Replace the |TEX| command with |TEX386| or |TEX386b| if appropriate for -your machine. For PC-\TeX\ versions 3.14 and greater the |/F 25000| is -no longer needed.) -Either put this file -in a directory in your command path or add the directory it is in -to your |PATH| statement. -If you want to be able to load a patch file then you should also -include a line such as -\example -|\def\TXSpatches{C:/TEXSIS/TXSpatch}| -\endexample -in the |TXSsite.tex| file. Because \TeX\ and MS-DOS both use -backslashes for their own purposes the path is specified with {\sl -forward} slashes; -DOS understands them to be the same as a backslash. - -\endenumerate -\endenumerate - -\bigskip\goodbreak - - After these steps have been carried out, \TeXsis\ should be -installed and available to you, and to other users if installed -system-wide. The command -\example -|texsis| {\sl name} -\endexample -should run \TeXsis\ on the file {\sl name}|.tex| and produce the file -{\sl name}|.dvi|, which can be printed like any |.dvi| file. -A good test is to go to the \TeXsis\ source directory (or the -documentation directory, if the documentation files |TXS|$xxx$|.doc| -have been put in a separate directory) and say -\example -|texsis Manual| -\endexample -On the first try this will produce several warning messages coming from -undefined tags for forward references. These will be defined later in -the document and saved in the file |Manual.aux|; Running \TeXsis\ a -second time should produce the \TeXsis\ manual with no errors. - -%>>> EOF TXSinstl.doc <<< diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSintro.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSintro.doc deleted file mode 100644 index 6c8e1d60256..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSintro.doc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,353 +0,0 @@ -%% file: TXSintro.doc - Manual Intructions - TeXsis version 2.18 -%% @(#) $Id: TXSintro.doc,v 18.2 2000/05/17 00:19:46 myers Exp $ -%======================================================================* -% (C) Copyright 1989, 1992, 1997 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige -% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications -% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL). -% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL -%======================================================================* -\ifx\undefined\meta \texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\input Manual.aux\draft\fi - - -\section{Introduction \label{sect.intro}} - - \TeX\ is a computer typesetting system created by Donald -Knuth\index{Knuth, Donald} of Stanford University. -It is described succinctly in his book, \TeXbook.\reference{Knuth} -D.E.~Knuth, -\booktitle{The \TeX book} (Addison-Wesley, 1986) -\endreference -\TeX\ is especially well suited for typesetting technical material -containing mathematical symbols and equations. -As a result, \TeX\ in one form or another is now used by almost all -mathematicians and most physicists for writing scientific papers and -related documents. -The journals of the American Mathematical Society are typeset with -\TeX, and the journals of the American Physical Society now accept -manuscripts written in \TeX. -A large number of physicists also distribute preprint -(pre-publication) versions of their papers, known as ``e-prints,'' via -an archive server based at the Los Alamos National Laboratory. -\TeX\ in some form is the {\it de facto} standard for such papers. - -There are actually several different ``flavors'' of \TeX. -One of the reasons that \TeX\ is so useful is that it has a powerful -macro capability --- to the point that \TeX\ can actually be -considered to be a computer ``language.'' -As a result, there now exist a number of macro packages, or -``formats,'' which either extend or replace the basic \TeX\ language -of \TeXbook\ (which is commonly known as ``plain'' \index{plain TeX@{plain -\TeX}}\TeX) by adding more advanced features or commands appropriate -to more specialized types of documents. -\TeXsis\ is one such macro package, designed specifically (but not -exclusively) for physicists. -\TeXsis\ provides the author with many useful commands with are either -not available or not easily implemented by the casual user of plain -\TeX. -Among these are the ability to automatically number equations, -references, figures and tables, and to refer to these ``numbered'' -objects easily by symbolic names which are independent of the values -assigned to them when the document is processed. -\TeXsis\ makes it easy to change the type style or size, and to -control other aspects of the formatting. -\TeXsis\ also includes special macros for printing in double columns -and for constructing ruled tables. -It is easy with \TeXsis\ to produce more specialized documents, such -as letters, referee reports, and memoranda, or even a thesis or a book. - -Many physicists are now familiar, at least by name, with another -\TeX-based format, the REVTEX package from the American Physical -Society. -REVTEX is in turn based on a more general format, known as -\LaTeX.\reference{LaTeX} -L. Lamport, -\booktitle{\LaTeX, A Document Preparation System}, -(Addison-Wesley, 1985) -\endreference -\index{latex@{\LaTeX}} -Unfortunately, \LaTeX\ differs from plain \TeX\ in several subtle but -important ways, so that documents created using plain \TeX\ cannot be -used with \LaTeX. -In contrast, \TeXsis\ is functionally a superset of plain TeX, so that -everything described in \TeXbook\ will also work in \TeXsis\ (even -though the internal workings of some of the plain \TeX\ macros have -actually been modified). -This means that \TeXsis\ documents can also make use of just about any -of the many smaller macro packages designed for use with plain \TeX, -or an author can make use of the methods and tricks described in -\TeXbook. -Unfortunately, it also means that REVTEX and \TeXsis\ are mutually -incompatible. - -\bigskip - -This manual explains how to use \TeXsis. -Since it is a user's guide, it makes no attempt to describe how the -various macros work; for that one should consult the source code, -which is extensively commented. -However, we do assume that the reader is already familiar with -\idx{plain} \TeX. -If you don't already know plain \TeX, a good way to learn is to read -and work through the exercises in -\booktitle{A Gentle Introduction to \TeX} by Michael~Doob.\reference{Doob} -M.~Doob, -\booktitle{A Gentle Introduction to \TeX\ (A Manual for Self-Study)}, -(\TeX\ User's Group, Providence). -Also available as a plain \TeX\ file from CTAN or at\n -\URL{ftp://ftp.texsis.org/pub/tex/gentle.tex} -\endreference -The source file for this (called {\tt gentle.tex}) is available on the -\TeXsis\ ftp server, or on CTAN. -You can also start by reading the \TeXbook, paying special attention -to chapters~1-10 and 16-19. -The manual by Spivak\reference{Spivak} -M.~Spivak, -\booktitle{PC\TeX\ User's Guide.} -(Documentation distributed with PC\TeX) -\endreference -which accompanies PC\TeX\ (which is an implementation of \TeX\ for the -IBM~PC) is also recommended. - - -%==================================================* -\subsection{Overview of this Manual} - -The main topics covered in the several sections of this manual -\linkname{page.itemize}{are}:\tag{page.itemize}{\folio} -\itemize \clump -\itm \Sect{intro} -- -An introduction to \TeXsis\ and the philosophy behind the macros, and -instructions on how to begin using \TeXsis. - -\itm \Sect{fonts} -- -Selecting sizes and fonts of type, choosing single, double, or triple -spacing, and automatically handling quotation marks. - -\itm \Sect{eqns} -- -Automatic numbering of equations, automatic sizing of parentheses and -brackets, and special symbols for physics equations. - -\itm \Sect{refs} -- -Defining new references, for which numbers are assigned automatically, -citing references already so defined, and making a list of references. - -\itm \Sect{labels} -- -Labeling things like section numbers, figures, items in an outline, or -page numbers, and referring to them in other parts of the document. - -\itm \Sect{papers} -- -Producing a complete paper, including the title page, chapters, -sections, subsections, and appendices, a table of contents, running -headlines, and an index. -How to use the "master file" concept to split a long document into -several files. - -\itm \Sect{figures} -- -Producing automatically numbered tables and figures and producing -ruled tables. - -\itm \Sect{envmt} -- -Displaying text in special ways using "environments," including those -for centered lines, lists of things, listings of computer programs, and -\TeX\ examples. - -\itm \Sect{fmts} -- -Using specialized layouts for journals and conference proceedings, and -creating new ones. - -\itm \Sect{letr} -- -Typing letters, form letters, memos and referee reports. - -\itm \Sect{dcol} -- -Producing double column output. - -\itm \Sect{misc} -- -Miscellaneous macros for ignoring text and doing various other useful -things, and a checkpoint/restart feature for printing very long documents. - -\enditemize - -Several appendices are also included to deal with more technical -matters. -% -Appendix~A explains how to install \TeXsis\ on Unix computers, on a -VAX/VMS system, and on an IBM~PC. It also explains how to customize -\TeXsis\ for your own installation. Appendix~B lists changes that have -been made to \TeXsis\ in recent revisions. Appendix~C lists the fonts -usually available with \TeXsis. - -Two examples of \TeXsis\ documents are included in the standard -distribution. The first, in the file |Example.tex|, is a short -(3~pages) example of a physics paper typeset with \TeXsis. The second -is this manual itself, which was also created with \TeXsis. If you -would like to look at the files used to create the Manual, the master -file is called |TXSdoc.doc|, and the various sections of the document -are in files with names of the form |TXS|$xxxx$|.doc|. For those who -are comfortable programming in \TeX\ it is possible to extract specific -macros from the \TeXsis\ source code or to modify or even rewrite these -macros. The source code is contained in files with names of the form -|TXS|$xxxx$|.tex|. We have tried wherever possible to include -at least somewhat -illuminating comments in the source code. - -%======================================================================* - -\subsection{Getting Started \label{sect.start}} - - Assuming that \TeXsis\ has been properly installed on your computer, -using \TeXsis\ is as simple as using \TeX\ or \LaTeX. -To run \TeX\ with the \TeXsis\ format to process a manuscript file -called |myfile.tex| you simply give the command: -\index{running@{running \TeXsis}} -\def\HeadText{Getting Started} -\TeXexample -texsis myfile -|endTeXexample -As with any version of \TeX, the output from \TeX\ is put in the file -|myfile.dvi|, which you may view on your computer terminal or print on -a laser printer or other output device. - - Since \TeXsis\ is a superset of plain \TeX, any file that you -process with plain \TeX\ can be processed with \TeXsis, and you will -get the same results. -In particular, plain \TeX\ defaults to 10~pt.\ type and single spacing -between lines, and so does \TeXsis\ unless you initialize its special -features. -But since you are probably using -\TeXsis\ because of these special features, you should begin your -manuscript file with the initialization command -\TeXexample -\texsis -|endTeXexample -\noindent -One of the things this command does is switch the output to 12~pt.\ -type, double spaced, which generally looks better on a small laser -printer. Commands that allow you to change the type size or line -spacing yourself are described in \Sect{fonts}. More -specialized initialization commands may be used in place of (or -in addition to) the |\texsis| command when you are using a -pre-defined document layout. These are described in -\Sect{fmts}. - - Note also that just as in plain \TeX\ there is a difference -between uppercase and lowercase letters in control word names. -Thus if you say \cs{TeXsis} instead of \cs{texsis} you won't -initialize any special features but you will print out -``\TeXsis.'' - - -%==================================================* -\newpage -\subsection{Some Philosophy \label{sect.philosophy}} - -In designing the \TeXsis\ macros we have tried to follow some basic -guidelines which we feel make \TeXsis\ a more useful tool. -It may help you while learning about \TeXsis\ to know what these -guidelines are, especially if you are already familiar with other -\TeX\ macro packages. -However, you can skip this section without missing anything important -to a first time user. - -The guidelines we have followed are: \index{philosophy} - -\itemize -\itm -\TeXsis\ is a superset of plain \TeX, so that anything -you can't do in \TeXsis\ (and even those that you can) can be done -with plain \TeX\ instead. \index{compatibility!with@{with plain \TeX}} -This also means that \TeXsis\ is compatible with most plain -\TeX\ macro packages, such as |epsf.tex| and |index.tex|, or other -specialized macro sets.\Footnote\dag{We cannot completely guarantee this -because other macro packages might define macros with the same names as -used by \TeXsis, although we have taken several steps to prevent this -kind of conflict.} Even if some of the plain macros are actually -redefined in \TeXsis, they are required to still behave as described in -\TeXbook. - -\itm -When a \TeXsis\ macro is similar to a plain \TeX\ macro it should, when -possible, have a similar name and syntax. \index{macros!syntax} Thus -\cs{Footnote} in \TeXsis\ is used exactly like \cs{footnote} in plain -\TeX, and in ruled tables ``|&|'' and ``|\cr|'' can be used exactly as -they are in an |\halign|. - -\itm -Macro names\index{macros!names} will be short and simple, but -descriptive. -Almost all plain \TeX\ macro names are in lower case for ease of -typing, so macros with names containing uppercase letters can -immediately be recognized as being a part of -\TeXsis\ (instead of plain \TeX). As a general rule though we try -to use lowercase for frequently used macro names for ease of typing. - -\itm -There are two different ways in which arguments may be passed to -macros, depending on the length of the argument. -Short arguments are simply enclosed in curly brackets, the way \TeX\ -usually handles macro arguments. -For example, the title of a section is created by the -\cs{section}\index{macros!arguments} command with, -\TeXexample -\section{The nonlinear $\sigma$-model} -|endTeXexample -Longer amounts of text (many lines), and text which is considered to be -in a special environment, is enclosed between commands of the -form ``|\thing|'' and ``|\endthing|.'' An abstract, for example, is -typed as, -\TeXexample -|smalltt\abstract -A mechanism for total confinement of quarks, similar to that -of Schwinger, is defined which requires the existence of -Abelian or non-Abelian gauge fields. It is shown how ... -\endabstract -|endTeXexample -This is similar to the |\begin{thing}| {\ttdots} |\end{thing}| -construction in \LaTeX\ \index{latex@{\LaTeX}} but is slightly easier -to type.\Footnote*{And, more importantly, is compatible with plain -\TeX---|\end| signals the end of a document in plain \TeX, -and shouldn't be used for anything else. However, if you really want -to type |\begin{thing}| and |\end{thing}| you can do so, and \TeXsis\ -will understand it to mean |\thing| and |\endthing|.} -The reason for preferring this way of delimiting text or arguments is -that for very long pieces of material it is much easier to look for -something like |\thing| and |\endthing| than it is to count curly brackets. - -\itm -The fundamental purpose of \TeXsis\ is to typeset printed words and -\hbox{equations} on a physical piece of paper. -In other ``document mark-up'' languages, including SMGL, HTML, and -\LaTeX, the primary goal is to create in the computer an abstract -representation of a document which is independent of the way the -document is printed. -It can be useful to treat a document this way, and so we sometimes use -similar ideas in \TeXsis, but this approach can also conflict with the -goal of typesetting the document the way an author or editor would -choose. -Whenever there is such a conflict we will err on the side of -``typesetting'' rather than on the ``abstract representation'' of the -document. - -\itm -The source code defining the macros should be available to the users, -so that those who want to see how something is done can do so, and -those who want to make their own modifications can do so. -The macro definitions should include sufficient comments that -(usually) someone with only a little bit of experience with \TeX\ can -understand what is going on. -Also, macros which perform similar functions and work together should -be kept in a single file, but separate parts of the whole package -should be kept in separate files. -When possible these individual files should be usable on their own -with plain \TeX. -For example, it is possible to use just the double column macros of -\TeXsis\ by saying |\input TXSdcol.tex|, and the ruled table macros -can be used in plain -\TeX\ by saying |\input TXSruled.tex|. - -\enditemize - - - -\newpage - -% >>> EOF TXSintro.doc <<< diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSletr.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSletr.doc deleted file mode 100644 index 4451a3c304b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSletr.doc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,588 +0,0 @@ -%% file: TXSletr.doc - Letters and Memos - TeXsis 2.18 -%% @(#) $Id: TXSletr.doc,v 18.3 2000/06/01 21:54:30 myers Exp $ -%======================================================================* -% (C) Copyright 1989, 1992, 1994, 1997 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige -% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications -% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL). -% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL -%======================================================================* -\ifx\undefined\bs \texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\input Manual.aux\draft\fi - - -\section{Letters, Memos and Referee Reports \label{sect.letr}} - - The commands \CS{letter}, \cs{memo}, \cs{referee} and -\cs{formLetters} invoke special styles for producing letters or -memos. -The letter formats follow closely the letter format given in -Appendix~E of \TeXbook, although there are some differences and some -additions. -\index{letters} - - -\subsection{Letters} - - \CS{letter} is designed for typing basic business-style letters -on letterhead stationary. It uses the following commands: -\description{~closing\qquad}\clump - -\itm{\CS{letter}} -Initialize the letter format. - -\itm{\CS{dated}\arg{date}} -Sets the current date to be \meta{date} rather than today's date. -This redefines \cs{today} to be the date you give. If omitted, -\cs{today} just gives the current date. - -\itm{\CS{withEnvelope}} -Signals that an envelope should also be printed. -See Section~\use{sect.env} to find out how this works. - -\itm{\CS{letterhead}\arg{phone-ext}} -Puts the date and phone number \<phone-ext> at the top of the page, so -that it will appear near the letterhead when the letter is printed on -your institutional stationary. - -\itm{\CS{address}} -The name and address of the recipient should follow, in \cs{obeylines} -format. The first line is used as the name of the addressee in a running -headline for pages after the first. - -\itm{\CS{body}} -Begins the body of the letter. The line immediately below this should -be the opening salutation, (e.g. ``Dear Ann Landers,''). - -\itm{\CS{closing}} -Begins the closing material, in \cs{obeylines} format. The first line -following is the closing salutation (e.g. "Sincerely Yours,") and the -second is the sender's name. When the letter is printed, room is left -for a signature. Optional additional lines can be added after the name -for the sender's title, or similar information. - -\itm{\CS{annotations}} -Optional annotations follow, in \cs{obeylines} format. - -\itm{\CS{cc}} -Carbon copy. A "cc:" and the names following are printed, -properly aligned. - -\itm{\CS{Encl}} -Enclosure. This is like \CS{cc} but "Encl:" is printed -for a list of enclosures. - -\itm{\CS{ps}} -Optional postscript follows. This is not in \cs{obeylines} format. - -\itm{\CS{endletter}\qquad} -Ends the letter. You can say \cs{bye} instead. -\enddescription - -The \CS{letter} document format automatically sets up a running headline -for all pages after the first, containing the addressee's name (taken -from the first line following \cs{address}), the date, and the page -number. If you wish, you can turn off these running headlines by saying -\cs{nopagenumbers}. If you want to change the name of the addressee you -can simply redefine the macro called \CS{addressee} anytime after -\cs{address} has been used (using \cs{gdef}, so that the re-definition -exists outside of the group used to enclose the address). Or, if you -don't want the person's name used at all, simply redefine \CS{addressee} -to be empty, like so: |\gdef\addressee{}|. - -\bigskip - - The use of some of these macros is illustrated by the following -example: -\TeXexample -\texsis -\letter -\dated{1 April 1999} -\letterhead{7734} -\address -Prof.~D. Knuth -Stanford University -Stanford, CA~94305 -\gdef\addressee{Knuth, the \TeX\ God} -\body -Dear Prof.~Knuth: - - We enclose the documentation and source code for a \TeX\ -macro package which we have developed for physics papers. - -\closing -Sincerely yours, -Eric Myers -Frank E.~Paige -\ps This stuff is also available by anonymous ftp. -\endletter -|endTeXexample - -By default the closing material is indented about 3.5 inches. -The actual amount is set by \CS{longindent}, which you can change. -You should put the change on the same line as the \CS{closing}, -like so:\index{letters!adjusting size} -\TeXexample -\closing\longindent=0pt -Sincerely yours, -Joe User -|endTeXexample -\noindent -This example puts the closing material flush with the left margin. You -should not put \CS{longindent}|=0pt| on the line following, because -\CS{closing} uses that line as the closing salutation (like -``Sincerely,''). - -The default ``letterhead'' created by \CS{letterhead} is pretty plain -- -it just puts the date and phone number at the top of the page. The -idea is that you can put your own office letterhead stationary in the -printer and when you print the letter on this paper the date and phone -number will be in an appropriate position.\Footnote*{If you can't put -stationary in your printer you can copy it onto stationary with a -copying machine.} -Alternatively, you can create a different letterhead macro to actually -print a letterhead at the top of the page. The physics department at -Excited State University could have a custom |\ESUletterhead| macro -which prints their logo and letterhead (it should still take a phone -number as an argument, to make it easier to switch between -|\ESUletterhead| and |\letterhead|.) These kind of custom macro -definitions should be put in a local site file, as described in -Appendix~\use{install}. - - If a letter is somewhat too short or too long to fit on a page, -its length can be adjusted indirectly by changing the width of the text. -To do this insert \CS{letterwidth}\arg{width} immediately after -\cs{letter} to set the width of the text. -Not only does this change the \cs{hsize} to the size you specify, but it -also adjusts the margins and centers the text appropriately (so it is -preferable to simply changing the \cs{hsize}). - -\bigskip - -A simple Unix shell script called \idx{{\tt letr}} is included with -the current \TeXsis\ distribution to make it easier to compose -letters. -Saying -\TeXexample -letr -m Hutu |endTeXexample will create a template file |Hutu.tex|, if -there is not already a file by that name, and then start you editing -the file. -It then automatically runs your file through \TeXsis, and the envelope -file too if it exists (see the next section). -The |-m| flag, which is optional, should tell your printer to go into -``manual feed'' mode to wait for you to feed in your own stationary. -(Manual feed mode is always selected for an envelope printed by |letr|.) - - Keep in mind that this only works on Unix and the script -has to be executable and exist in your ``path''. Ask a local wizard -for help if you don't know what this means. - - -%======================================================================* - -\subsection{Envelopes \label{sect.env}} - -Many laser printers can print on envelopes, as long as you arrange to -put the address and return address in the right place, and print the -material in ``landscape'' mode (turned 90\degree\ on the page). -The simplest way to do this is to simply say \CS{withEnvelope} at the -beginning of your file, after the \cs{letter}. -When you run your letter through \TeXsis, it will then create a file -with the same name but an extension of |.env|, which contains the -commands to print the envelope. -Run {\sl that} file through \TeXsis\ and print the output in landscape -mode and you will get your envelope. -If you are using |dvips| the appropriate command is -\example -|dvips -m -t landscape myfile.dvi| -\endexample -The ``|-t landscape|'' rotates the output, while the ``|-m|'' puts the -printer in manual feed mode so that you can feed in the envelope. - -You will have to figure out how your printer wants the envelopes to be -fed to it. -Some take the envelope down the middle, while others want it over to -one side or another. -You can adjust for different envelope sizes, or shift the position of -the printing over a bit to make it easier to feed in the envelope, by -changing the parameters \CS{EnvlWidth}, \CS{EnvlHeight}, and -\CS{ENvlVoffset}. The default values are -\TeXexample -\newdimen\EnvlWidth \EnvlWidth=24cm -\newdimen\EnvlHeight \EnvlHeight=10.5cm -\newdimen\EnvlVoffset \EnvlVoffset=1.25in -|endTeXexample - -The actual printing of the envelope is done by the macro -\CS{MakeEnvelope}, which takes two arguments. -The first is the address, while the second is the return address. -Line endings in either are respected, or you can use \cs{n} to cause a -line break. - -Saying \CS{withEnvelope} simply causes a \CS{MakeEnvelope} command to -be written to the |.env| file when you say \cs{endletter} or \cs{bye}. -You can edit that file before your run it through \TeXsis\ if you -don't like the form of the address or return address. -Alternatively, \CS{withEnvelope} will use the two macros -\CS{theSignature} and \CS{ReturnAddress} to construct the return -address. -The default value for \CS{theSignature} is taken to be the name -appearing after the closing salutation, below \cs{closing}. -If you want to change it to something else you should include a new -definition {\em after} the \cs{closing}, using |\gdef|. -For example, -\TeXexample -\closing -Sincerely yours, -Joe User -\gdef\theSignature{Joe's Mamma} -|endTeXexample -This would use ``Joe's Mamma'' as the name on the return address, -even though ``Joe User'' would appear in the closing of the letter. - - - -%======================================================================* -\pagecheck{0.5\vsize} - -\subsection{Memos \label{sect.memo}} - - Saying \CS{memo} sets up a special format for memoranda, -including a header at the top of the page with the name of your -organization and the word "MEMORANDUM". The organization name defaults -to \cs{ORGANIZATION}, which you can change if you like simply by -saying \index{memos} -\example -|\def|\cs{ORGANIZATION}\arg{name} -\endexample -(This can be done once in the file |TXSsite.tex| before compiling -\TeXsis, as described in -Appendix~\use{install},\index{memos!customization} or you can explicitly -put the name of your organization in your file.) The commands for the -memo format are: -\description{Xendmemo\quad}\clump -% -\itm{\CS{memo}} -Initialize \TeXsis\ for memo format. -% -\itm{\CS{faxmemo}} -A document format similar to \CS{memo}, but for faxes. -Included in the header is a space to enter the number of pages sent. -A return fax number is also included if it is defined in -\CS{FaxNumber}. -% -\itm{\CS{Date}} -Prints the word "{\twelvess Date:}" and the date, which must be on the -same line. If no date is given, then the current date is used, as given -by \cs{today}. If you would rather have the date in the upper right hand -corner, as in a letter, use |\letterdate| instead of \CS{Date}. -% -\itm{\CS{To}} -Prints the word "{\twelvess To:}" and the name(s) which follow. -% -\itm{\CS{From}} -Prints the word "{\twelvess From:}" and the name(s) which follow -%. -\itm{\CS{Subj}} -Prints the word "{\twelvess Subject:}" and the subject which -follows. The subject may be several lines long. The first line -of the subject field is used in a running headline at the top of -all pages following the first. -% -\itm{\CS{FAX}} -Prints ``{\twelvess FAX \#:},'' for entering a fax telephone number. -% -\itm{\cs{n}} -New line for |\To|, |\From|, or |\Subj|. -% -\itm{\CS{nopagenumbers}} -Turns off the running subject headlines and the page numbers. -This must be typed after |\memo| since it is redefined by the -memo format. -% -\itm{\CS{Text}} -Begins the text of the memo. You can also say \cs{body}. -% -\itm{\CS{annotations}\qquad} -Optional annotations follow, in \cs{obeylines} format. -% -\itm{\CS{cc}} -Carbon copy. A "cc:" and the names following it are printed, -properly aligned in \cs{obeylines} format. -% -\itm{\CS{Distribution}\qquad} -This is like \CS{cc} but prints "Distribution:" instead. -% -\itm{\CS{Encl}} -This is like \CS{cc} but prints "Encl:" instead, as for letters. -% -\itm{\CS{ps}} -Optional postscript follows. This is not in \cs{obeylines} format. -% -\itm{\CS{endmemo}} -Ends the memo. You can say \cs{bye} instead. -\enddescription - - All of these commands with mixed case names have synonyms which are -the same name but in all lower case letters. The use of the \cs{memo} -format is illustrated by the following example: -\TeXexample -|smalltt\memo -\To \TeXsis\ Users -\From E. Myers and F.E. Paige -\Date -\Subj \TeXsis\ 2.18 -\text - \TeXsis\ 2.18 is now available. The new version adds -several features and corrects various bugs. -\Distribution -A. Blake -I. Harrity -B. Nichols -\endmemo -|endTeXexample - -If the memo is longer than one page a headline containing the subject -and page number is put across the top of all pages after the first. If -the subject is longer than one line only the first line of the subject -is used in this headline. You can easily change what is used as this -subject line by changing the definition of the macro \CS{subjectline} -anywhere in the body of the memo. For example, although the subject of -your memo might be simply ``Annual Report,'' you might make the headline -more specific by defining: -\TeXexample -\def\subjectline{Annual Activity Report for Buckaroo Banzai} -|endTeXexample -\nobreak\noindent -Then this longer title will appear with the page number on all pages -after -the first. - - -%======================================================================* -\subsection{Referee Reports} - - The \CS{referee} format creates a document very much like a -\cs{memo}, although there are some important differences. -\index{referee reports} -Referee reports are supposed to be confidential, so instead of -printing the name of your organization at the top of the first -page it puts the words ``Referee Report.'' In the -\CS{referee} format you can use the same commands that are used in -the \cs{memo} format, such as |\To| and |\Date|, but if you use -\cs{From} a warning message will be printed on your screen. (This -is only a warning, it still does what it has been asked to do!) - -\bottomfigure{Referee} -\begingroup -\def\resetcounters{\relax} % don't globally change the section number -\line{\hfil -\tightboxit{\hbox{\vbox to 11cm{\leftskip=1cm -\referee\ninepoint\hsize=8.5cm\rightskip=1cm -\centerline{{\twelvepoint\bf Referee Report}} -\bigskip -\memoitem{DATE:} 1 April 2001 -\memoitem{TITLE:} \TeXsis\ -- \TeX\ Macros for Physicists -\memoitem{AUTHORS:} E.~Myers and F.E.~Paige -\memoitem{MANUSCRIPT:} LP-3105 -\text -This is pretty good, but it's too long -for Physical Review Letters. -\vfill}}} -\hfil} -\endgroup -\caption{Sample Referee Report} -\endfigure - - - There are also some additional commands for the referee -report format: -\description{~authors\qquad}\clump -% -\itm{\cs{title}} -The title of the paper being reviewed should follow this on the -same line. This is similar to |\Subj| in the memo format. -% -\itm{\cs{author}} -Prints ``{\twelvess AUTHOR:}'' and the name that follows on the -same line. -% -\itm{\cs{authors}} -Same as \cs{author} for a paper with more than one author. -% -\itm{\CS{MSref}} -Prints ``{\twelvess MANUSCRIPT:}'' and the manuscript reference number -which follows. -\enddescription - - The text of the report should begin with \cs{text} or -\cs{body}, just as for a memo, and the whole document should end -with |\endmemo| or \cs{bye}. An example of the referee report -format is given by the following: -\TeXexample -\referee -\date 1 April 1999 -\title \TeXsis\ -- \TeX\ Macros for Physicists -\authors E.~Myers and F.E.~Paige -\MSref LP-3105 -\text -This is pretty good, but it's too long -for Physical Review Letters. -\bye -|endTeXexample -This produces a report which looks something like \Fig{Referee} - - - -%======================================================================* -\subsection{Form Letters \label{sect.form}} - - The \CS{formLetters} layout makes it simple to send -identical or similar letters to a list of people. -\index{form letters}\index{letters|see{form letters}} -\index{mail merge|see{form letters}} -The body of the form letter is stored in one file using the standard -\TeXsis\ letter format, while the control commands and a list of -addresses are put in a second file. The body of the letter should begin -with \cs{body} and end with \cs{endletter}, and it can contain an -arbitrary number of control sequences defined for each recipient. It -can make use of all the features of the letter format. For example, -the letter body might contain the following - -\TeXexample -|smalltt\body -Dear \Whoever: - -\if P\Job - I wish to apply for a postdoctoral position -\else\if F\Job - I wish to apply for a faculty position -\else - I wish to apply for a postdoctoral or faculty position -\fi\fi -at your institution. Enclosed you will find my curriculum vitae, -a list of publications, and ... - -\closing -Sincerely yours, -Joe Postdoc -\Encl -Publication list -Curriculum vita -\endletter % don't say \bye here! -|endTeXexample -This example addresses the letter to |\Whoever|, and it uses the -first text if |\Job| is |P|, the second if |\Job| is |F|, and the -third otherwise. Thus form letters are very flexible. - - The mailing list file initializes the form letter macros and -contains the list of addresses. \TeXsis\ should be run on this file, not -on the file containing the body of the letter! For the example above it -would have the form: -\TeXexample|smalltt -\texsis -\formLetters{\letterhead{7734}}{letterbody.tex} - -\BL Prof.\ John Doe - Department of Physics - University of Nowhere - Nowhere, OK 73019 USA - \V\Whoever{Professor Doe} - \V\Job{F}\EL - -\BL Dr.\ Buckaroo Banzai - Physics Department - The Banzai Institute - Grovers Mill, NJ 08544 - \V\Whoever{Dr.\ Banzai} - \V\Job{P}\EL -... -\endform -\bye -|endTeXexample -\noindent - - The first argument of \cs{formLetters} is something like the usual -\cs{letterhead} macro, with your phone number. Depending on your -letterhead this might have multiple parameters or might even be several -control sequences (all enclosed in a set of curly braces, of course). -The second argument to \cs{formLetters} is the name of the file -containing the body of the letter. The idea is that the stuff in the -first argument gets put into the letter {\it before} the address, while -the body of the letter (read from the file) is what goes after the -address. Each letter begins with \CS{BL} ("Begin Letter") and has the -name of the addressee on the same line and the address on the following -lines. Any ``variables'' used in the letter can be defined using -\cs{V}, which is just an abbreviation for \cs{gdef}. Because \cs{V} is -simply \cs{gdef}, if you omit \cs{V} from an address entry, the value -defined in a previous entry will be used. If necessary, variables can -also be defined before the \CS{BL}. Each address in the mailing list is -ended by \CS{EL} ("End Letter"). When the \CS{EL} is executed it reads -in the file containing the text for the letter and actually produces the -letter. - - Any address in the list can be ignored simply by replacing the -\CS{BL} with \CS{IL} ("Ignore Letter"). In particular, this can be done -by a simple global edit after each batch of letters is made, and the -same file can then be used to send a second mailing by changing \CS{IL} -back to \CS{BL} for a select subset of addresses. - -In earlier versions of \TeXsis\ the -\cs{formLetters} command was called \cs{formletters}. -The first is now prefered, though the second will also be accepted. -Also, as of \TeXsis\ version 2.17 the form letter macros have actually -been moved to the style file {\tt Formletr.txs}. -This style file is \cs{autoload}'ed, so as long as you have that file -on your system you should not notice a difference. - - -\bigskip -\nosechead{Mailing Labels} - - The same address file can be used to produce mailing labels -instead of letters simply by replacing |\formLetters{...}{...}| with -\CS{formLabels}. It is assumed that there are three columns of names and -addresses to fit on standard photocopy machine mailing labels. With the -default parameters nine labels each 1~in.\ high are printed per column -with the top and bottom rows left blank. This can be changed, and the -alignment of the labels can be adjusted, by setting appropriate values -for the following dimensions: -\TeXexample -|smalltt -\fullHsize=8.500in % hsize for label page -\fullVsize=9.999in % vsize for label page -\lblHsize=2.833in % width of standard label -\lblVsize=1.000in % height of standard label -\lblVoffset=0.100in % vertical starting position -\lblHoffset=-0.500in % horizontal starting position -|endTeXexample -Choosing appropriate values may require some experimentation with your -printer and labels. When the correct values are found, they can be -set in the file |TXSsite.tex| before compiling the format (see Appendix~A). - - Please note that earlier versions of \TeXsis\ used -\cs{formlabels} rather than \CS{formLabels}, but the latter is now -prefered. - -\bigskip -\nosechead{Printing Envelopes} - - Instead of printing mailing labels and then peeling these off to -put them on envelopes, it is possible to print addresses from your -mailing list directly onto envelopes, if your printer is capable of -feeding envelopes. To do this, simply use \CS{formEnvelopes} in place -of \CS{formLabels}. Then each address is simply fed into a -\cs{MakeEnvelope} command. -To set the return name and address you can define \cs{theSigature} -and \CS{ReturnAddress}, as in this example: -\TeXexample -\texsis -\def\theSignature{Joe Rockhead} -\def\ReturnAddress{Department of Physics\n - University of Delphi\n - Oracle, UT 65432} -\formEnvelopes -|endTeXexample -You will probably have to print the output in ``landscape'' mode, -and you may want to adjust the size or placement of the envelopes, -as described in Section~\use{sect.env}. - -%>>> EOF TXSletr.doc <<< diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSmisc.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSmisc.doc deleted file mode 100644 index 399be609773..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSmisc.doc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,298 +0,0 @@ -%% file: TXSmisc.doc - Miscellaneious Macros - TeXsis version 2.18 -%% @(#) $Id: TXSmisc.doc,v 18.2 2000/05/17 00:19:46 myers Exp $ -%======================================================================* -% (C) Copyright 1992 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige -% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications -% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL). -% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL -%======================================================================* -\ifx\undefined\bs \texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\input Manual.aux\draft\fi - -\section{Miscellaneous Macros \label{sect.misc}} - -There are a number of useful macros in \TeXsis\ which don't fit into any -of the topics covered in previous sections but which still deserve some -discussion. We will simply lump them all together in this final -section. - -\subsection{{\tt\string\draft} mode} - -Saying \CS{draft} turns on a number of features which are useful for -making a draft copy of a document. The disclaimer ``{\tt Preliminary -Draft}'' is added to the bottom of each page of the document, along with -the page number and a time and date stamp. The page number will let you -keep track of the page order even when using a document format which -does not print page numbers (such as the \cs{nuclproc} or -\cs{NorthHollandTwo} camera-ready formats). The date/time stamp -can help you tell later drafts from earlier versions of the same -document. \CS{draft} sets \cs{eqnotracetrue} so that equations -are marked with their internal labels in the right margin next to -the equation number (as described in Section~\use{sect.eqns}). -Other kinds of errors, such as trying to use undefined labels for citations -equations, are also marked in the right-hand margin. \CS{draft} also -sets \cs{overfullrule}|=1em| so that over full \cs{hbox}es are marked -with a black box. -Without \CS{draft}, initializing \TeXsis\ with \cs{texsis} sets -\cs{overfullrule}|=0pt| so that over-full hboxes don't -get these kinds of marks (while with plain \TeX\ you do get these -marks). - -\bigskip -%======================================================================* -\subsection{Ignoring blocks of text} - -Sometimes you'd really like to take out a whole paragraph or an even -larger section of a document, but only temporarily, and you don't want -to actually delete it from the manuscript file. Recalling that in -\TeX\ everything on a line following the comment character ``{\tt\%}'' is -discarded, you could put a {\tt\%} on each line to be ignored, -but that could be a lot of work. Instead, you can use \CS{comment}. -The syntax is: -\TeXexample -\comment/* anything in here is ignored */ -|endTeXexample -\noindent -Everything between the |/*| and the |*/| is completely ignored. By -removing the |\comment/*| and the |*/| the text can easily be restored -to its previous state. You can include several paragraphs of text in -the material to be ignored, or even several pages, but with one -important restriction: All the curly brackets |{| and |}| must match in -the text to be ignored. If there is a |{| with no closing |}| in the -commented text then \TeX\ will skip the |*/| while searching for the -closing |}|! - -Along the same lines is \CS{Ignore}, which will ignore everything -following it up to \cs{endIgnore} (with the same restrictions above -about matching grouping brackets). The useful thing about these is that -if an \cs{endIgnore} is encountered before an \CS{Ignore} then the -\cs{endIgnore} is simply ignored. Is that too confusing? What this means -is that if you have a document with a large block of conditional text -that you may or may not want included you can choose to include the text -by simply removing (or commenting out) the \CS{Ignore}. If the block of -conditional text looks like -\smallskip\goodbreak -\def\1{\meta{unconditional text}}\def\2{\meta{more unconditional text}} -\TeXexample -|1 -\Ignore -Having obtained these eigenvalues we would like to -know their degeneracies. For a given $l$ the ... -... -It is relatively easy to show that the number of -independent components of such a tensor is ${N+l \choose l}$. -\endIgnore -|2 -|endTeXexample -\noindent -then even if the block of text to be ignored spans many pages it can be -restored simply by changing the ``|\Ignore|'' to ``|%\Ignore|.'' Then -the |\Ignore| is itself ignored, and when \TeX\ reaches the |\endIgnore| -this also does nothing. The effect is the same as if these two commands -were completely removed from the manuscript file, but it is easily -reversed. - -Why are there two ways to ignore blocks of text? \cs{comment} was -created first, and some programmer-types may prefer it because of the -similarity it bears to comments in the C programming language. -\cs{Ignore} is newer and probably a little more useful, but \cs{comment} -will remain for those who want to use it. - -%======================================================================* -\subsection{Checkpoint/Restart \label{sect.chkpt}} - - The checkpoint/restart feature allows long documents to be printed in -pieces. You can, for example, process and print the first chapter of a -thesis (or a book) and then later do the same for following chapters. -Saying \CS{checkpoint}|{NAME}| saves the settings of important counters -like the current page number and the last equation number in a file -called |NAME.chk|. Saying \CS{restart}|{NAME}| reads in this file and -resets the counters to their previous values. -\index{checkpoint}\index{restart}\index{restore|see{restart}} - - As an example consider a document with two major chapters. -Using a Master File you would first process the first chapters -with the following: -\TeXexample -\thesis -\input chap1 -\checkpoint{chap1} -\bye -|endTeXexample -With this printed you could resume at the next page number with -the correct subsequent numbers for equations, figures and tables -by saying: -\TeXexample -\thesis -\restart{chap1} -\input chap2 -\bye -|endTeXexample -\noindent -Normally |\checkpoint| and |\restart| are silent, -but you can say \CS{endstat} to see the values of the counters -saved by |\checkpoint|. The output looks like this: -\TeXexample -% Last PAGE number IS 63. -% Last CHAPTER number IS 0. -% Last EQUATION number IS 47. -% Last FIGURE number IS 1. -% Last REFERENCE number IS 9. -% Last SECTION number IS 13. -% Last TABLE number IS 0. -|endTeXexample - -Modern laser printer drivers or filter programs like |dvips|, |dvi2ps|, -or QTeX have -options that let you select which pages of a document are printed, -or there is a useful program called |dviselect|, which can select -certain pages out of a dvi file into a smaller dvi file. These offer -other ways to selectively print only part of a document -and still get the page and equation numbers correct. - -%======================================================================* -\subsection{Other Goodies...} - -These macros do various useful things: -\singlelinetrue % make label overhang -\description{unobeyspaces}\clump % - - -\itm{\CS{jtem}\arg{label}\arg{dimen}} -Similar to plain \TeX's |\item|, but sets the label \arg{label} with a -variable hanging indentation \arg{dimen}. - -\itm{\CS{leftpar}\arg{text}} -Turns the \meta{text} into a paragraph with a ragged {\sl left} margin. - -\itm{\CS{pagecheck}\arg{dimen}} -Checks the amount of space remaining on the current page, and if this is -less then \meta{dimen} then skips to a new page. - -\itm{\CS{topspace}} -Use this like \cs{vskip} to create a blank space to the top of a page -(because any space inserted with \cs{vskip} is thrown out if it appears -at the top of a page). Example: |\topspace 2.54cm|. - -\itm{\CS{unobeylines}} -The opposite of \cs{obeylines}, so line endings are no longer respected. - -\itm{\CS{unobeyspaces}} -The opposite of \cs{obeyspaces}, so that spaces in the manuscript file -are not counted exactly. - -\enddescription - -%----------------------------------------% -\pagecheck{3cm} - -\subsubsection{Underlines} - -These macros let you underline words or create a ``blank'' line: -\index{underlines} - -\description{unobeyspaces}\clump % - -\itm{\CS{undertext}\arg{text}} -Underlines the \meta{text}, as in this \undertext{example}. This is -generally okay for words but not phrases or sentences. - -\itm{\CS{theBlank}\arg{length}} -Creates an underline of the specified length where one can ``fill in the -blank.'' For example, saying `` |Name: \theBlank{6cm}| produces: -``\hbox{Name:~\theBlank{6cm}}''. - -\enddescription - -%----------------------------------------% -\subsubsection{Boxes} - -These macros let you put boxes around text or equations, or -something similar: -\index{boxes} - -\description{unobeyspaces}\clump % - -\itm{\CS{tightbox}\arg{box}} -Puts a ruled box around the argument (which must be a box), with no -intervening space. -Example: |\tightbox{\hbox{Boo}}| produces ``\tightbox{\hbox{Boo}}'', - - -\itm{\CS{loosebox}\arg{box}} -Puts a ``loose'' box around the \meta{box}, with about one \cs{jot} of -space between the edge of the \meta{box} and the enclosing box. What you -do with this resulting box is up to you. Rules are {\sl not\/} put -around this outer box, but you can enclose it in a \CS{tightbox} to do -so, as in |\tightbox{\loosebox{Boo}}|, which gives -``\tightbox{\loosebox{Boo}}.'' If you want the contents of this box to -match the baseline of the current line, lower it by a \cs{jot}, as in -|\lower\jot\tightbox{\loosebox{Boo}}|, which gives -``\lower\jot\tightbox{\loosebox{Boo}}''. - - -\itm{\CS{spine}\arg{text}} -Creates a label enclosed in a ruled box, suitable for the spine of a -3-ring binder. The box will be at least 15~cm long, but will extend if -the text requires more space. The default type size is 24~pt, but can -be changed in the \meta{text}. If the label is longer than the width of -a page then it should be printed in landscape mode. Instructions for -installing the label in the spine of a binder are printed (but only once). - -\pagecheck{5\baselineskip} - -\itm{\CS{eqnbox}\arg{math-expr}} -Puts a box around the mathematical expression \meta{math-expr}. -This can be useful for highlighting an important result. -You can use this in any kind of math -mode, but usually you will want to use it in a displayed equation, -like so: -\TeXexample -$$ -\eqnbox{E=mc^2} -\EQN 47$$ -|endTeXexample -which produces: -$$ -\eqnbox{E=mc^2} -\EQN 47$$ -In an in-line math expression it appears like so: \eqnbox{E=mc^2}.\n -Be careful not to over-use this, or its utility is lost! - -\itm{\CS{eqnmark}} -Putting a box around an equation can be to distracting, but it is nice -to have a way to mark ``important'' results. This is an alternative -to \CS{eqnbox}. Simply put \CS{eqnmark} at the beginning of the -displayed equation, immediately after the |$$|, and it will put a marker -defined by \CS{eqnmarker} at the left edge of the equation (the default -is ``$\eqnmarker$''). -For example, typing -\TeXexample -$$\eqnmark -E=mc^2 -\EQN 47$$ -|endTeXexample -\noindent -produces -$$\eqnmark -E=mc^2 -\EQN 47$$ -Note that \CS{eqnmark} does not work with \cs{eqalignno} or \cs{EQNalign} -(which is just as well, so that you can't overuse it). - -\enddescription - -%==================================================* - -\subsubsection{Read the Code} - -There are a number of other macros in \TeXsis\ which are not -described in this manual, either because (a) we didn't have time -to describe everything, or (b) they are works in progress. -In either case, if you are familiar enough with \TeX\ to write -some simple macros for yourself, then you are familar enough to -read through the code and find other useful goodies, or learn some new -tricks. Just keep in mind that anything not described in the manual -may be subject to change in a future release. And let us know if you -find any mistakes. - -%>>> EOF TXSmisc.doc <<< diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSprns.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSprns.doc deleted file mode 100644 index 03f734edea7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSprns.doc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,95 +0,0 @@ -%% file: TXSprns.doc - Parentheses Sizing - TeXsis version 2.18 -%% @(#) $Id: TXSprns.doc,v 18.2 2000/05/17 00:19:46 myers Exp $ -%======================================================================* -% (C) Copyright 1989, 1992 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige -% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications -% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL). -% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL -%======================================================================* -\ifx\undefined\meta \texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\draft\fi - - -\subsection{Automatic Parentheses Sizing \label{sect.paren}}% -Plain \TeX\ provides automatic adjustment of the sizes of parentheses -and other delimiters when you use \cs{left} and \cs{right}, as in -\index{parentheses!sizes} -\example -|$$| -\cs{left}|(| \meta{math material } \cs{right}|)| -|$$| -\endexample -\TeXsis\ provides similar automatic sizing of parentheses and square -brackets in displayed equations without the need of typing \cs{left} and -\cs{right}. You must still use \cs{left} and \cs{right} for all other -delimiters, and they can be used for parentheses and square brackets if -desired. This feature is turned on and off with \CS{autoparens} and -\cs{offparens} respectively; the default, once you say \cs{texsis}, is -\CS{autoparens}. Thus, for example, -\TeXexample -|smalltt\autoparens - $$ -( a \over b ) - $$ -|endTeXexample -produces -\autoparens - $$ -( a \over b ) - $$ -whereas -\TeXexample -|smalltt\offparens - $$ -( a \over b ) - $$ -|endTeXexample -\goodbreak\noindent -produces -\offparens - $$ -( a \over b ) - $$ -\autoparens -which is not what one normally desires. - - The automatic sizing of parentheses works by making |)|, |(|, |]|, -and |[| active characters in displayed equations and defining them to be -macros which use \cs{left} and \cs{right} to size the parentheses. While -this normally works properly and simplifies the typing of equations, it -will fail if the \cs{left} and \cs{right} operators are not properly -balanced, such as when a long equation is split between two or more -lines with \cs{eqalign} or \cs{EQNalign}. Almost all such problems can be -solved by using the control sequences \cs{lparen}, \cs{rparen}, \cs{lbrack}, -and \cs{rbrack}, which are taken from Plain \TeX\ and which give just the -standard parenthesis and bracket characters. For example, -$$ -\EQNalign{ -F &= \Biggl\lbrack (a \over b) + (c \over d) \cr -&\qquad + (e \over f) + (g \over h) \Biggr\rbrack \cr} -$$ -can be produced with -\TeXexample -$$ -\EQNalign{ -F &= \Biggl\lbrack (a \over b) + (c \over d) \cr -&\quad + (e \over f) + (g \over h) \Biggr\rbrack \cr} -$$ -|endTeXexample -\noindent -Note that in this example the parentheses are balanced on one line and -so can be sized automatically, while the brackets span two lines and so -must be sized ``by hand.'' The \cs{vbig} macro described in the next section -provides additional flexibility for sizing. - - If all else fails, you can use \cs{offparens} to turn off the -automatic sizing of parentheses and put in \cs{left} and \cs{right} or -explicit sizes yourself. In any case, you must put \cs{left} and -\cs{right}, if needed, in in-line equations (math expressions which are -not displayed equations), because. \CS{autoparens} only applies to -displayed equations, not in-line math text.\Footnote\dag{Previous -versions of \TeXsis\ used the control sequence \cs{onparens} to provide -automatic parentheses sizing in {\it all} math-mode expressions. While -you can still use this, we do not encourage it since it may cause -problems with other uses of these characters.} - -%>>> EOF TXSprns.doc <<< diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSrefs.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSrefs.doc deleted file mode 100644 index 5d3f5c46449..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSrefs.doc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,474 +0,0 @@ -%% file: TXSrefs.doc - References and Citations - TeXsis version 2.18 -%% @(#) $Id: TXSrefs.doc,v 18.5 2000/05/17 00:19:46 myers Exp $ -%======================================================================* -% (C) Copyright 1989, 1992, 1999 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige. -% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications -% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL). -% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL -%======================================================================* -\ifx\undefined\meta\texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\input Manual.aux\draft\fi - - -\section{References and Citations \label{sect.refs}} - - \TeXsis\ includes instructions for making citations to the -literature in the text of a document. -References are processed in the standard format used by many American -physics journals: they are automatically assigned consecutive numbers -as they appear in the text and are listed in numerical order at the -end of the document. -In the text a citation appears as a superscript number corresponding -to the reference cited, though other methods of citation are possible -(see Section~\use{sect.cite}). -When each reference is defined it is given a \idx{label}, which is -associated with the number assigned to the reference. -Subsequent citations to the same reference are made using this label, -so there is no need to know the particular number assigned to the -reference. Indeed, the number may change as the document goes through -editing and revision, \index{references}\index{citations|see{references}} -but the references will still automatically be in the correct order. - - -\subsection{Entering References} - - \TeXsis\ is flexible enough that the text of the references may be -entered in two different ways, either all references at once at the -beginning of the document or each one individually at the point in the -text where the work is first cited. -In either case, \TeXsis\ stores the text of all of the references in -numerical order until it is asked to print the list at the end of the -document, by saying \cs{ListReferences}. - - To make a citation to a new reference and to enter the text of the -reference, use the command \CS{reference}\arg{label}, where -\meta{label} is the label to be used to refer to this reference. -This is followed by the text of the reference, which is terminated by -\cs{endreference}. An example is: -\TeXexample -To this end we will follow Feynman\reference{Feynman, 1949} -R.P.~Feynman, Phys.\ Rev.\ \vol{76}, 749 (1949) -\endreference -in developing the propagator approach. -|endTeXexample -\noindent -This would appear in the text of the document as, -\example -To this end we will follow Feynman\reference{Feynman, 1949} -R.P.~Feynman, Phys.\ Rev.\ \vol{76}, 749 (1949) -\endreference -in developing the propagator approach. -\endexample -and the text of the reference would be saved until the list of -references is printed at the end of the document. -If you look at the end of this manual you will see it. - - There are several things to take note of in the example above. Most -importantly, there is no space between the word in the text where the -citation is made ("Feynman")\index{Feynman, Richard P.} -and the \CS{reference}. This is so the -superscript reference number will appear in the text right after the -word to which the citation is attached, with no intervening space. Note -also in the reference text the tie (|~|) between the initials and the -name, the control spaces (\hbox{\tt\bs\ }) after the abbreviations, and -the use of the \CS{vol} macro for the volume number; -\CS{vol}\arg{number} prints the volume \meta{number} with an underscore -below it. -(This is easier to read than boldfaced volume numbers on small laser -printers, but if you prefer something else you can simply redefine the -\CS{vol} macro). -Similarly, \CS{booktitle}\arg{title} will print the title of a book, -in slanted type. -Finally, note that there is no punctuation at the end of the reference -text. -This is because \TeXsis\ automatically supplies the appropriate -punctuation when it prints the list of references. -Normally this will simply be a period (.), but it is possible to have -multiple references assigned to the same reference number, in which -case the references are separated by semi-colons, with the last -reference terminated by a period. -How to do this is described below. - - Since typing the text of a journal citation is somewhat complicated, -the \CS{journal} macro was created to make things a little easier. -The format is -\example -|\journal| \meta{journal name}|;|\meta{volume}|,|\meta{page number}% -|(|\meta{year}|)| -\endexample -This constructs the journal citation for you, with periods automatically -replaced by ``\hbox{\tt .\bs\char`\ }'' in abbreviations and the volume -number underlined for you by |\vol|. It is important that the field -separators (the semi-colon, the comma and the parentheses), all be -present and in the right order or \TeX\ will look as far forward as it -takes to find the next one it wants. There should be no extra spaces -between the arguments. - -Besides making it a little easier to type a citation to a journal -article, using \CS{journal} lets you switch from the American form of -citation to the European form very easily. In the American form the -page number follows the volume, followed by the year in parentheses. In -the European form the year follows the volume number and the the page -number comes after that. Normally \TeXsis\ uses the American form, but -you can change to the European form simply by saying -\example -\CS{Eurostyletrue} -\endexample -The arguments to \CS{journal} are always in the American order, -no matter how they are eventually printed. - -A number of abreviations which are commonly used in references -and which are usually set in italics are defined as simple control -words. -Thus saying \CS{cf} produces ``\cf'', saying \CS{etal} -produces ``\etal'', saying \CS{ie} produces ``\ie'', and -saying \CS{ibid} produces ``\ibid'' - - -Sometimes you want to print the title of a journal article, and -sometimes you don't. An easy way to control this is to enter the -title using \CS{ArticleTitle}, as in\index{Schwinger, Julian} -\TeXexample -\reference{Schwinger, 1951} -J.~Schwinger, -\ArticleTitle{On Gauge Invariance and Vacuum Polarization} -\journal Phys. Rev.;82,664(1951) -\endreference -|endTeXexample Then if you say \CS{ShowArticleTitletrue}, the title -will be printed (in slanted type, with a trailing comma), but with -\CS{ShowArticleTitlefalse} (the default) -it will not. - - -\bigskip - - To enter several references with the same reference number simply -begin the next \CS{reference} immediately after the previous -\cs{endreference}, and begin the labels of all but the first reference with -an asterisk "|*|", as in the following example: -\TeXexample -The vacuum polarization term can be regularized -by introducing a cut-off at high -frequencies.\reference{Pauli and Villars, 1949} -W.~Pauli and F.~Villars, \journal Rev. Mod. Phys.;21,434(1949) -\endreference -\reference{*Schwinger, 1948} -J.~Schwinger, \journal Phys. Rev.;74,1439(1948) -\endreference -|endTeXexample -This produces the single citation -\index{Schwinger, Julian}\index{Villars, F.}\index{Pauli, W.}% -\example -The vacuum polarization term can be regularized -by introducing a cut-off at high -frequencies.\reference{Pauli and Villars, 1949} -W.~Pauli and F.~Villars, \journal Rev. Mod. Phys.;21,434(1949) -\endreference -\reference{*Schwinger, 1948} -J.~Schwinger, \journal Phys. Rev.;74,1439(1948) -\endreference -\endexample -The "|*|"\index{*@{\tt *}'d citations} -at the beginning of the second label tells \TeXsis\ not -to assign a new reference number to this reference, but instead -just to add it to the text of the previous one. -Of course you -could type the text of both references between one \cs{reference} -and \cs{endreference}. An advantage to following the example -above is that the second reference can be given a reference -number of its own simply by deleting the "|*|" at the beginning of -the label. Similarly, two references with different reference -numbers can be lumped together into one citation by inserting a -"|*|" in front of the label of the second reference. Another -advantage to keeping the references separate is that it is easy -to move references around, either within a document that is being -revised or between documents. It is therefore recommended that -each reference be entered separately, although this is obviously -not required. - - Instead of putting the \cs{reference} \dots \cs{endreference} in -the text it may be more convenient to type them all together, -especially if they already -appear that way in the manuscript. This can be -done without producing any unwanted printed numbers by using -\index{references!entering a list} -\example\obeylines -\CS{referencelist} -|\reference{1}| {\it text 1...} |\endreference | -|\reference{2}| {\it text 2...} |\endreference | -|...| -|\reference{last}| {\it last text...} |\endreference| -\cs{endreferencelist} -\endexample -The \CS{referencelist} must appear at the beginning of the -document, so that the reference labels are defined before they -are used. This is best put into a separate file which is \cs{input} -by the master file. Of course the list of references is not -printed until the end of the document, when \cs{ListReferences} is -called. - -\subsection{Citations to Defined References} - - All subsequent citations to a previously defined reference are made -using its label. -If a \CS{referencelist} is used, then \undertext{all} citations -appearing in the text will be made in this way, since then the initial -reference definitions print nothing. -The construction \CS{cite}\arg{label} prints the reference number -corresponding to the label as a superscript. -For example, -\TeXexample -A good discussion of this is given by Doob\cite{Doob} in section~7. -|endTeXexample produces -\example -A good discussion of this is given by Doob\cite{Doob} -in section 7. -\endexample -since Michael Doob's\index{Doob, Michael} book \booktitle{A Gentle -Introduction to \TeX} is in fact \Ref{Doob} of this document and has -the label "|Doob|." -If several \CS{cite}'s are given in succession then the corresponding -numbers are printed separated by commas. -Unlike \cs{reference}, which defines the reference numbers, \CS{cite} -does not know if references are sequential, so it cannot replace a -sequence of numbers by a range. -To avoid a long sequence of reference numbers use instead -\CS{citerange}\arg{first label}\arg{last label} to print the numbers -corresponding to the first and last labels as a range. - - The construction \CS{Ref}\arg{label} produces ``Ref.~$nn$'' in the -text, with $nn$ the number of the reference corresponding to the -label. For example, the ``\Ref{Doob}'' in the previous paragraph was -typed into the manuscript file as |\Ref{Doob}|. \CS{Ref} is simply -shorthand -for |Ref.~\use{Ref.|\<label>|}|, and you can change what is printed -simply by changing the definition of \CS{Ref}. For example, if you said -\TeXexample -\def\Ref#1{reference~\use{Ref.#1}} -|endTeXexample -\noindent -then |\Ref{Doob}| would produce ``reference~\use{Ref.Doob}'' instead. -See Section~\use{sect.labels} for more on how to use \cs{use}. - -%==================================================* - -\subsection{Listing the References} - - After the text of the document is complete a printed list of the -references can be obtained by saying -\TeXexample -\ListReferences -|endTeXexample -This prints the numbers at the left hand edge of the page with the -text indented by \CS{refindent}, which is chosen so that the equation -numbers line up, and it puts a \CS{refskip} (initially equal to a -\cs{smallskip}) between references. -The reference format can be changed by redefining the command -\CS{refFormat}, which is executed just before the references are -printed and which initially is simply \cs{relax}. -For example, to have the reference list printed with a ragged right -margin, with no vertical skip in between references, one could say -\index{references!printing the list} -\index{lists!of references} -\TeXexample -\def\refFormat{% formatting for the list of references - \raggedright % ragged right margin - \refindent=2cm % instead of ``natural'' value - \let\refskip=\bigskip % more space between entries - } -\ListReferences % now do it -|endTeXexample - - -No heading is printed for the reference list --- you have to do this -yourself in whatever format is appropriate. -Often you will want to use \cs{nosechead} (or perhaps -\cs{beginsection} from Plain \TeX), but sometime you may want -to use \cs{chapter} or \cs{section} instead. -The choice is up to you. - -When you have several references under the same number, the |*|'d -references described earlier, they will each normally be printed -begining on a new line. -You can supress the extra line ends and run the reference text -together by saying \CS{refbreaksfalse}. -To go back to breaking lines between multiple citations you should say -\CS{refbreakstrue}. - -Once the list of references has been printed, everything is reset so -that you can start over collecting new references. -This is useful if you want to print the references at the end of each -chapter of a book, or at the end of each paper in a conference -proceedings. - - - -%==================================================* -\subsection{Citation Styles \label{sect.cite}} - -Superscript reference numbers are the simplest form of citation, and -the default in \TeXsis, but there are also several other popular -conventions for making citations. -One common one is to display the reference number enclosed in squaqre -brackets rather than as a subscript. -Another is to display a ``citation key,'' such as the first author's -last name and the year, either in brackets or parentheses. -\TeXsis\ is flexible and allows you to use any of these citation -styles. - -To cause the reference numbers to appear within brackets simply say -\CS{CiteByNumber}. -(To go back to superscript reference numbers say -\CS{CiteBySuperscript}.) -It would be nice if that is all you had to do to switch from one -citation style to another, but there is one complication. -When a citation appears at the end of a sentence it looks best if the -punctuation comes before a superscript, but after a reference number -in brackets. -Getting this right is more than a mere macro can easily do, so if you -switch from one style to the other you will have to make appropriate -corrections to your document for citations that appear at the end of -sentences. - -\Ignore % Duh? -Both \CS{CiteBySuperscript} and \CS{CiteByNumber} list the references -by number when you say \cs{ListReferences}. -\endIgnore - - -Another citation style which was more popular in journals many years -ago is to cite the work in the text using a superscript number, but to -put the text of the reference at the bottom of the page as a footnote -rather than at the end of the paper or chapter as an ``endnote.'' -This is achieved by saying \CS{CiteByFootnote}. -This can be useful for a draft of a paper even if you will eventually -use a different citation style, because it makes it easier to check -the reference text as you proofread the paper. -By the same reasoning it's actually a nice citation style for -scientific books and papers in general, because the reference text is -right there. -If the author thinks it is important enough to his/her argument to -cite another work then it is probably imporant for the reader to see -the reference text at that point. -We hope that this citation style gets used more than it has of late, -though with the increased use hypertext it probably won't. (Why -bother to put the reference text on the same page as the citation when -you can click on the reference number and jump right to the -appropriate point in the list of references?\ifhtml\phantom{.} - See Section~\use{sect.hypertext} for details.\fi) - -As you might expect, if you use \CS{CiteByFootnote} then no list of -references is produced should you also say \cs{ListReferences}. -After all, the text of the references has already appeared so there -are actually no references to list. - -It is probably not a good idea to mix \CS{CiteByFootnote} and numbered -footnotes using \cs{Nfootnote}, since they are completely separate -and keep track of their footnote numbers independently. -%% BUT THIS COULD BE FIXED, EH? - - - - - - -\bigskip - -Earlier versions of \TeXsis\ had only two citation styles, and for -backward compatibility they are still supported. -Saying \CS{superrefsfalse} is the same as saying \CS{CiteByNumber}, -while \CS{superrefstrue} is the same as \CS{CiteBySuperscript}. -The older forms are supported so that you can print old documents that -use them, but you should avoid including them in new documents since -they might disappear some day. - - -%==================================================* -\subsection{Using \BibTeX} - -\BibTeX\ is a system for managing and using bibliographic databases. -If you find you are always citing the same sources again and again in -your papers, or if you have access to a bibliographic database someone -else has already compiled (or which you yourself have compiled), then -\BibTeX\ can make it much easier for you to make your list of references. -All you need to do is specify the name of the database files to be -searched (there can be several), and use the \cs{cite} command to -refer to a paper listed in the database. -Papers in the databases are indexed by a ``citation key,'' and all you -have to do is use that key as the label in the \cs{cite} command. -The first time you run your document through \TeXsis\ these references -will be undefined, but if you then run the \BibTeX\ program it will -extract the proper references from the databases, so that they -will be properly defined (and formatted) the next time you -process your document. - -Some extra work is needed to get started using \BibTeX. -First, since \BibTeX\ is a separate program, you need to get that -program---it isn't included with \TeXsis. -You can get the standard distribution of \BibTeX\ from CTAN, in the -directory {\tt bibliography/bibtex}. -If you are not familiar with how to build and install \TeX\ and -related programs then you will need to get your system adminstrator or -\TeX\ guru to install it for you. -You also need to have the ``reference style'' file for \TeXsis. -This file, called {\tt texsis.bst}, tells \BibTeX\ how to write out -references in the proper \TeXsis\ format. -This file now comes with the standard \TeXsis\ distribution, but if -you don't have it you can easily get it from the \TeXsis\ ftp site, or -from CTAN, in the directory {\tt texsis/bibtex}. - - -Once \BibTeX\ and {\tt texsis.bst} are installed it is fairly easy to -use them. -First you have to add to your manuscript files a couple of -instructions that tell \BibTeX\ which bibliography database files to -use and how to format the references. -To specify the database files, use \CS{ReferenceFiles}, as in -\TeXexample -\ReferenceFiles{unix,internet,mylist} -|endTeXexample -In this case, \BibTeX\ will search for the references in the -files {\tt unix.bib}, {\tt internet.bib}, and {\tt mylist.bib}. -(Examples of these files are also included in the {\tt texsis/bibtex} -directory on the ftp servers.) -Next, you tell \BibTeX\ to use a ``style'' for creating references in a -form that \TeXsis\ can understand, with -\TeXexample -\ReferenceStyle{texsis} -|endTeXexample -This tells \BibTeX\ to use the {\tt texsis.bst} style file, -but you must leave off the {\tt .bst} extension. - -Once you have invoked \CS{ReferenceFiles} and \CS{ReferenceStyle} you -can cite your references using \cs{cite}, as usual. -The ``label'' you use for \cs{cite} should be the ``citation key'' -used in the bibliography database. -You can also use \CS{nocite} to create a citation entry without -putting a citation mark (superscript number or number in brackets) in -the output. -Finally, to print the list of references, simply say -\cs{ListReferences}, as usual. -This just lists the references---it's up to you to provide any heading -or extra space before the list. - -Once you have set up your document this way, the only additional thing -you have to do is run the \BibTeX\ program. -Before you do, run your manuscript file through \TeXsis\ once. -It will complain about undefined references, but it will also produce -a list of the papers you cited, in order, in the {\tt .aux} file. -Then run \BibTeX, like so: -\TeXexample -bibtex myjob -|endTeXexample -This uses the information in the {\tt .aux} file and -extracts the references, in the proper order and with the proper -\TeXsis\ \cs{reference} commands, into the file {\tt myjob.bbl} (the -extension means ``bibliography list''). -Finally, run \TeXsis\ again. -This time, since the {\tt .bbl} file exists, it is read in as a -\cs{referencelist} when the \CS{ReferenceFiles} command is executed. -Now all of your citations will be properly defined, with no -complaints. -Just remember to run the \BibTeX\ program again if you add or delete -citations or change their order. - -%>>> EOF TXSrefs.tex <<< diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSrevs.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSrevs.doc deleted file mode 100644 index a894b34948f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSrevs.doc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,484 +0,0 @@ -%% file: TXSrevs.doc - Revision List - TeXsis version 2.18 -%% @(#) $Id: TXSrevs.doc,v 18.4 2001/04/21 16:46:17 myers Exp $ -%======================================================================* -% (C) Copyright 1989, 1992, 1999 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige -% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications -% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL). -% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL -%======================================================================* -\ifx\undefined\meta\texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\input Manual.aux\draft\fi - -\def\Sect#1{{\sl Sect\-ion~\use{sect.#1}:\ }} % for revision sections - -\appendix{B}{Revisions} - - This appendix lists the major changes in \TeXsis\ as new versions -have come out. It is organized by sections of the manual and is -intended as a guide for users familiar with the previous version. There -are many smaller changes in addition to those listed here. - -\begingroup %------- normal indent on everything -\let\aftersubsection=\relax - -%-----------------------------------------------------------------------* -\subsection{Revisions for Version 2.18 \label{rev.2.18}} - -The most noticable change is that as of version 2.18 the distribution -of \TeXsis\ is covered by the \LaTeX\ Project Public License (LPPL). -\TeXsis\ has been an ``open source'' software project since it was -started in 1988, but we finally found that we had to be more explicit -about the licensing, to give proper assurances that it could indeed be -distributed freely. After considering several options we found that -the the LPPL suited the needs and the spirit of \TeXsis\ most closely. - - Please note that the LPPL only applies to the \TeXsis\ source code and -code derived from it, but it does not apply to \TeXsis\ style files -(or other files) which were written independently -without using \TeXsis\ source code. We hope that the authors of style -files will choose to follow our lead and license their works under the -LPPL, but they are free to choose whatever license they deem -appropriate. - -Two patches were released for \TeXsis~2.17 to fix minor problems, -and these have been incorporated into the current release. - -The default installation directory has been changed -to |/usr/local/texmf| in the |Makefile| to conform to the recommendations of the \TeX\ -Directory Structure (TDS). You can, of course, easily change this by -editing the |Makefile| before you install \TeXsis. This change has -not yet been made in the installation instructions. - -\bigskip - -\Sect{start} -Some common \LaTeX\ opening instructions are now detected and a -warning message given. Thus if you try to run a \LaTeX\ file through -\TeXsis\ you'll be given a little more help in figuring out your mistake. - -\Sect{refs} -Different citation styles are now available by different names, -and new ones (\cs{CiteByFootnote}, \cs{CiteByAuthor}, -\cs{CiteByTag}) have been added. - -This section of the manual has been broken into separated into -subsections to make it easier to read. -Documentation was added for \cs{ArticleTitle} and for BibTeX. - -A bug in \cs{ListReferences} was fixed, and the formatting -adjusted for the new citation styles. \cs{CiteByFootnote} is now -correctly syncronized to the same counter used by \cs{NFootnote}. - - -\Sect{sects} -Documentation was added for setting \cs{ChapterTitle}, -\cs{SectionTitle}, and \cs{SubsectionTitle}. - -A rare problem that appears when there are a large number of floating -insertions was fixed. - -\Sect{headline} -The \cs{bottompagenumbers} macro just puts the page number at the -bottom of the page, but doesn't surround it by dashes. -The number produced by \cs{PageNumber} will now always appear in -|\rm| type. - - -\Sect{color} -The \cs{ListColors} macro was added. - -An example is now given in the manual showing how to automatically -have every displayed equation printed in color, using |\PushColor| and -|\aftergroup\PopColor|. - -\Sect{form} -The file |TXSform.tex| has been renamed |Formletr.txs|, making this -less-used feature a style file rather than a part of the core \TeXsis\ -macros. - -\Sect{dcol} -The bottom insertions code has been moved to the file |TXSdcol.tex| so -that it can be used with Plain \TeX\ by inputing that file by itself. - - -%-----------------------------------------------------------------------* -\subsection{Revisions for Version 2.17 \label{rev.2.17}} - -Most of the changes are internal, and won't be noticed by most users. -But there are also a few major useful additions, such as \BibTeX\ support. - -\Sect{fonts} -One can now use \cs{scr} in subscripts and superscripts. - -\Sect{symb} -Added symbols \CS{sun} and \CS{earth} for astronomical symbols -\sun\ and \earth. - -\Sect{refs} -Added support for \BibTeX. -Reference counters and files are reset so that you can go on to -collect more references (as for separate chapters in a book). -Many internal improvements to the referencing macros. - -\Sect{labels} -The format of the |.aux| file has changed, and now matches more -closely the format used by \LaTeX. -This allows it to be used with packages like \BibTeX. -If you have problems with an old |.aux| file, just delete it. -A new one will be created when you process the document again. - -\Sect{sects} -First paragraph of a chapter, section or subsection is not indented. - -\Sect{fmts} -Added {\tt color.txs} macros to change the colors of PostScript output. -These macros should be backward compatible with {\tt colordvi.sty}. - -\Sect{letr} -The letter writing macros can now print envelopes. -The form letter macros have moved to a style file, {\tt Formletr.txs} - -\Sect{memo} -Added \cs{faxmemo} and \cs{FAX}. - -\Sect{misc} -Fixed \cs{undertext}. \cs{spine} has moved to a style file, {\tt -spine.txs}, but it auto-loaded from it, so the user shouldn't notice -the difference. - - -%-----------------------------------------------------------------------* -\subsection{Revisions for Version 2.16 \label{rev.2.16}} -We created a single file |mtexsis.tex| which can be used for -processing \TeXsis\ e-prints and other documents if you have not -installed \TeXsis. - -\Sect{fonts} -Added \cs{NFootnotes} to produce automatically numbered footnotes. - -\Sect{eqns} -Added a number of useful symbols. Removed the raised |\zeta| and -|\chi|, which caused trouble in some contexts. - -\Sect{refs} -Improved the treatment of spacing for reference numbers and for -multiple citations. - -\Sect{papers} -Reorganized the documentation so that document formats, the title -page, chapters and sections, running headlines, the table of contents, -and the index are all described together here. - -\Sect{sects} -Fixed spacing and hyphenation for long section titles. - -\Sect{sects} -Changed default value of \cs{sectionskip} and \cs{subsectionskip}, -so they are not quite so big. - -\Sect{conts} -The page numbers for full-page tables and figures were wrong in the -table of contents; this has been corrected. - -\Sect{conts} -\cs{Contentstrue} and \cs{Contentsfalse} turn on and off the table of -contents. The old |\ContentsSwitchtrue| is obsolete but still works. - -\Sect{figures} -Figures and tables can now be inserted at the bottom of a page -with \cs{bottominsert} or \cs{heavyinsert}. - -\Sect{figures} -\cs{ListFigureCaptions} allow you to print the figure captions at the -end of a document. - -\Sect{figures} -In the previous version the obsolete \cs{Tablebody} was moved to a style -file called |Tablebody.txs|. The name of this file has been changed to -|Tablebod.txs| so that it can be used on a DOS PC. - -\Sect{fmts} -Added \cs{PhysRevManuscript} style for manuscripts to be submitted to -the {\sl Physical Review}, and \cs{PhysRev} and -\cs{PhysRevLett} styles emulating the appearance of those journals. -These are in the style files |PhysRev.txs|. -Revised the |\IEEE| and |\WorldScientific| styles to follow those -formats more closely. Moved twin page output to a style file. - -\Sect{fmts} -Changed the method of loading site and style files so that they work -even with OZ\TeX\ on a Macintosh. - -\Sect{dcol} -Extensively revised the double column macros. They now support -insertion of figures at the bottom of the page or of a column, allow -figures to flow from one column to the next, and allow footnotes. The -new version is backwards compatible except for the names of the -headline and footline offsets, and can also be used by itself with Plain -TeX. - -%-----------------------------------------------------------------------* -\subsection{Revisions for Version 2.15 \label{rev.2.15}}% -An index has been added to the manual, using the index making macros -of |index.tex| and the MakeIndex program. We have included |index.tex| -in the standard distribution of \TeXsis, but the only documentation at -present is that contained in the source file. - -\Sect{intro} -Added a separate file called |Example.tex| which contains a short -example physics paper which uses the \TeXsis\ macros. - -\Sect{fonts} -Support added for \cs{scr} using Ralph Smith's Formal Script fonts, -assuming that they are available. - -\Sect{fonts} -Added \cs{Footnote} to act like \cs{footnote} but with the text -of the footnote singlespaced and in 10\pt\ type. (The font -can be changed by changing \cs{FootFont}.) - -\Sect{refs} -Modified \cs{reference}, \cs{cite}, etc., to insert extra space after -a reference following the end of a sentence. - -\Sect{sects} -Added \cs{pagecheck} to \cs{section} and \cs{subsection}, etc. These -macros skip to to a new page if less than \cs{sectionminspace} space -is left on the page. The initial setting for \cs{sectionminspace} is -|0.25\vsize|. Also made the skips before the titles of sections and -subsections variables \cs{sectionskip} and \cs{subsectionskip} in -place of the previous fixed values. - -\Sect{fmts} -The definition of \cs{thesis} has been moved to the style file -|thesis.txs| so that it is easier to make local changes. -The \cs{thesis} command automatically loads from this file. - -\Sect{fmts} -Added the style file |PhysRev.txs| containing a definition of -\cs{PhysRev} for a Physical Review format. A page proof layout -should be available in the future. - -\Sect{figures} -Added |epsf.tex| to the standard \TeXsis\ distribution and included -documentation for \cs{epsfbox} and related macros. - -\Sect{figures} -The macros for making lists of figures and tables have been improved -(along the lines of the new table of contents macros). - -\Sect{letr} -Modified \cs{formletters} to have a complete \cs{letterhead} macro or -even more complicated things as one of the arguments, rather than just -the phone number. This allows you to create more complicated -letterheads. Note also that the order of arguments is now reversed from -what it was previously! The first argument is the \cs{letterhead} stuff -(it gets done {\sl before} the address) and the second argument is the -name of the text file (it controls what is printed {\sl after} the -address. - -\Sect{dcol} -Introduced \cs{longequation} and \cs{endlongequation} for equations -which span both columns. The definitions of these can vary from style -to style, so they may or may not include a \cs{leftcolrule} and -\cs{rightcolrule}. - -\Sect{misc} -Added this section to the manual to explain miscellaneous useful macros -which don't fit anywhere else. - -\Sect{misc} -Added \cs{Ignore} and |\endIgnore| to ignore large blocks of text. -This is slightly more clever than |\comment|, which remains available. - - - -%-----------------------------------------------------------------------* -\subsection{Revisions for Version 2.14 \label{rev.2.14}} -\smallskip -\Sect{fonts} -\cs{TrueDoubleSpacing} generates a document with 2 times the normal -spacing, in contrast to \cs{doublespaced}, which gives 1.5 times the -normal spacing. - -\Sect{eqns} -Fixed a bug in \cs{bordermatrix}. - -\Sect{refs} -An error which occurred if \cs{endreference} was followed by -additional text on the same line has been fixed. - -\Sect{refs} -Extra space is now inserted after a reference number which follows a -period. - -\Sect{refs} -\cs{refrange} can now be used with \cs{reference} or \cs{cite}; the -correct numbers and ranges separated by commas are printed. - -\Sect{envmt} -The internal spacing mechanism for environments has been modified to -work with arbitrary \cs{baselineskip} and \cs{parskip} values. Some minor -changes have been made to the center and flush environments. - -\Sect{envmt} -The \cs{Listing} environment has been modified so that the characters -|{} % & () $ #| and~{\tt \VT} are just ordinary printable characters and -so that |\\| gives a printed |\|. - -\Sect{envmt} -|\@startenv| and |\@endenv| to begin and end environments have been -replaced with \cs{begEnv} and \cs{endEnv}, which are accessible to the -user because the do not have |@| in their names. - -\Sect{ruled} -The \cs{ruledtable} macros can now use \cs{tabskip} glue to produce a -table of arbitrary width. Spacing of the tables has been improved and -made more robust. - -\Sect{sects} -|\addsectioncont| has been replaced with \cs{addTOC}, i.e., "add to -Table Of Contents." The new macro is simpler and produces -better-looking output. - -\Sect{sects} -Spacing such as \cs{singlespaced} placed after the \cs{texsis} -initialization now sets the spacing for the entire document; the -explicit spacing commands in \cs{abstract}, etc., have been removed. - -\Sect{sects} -A macro \cs{setSectionID} has been added to allow one to place a figure -or table for one section in a different section if necessary and still -get the correct number. - -\Sect{fmts} -The \cs{NorthHolland} format now gives the more common single-column -North-Holland/Elsevier format. \cs{NorthHollandTwo} produces the -previous double-column oversized format. \cs{Manuscript} produces a -preprint with true double spacing as requested by The Physical Review. - -\Sect{fmts} -\cs{endtitle}, \cs{endauthor}, etc., can now be omitted from the titlepage -material, since \cs{title}, \cs{author}, etc., now close the previous mode -automatically. - -\Sect{letr} -Letters and memos can now be ended with \cs{bye}. - -%----------------------------------------------------------------------* -\pagecheck{0.2\vsize} -\subsection{Revisions for Version 2.13 \label{rev.2.13}}% -\smallskip - -\Sect{fonts} -Italic fonts are now available in large sizes, e.g. for \cs{slides}. Math -italic bold fonts have been added for titles. - -\Sect{eqns} -By default parentheses and brackets are now ordinary characters except -in math mode and so can be used, e.g., in file names. As a result, -automatic sizing of parentheses works only in {\sl displayed\/} equations. You -can restore the old behavior by saying |\onparens| at the beginning of -the document. - -\Sect{refs} -The text for references is now written with \cs{unexpandedwrite}. In -practice this means that references can contain almost anything, -including a \cs{Ref}. - -\Sect{refs} -The \cs{journal} macro was added to make it easier to create standard -citations to journal articles, and to be able to switch between the -American and European styles. - -\Sect{refs} -Superscript references are now in \cs{citestyle}, which is initially set -to \cs{scriptstyle} but can be changed. - -\Sect{tbls} -A way was created to save all figure and table insertions until the end -of the document with \cs{FiguresLast}, and then print them with -\cs{PrintFigures}, and similarly for tables. - -\Sect{fmts} -The \cs{NorthHolland} document layout was added to produce camera-ready -copy for Proceedings published by North-Holland/Elsevier. This is a -double column format with titles left justified and eleven point type. - -Saying \cs{singlespaced} immediately after \cs{texsis} or its equivalent -will now make the whole document single spaced. - -\Sect{dcol} -The double column macros have been modified so that removing the -\cs{setdoublecolumns} will produce a single column document. - -%----------------------------------------------------------------------* -\subsection{Revisions for Version 2.12 \label{rev.2.12}}% -\smallskip -\Sect{start} -A new command \cs{texsis} performs the initialization, and calling it more -than once no longer causes an error. |\inittexsis| remains as a synonym. - -\Sect{fonts} -\cs{ninepoint}, \cs{twentypoint}, and \cs{twentyfourpoint} commands have been -added to select these sizes. The 9~pt.\ size is really too small for a -standard laser printer, but it is useful if you must print IEEE format -on $8.5\,{\rm in} \times 11\,{\rm in}$ paper. The large sizes are useful -for slides and other special purposes. - -\Sect{tbls} -The table and figure insertion macros has been extensively modified, and -the syntax has been changed. |\topTable|, etc., have been replaced by -|\table|, etc., which make the insertion and define the number for the -tag. |\Tbl| and |\Fig| use the number. References to tables defined -later in the paper are satisfied using the |.aux| file, so -|\TOPTABLE|, etc., are no longer needed. The old names remain as -synonyms but their use is discouraged. - -\Sect{tbls} -\cs{ruledtable} and many associated macros have been added to make complex -ruled tables, including those with entries spanning more than one -column. |\Tablebody| is still available, but the new macros are much -more flexible and should be used instead. - -\Sect{tbls} -New macros have been added to list figures and tables. - -\Sect{fmts} -New formats have been added. \cs{WorldScientific} and \cs{IEEEreduced} make -conference proceedings in World Scientific format and in IEEE format at -75\% of full size. \cs{referee} is based on the memo format and can be -used for referee reports. \cs{slides} uses large type to make -transparencies for overhead projectors and similar material. - -\Sect{fmts} -An \cs{authors} macro for papers with multiple authors and facilities for -putting footnotes on titles have been added. - -\Sect{fmts} -\cs{bookpagenumbers} causes odd page numbers to be placed in the upper -right corner and even ones in the upper left corner. Additional -information on headlines is given. - -\Sect{letr} -The form letter macros have been rewritten. The syntax is the same -except that |\v| has been replaced by \cs{V} to avoid conflict with the -Plain \TeX\ accent. Also, \cs{V} now also works with \cs{formlabels}. - -\Sect{letr} -The new \cs{referee} format is described. - -\Sect{dcol} -The double column format has been extended to handle floating -insertions. \cs{topinsert} and \cs{pageinsert} produce insertions within a -column, while \cs{widetopinsert} and \cs{widepageinsert} produce insertions -across both columns. - -\Sect{labels} -The tagging mechanism has been changed to add an |@| before and after -the name. The practical effect is that using the name of a defined -control sequence like |book| for a tag no longer produces an error. - -\endgroup % -- \everysubsection back to what it was - - -%>>> EOF TXSrevs.doc <<< diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSruled.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSruled.doc deleted file mode 100644 index 826d042c07c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSruled.doc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,604 +0,0 @@ -%% file: TXSruled.doc - Ruled Tables - TeXsis version 2.18 -%% @(#) $Id: TXSruled.doc,v 18.2 2000/05/17 00:19:46 myers Exp $ -%======================================================================* -% (C) copyright 1994, 1999 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige. -% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications -% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL). -% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL -%======================================================================* -\ifx\undefined\bs \texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\draft\fi - -\noindent -While \cs{halign} in Plain \TeX\ is convenient for making simple -tables, it is still difficult to make tables with horizontal and -vertical rules. Indeed, typesetting ruled tables in \TeX\ has often -been likened to programming a computer in assembler language. Even -\TeXbook\ acknowledges that ``people who know how to make ruled tables -are generally known as \TeX\ Masters.''\reference{Masters}\relax -D.E.~Knuth, {\sl The \TeX book} (Addison Wesley, 1986), page 245 -\endreference -The macros described below take a great deal of the difficulty out of -making ruled tables, so that anybody can become a -\TeX\ Master, or at least a master of ruled tables. -\index{ruled tables}\index{tables!ruled|see{ruled tables}} - -\def\VT{\char'174} % the vertical var character ``|'' is needed below - - The basic idea behind making a ruled table is similar to -\cs{halign}, and the syntax is the same as the Princeton table macros -known as |TABLES.TEX| by Ray Cowan\reference{Cowan} Ray F.~Cowan, {\sl -Making Tables with Macros} (unpublished) -\endreference\index{Cowan, Ray F.} -(although the \TeXsis\ macros are quite different internally and run -about 5 times faster). You begin the table material with \cs{ruledtable} -and end it with \cs{endruledtable}. The table material is a list of items -to appear in the rows and columns of the tables. Just as with \cs{halign}, -you can separate items in different columns with |&|\index{&@{\tt \&}} -and end a row with -\cs{cr}. The |&| \idx{alignment character}\index{&@{\tt \&}} -separates columns without putting a -vertical rule between the columns, while \cs{cr} ends a line and puts a -thin horizontal rule under it. To get a vertical rule between columns -replace the |&|\index{&@{\tt \&}} - with a `{\tt\VT}' (the vertical line), and to end a line -without a horizontal rule under it replace the \cs{cr} with \cs{crnorule}. -One important thing to remember is to end the last line in the table -with \cs{endruledtable} instead of \cs{cr}. - -\bigskip -\pagecheck{2cm} - - As a first example, here is a simple ruled table, -{\singlespaced -\bigskip\tenpoint -\ruledtable -Year | World Population \cr -8000 B.C. | ~~~5000000 \crnorule -~~50 B.C. | ~200000000 \crnorule -1650 A.D. | ~500000000 \crnorule -1850 A.D. | 1000000000 \crnorule -1945 A.D. | 2300000000 \crnorule -1980 A.D. | 4400000000 -\endruledtable -\smallskip} -\pagecheck{2cm}\noindent -and here are the instructions that created it, -\TeXexample -|smalltt\ruledtable -Year |VT World Population \cr -8000 B.C. |VT ~~~5000000 \crnorule -~~50 B.C. |VT ~200000000 \crnorule -1650 A.D. |VT ~500000000 \crnorule -1850 A.D. |VT 1000000000 \crnorule -1945 A.D. |VT 2300000000 \crnorule -1980 A.D. |VT 4400000000 -\endruledtable -|endTeXexample -This example also appears in \TeXbook, on page~246, where it is typeset using -|\halign|. Compare how the two are constructed -and see which way you think is easier. - - By default each item in the table is centered in its column. Inside -a table the tie character ``|~|''\index{~@{\tt\char'176}} takes up the space -of exactly one digit (it is the same as saying -|\phantom{0}|),\index{phantom@{\tt\bs phantom\lb 0\rb}} and this has been -used to line up the digits of the entries in both columns. It is also -possible to change the definition of the \cs{TableItem} macro so that each -entry in each column is left or right justified. This is described a -little bit later. - - Something to note about this example table is that the outer -rules are thicker than the others. You can also get a thick -vertical rule between columns by using ``{\tt\bs\VT}'' in place of -``{\tt\VT}'', and you can get a thick horizontal rule below a row by -replacing the \cs{cr} with \cs{crthick}. The widths of thick and -thin rules are controlled by the dimensions \cs{thicksize} and -\cs{thinsize}. If you don't want thick rules at all simply say -|\thicksize=\thinsize|, which makes the thick rules as thin -as the thin rules. - - Some synonyms: \cs{CR} is the same as \cs{crthick}, \cs{nr} is the -same as \cs{crnorule}, and \cs{crrule} is the same as \cs{cr} (actually -it's the other way around). \cs{tab} is the same as |&|\index{&@{\tt \&}} ---- it separates columns without a vertical rule. \cs{vb} is the same as -{\tt\VT}, it separates columns with a thin vertical bar, while -\cs{Vb} is the same as {\tt\bs\VT} and separates the columns with a -thick vertical bar. You can also use \cs{dbl} to separate columns -with a double vertical rule. - - As in Plain \TeX\ you can use \cs{span} in place of -|&|\index{&@{\tt \&}} (or the other column separators) to join two -columns together into one, and you can use \cs{omit} as the very first -token in a column to tell it to omit the fancy column layout (the -centering or other spacing). -You can also use \cs{multispan} to \cs{span} and \cs{omit} several -columns, just as in an \cs{halign}. -The only difference is that the number of columns you tell it to -\cs{multispan} is the number of columns of the table it spans --- in a -ruled table constructed with \cs{halign} you would count the columns -{\sl and} any vertical rules (because the rules are also columns of -the \cs{halign}). - - - -\table{example-II} -\caption{Another example of a ruled table.} -\intablelist{Example of a ruled table --- AT\&T Common Stock.} -\singlespaced -\tenpoint -\ruledtable -\multispan3\hfil AT\&T Common Stock \hfil\CR - Year \dbl Price | Dividend \cr - 1971 \dbl 41-54 | \$2.60 \cr - ~~~2 \dbl 41-54 | \$2.70 \cr - ~~~3 \dbl 46-55 | \$2.87 \cr - ~~~4 \dbl 40-53 | \$3.24 \cr - ~~~5 \dbl 45-52 | \$3.40 \cr - ~~~6 \dbl 51-59 | ~~.95 -\endruledtable -\endtable - - \Tbl{example-II} is another sample table, again taken -{from} \TeXbook. Something important to notice is that the last -ruled table example didn't have a table number or a caption, -while this one does. That's because the last example was created -using just \cs{ruledtable}, while this example is inside of -\cs{table}. The point is that \cs{table} and \cs{ruledtable} do -separate things and can be used either separately or together; -\cs{table} creates the space for the table and gives it a caption -and a number, while \cs{ruledtable} actually constructs the body of -the ruled table. The instructions that created \Tbl{example-II} -are: -\smallskip\goodbreak -\TeXexample -|smalltt\table{example-II} -\caption{Another example of a ruled table.} -\singlespaced -\ruledtable -\multispan3\hfil AT\&T Common Stock \hfil\CR -Year \dbl Price |VT Dividend \cr -1971 \dbl 41-54 |VT \$2.60 \cr -~~~2 \dbl 41-54 |VT \$2.70 \cr -~~~3 \dbl 46-55 |VT \$2.87 \cr -~~~4 \dbl 40-53 |VT \$3.24 \cr -~~~5 \dbl 45-52 |VT \$3.40 \cr -~~~6 \dbl 51-59 |VT ~~.95 -\endruledtable -\endtable -|endTeXexample -\bigskip\goodbreak - -\table{SiHCl} -\caption{Parameters used in the MS-X$\alpha$ calculations for - the chlorosilane molecules, H$_{\rm x}$SiCl$_{\rm 4-x}$; - x=0--4.} -\intablelist{Example of a ruled table --- Parameters used in the - MS-X$\alpha$ calculations for the chlorosilane molecules, - H$_{\rm x}$SiCl$_{\rm 4-x}$; x=0--4.} -\singlespaced -\tenpoint -\ruledtable -\vctr{Molecule} | \vctr{Region} | Radius | - \vctr{$\alpha _{\rm HF}$}|\multispan{2} $l_{\rm max}$ \crnorule -\cskip | \cskip | \cskip |\cskip| \crule | \crule \crpart - | | (au) | | initial state | final state \CR - -SiCl$_4$ | outersphere | 6.21 | 0.7238 | 4 | 7\crnorule - | Si | 2.20 | 0.7275 | 2 | 3\crnorule - | Cl | 2.40 | 0.7233 | 2 | 3\cr - -SiHCl$_3$ | outersphere | 6.21 | 0.7260 | 4 | 7\crnorule - | Si | 2.16 | 0.7275 | 2 | 3\crnorule - | Cl | 2.40 | 0.7233 | 2 | 3\crnorule - | H | 1.20 | 0.7772 | 1 | 2\cr - -SiH$_2$Cl$_2$ | outersphere | 6.25 | 0.7295 | 4 | 7\crnorule - | Si | 2.20 | 0.7275 | 2 | 3\crnorule - | Cl | 2.40 | 0.7233 | 2 | 3\crnorule - | H | 1.20 | 0.7772 | 1 | 2\cr - -SiH$_3$Cl | outersphere | 6.30 | 0.7360 | 4 | 7\crnorule - | Si | 2.20 | 0.7275 | 2 | 3\crnorule - | Cl | 2.40 | 0.7233 | 2 | 3\cr - -SiH$_4$ | outersphere | 4.10 | 0.7524 | 4 | 7 \crnorule - | Si | 2.04 | 0.7275 | 2 | 3 \crnorule - | H | 1.20 | 0.7772 | 1 | 2 -\endruledtable -\bigskip\bigskip -\endtable - -Sometimes it is desirable to have rules across only some of the columns -of a table. In this case put \cs{crule} in the columns that are to have -rules, \cs{cskip} in the columns where no rules are desired, and -end the line with \cs{crpart}, which signals that the line contains a -partial rule. The column headings in \Tbl{SiHCl} are an example of -partial rules in a table. -That table was created with the commands,\reference{Bozek, 1991} -J.D.~Bozek, Ph.D. thesis (unpublished), Department of Chemistry, -University of Western Ontario, London, Ontario CANADA -\endreference\relax -\TeXexample -|smalltt\table{SiHCl} -\caption{...} -\singlespaced\tenpoint -\ruledtable -\vctr{Molecule} |VT \vctr{Region} |VT Radius |VT - \vctr{$\alpha _{\rm HF}$}|VT\multispan{2} $l_{\rm max}$ -\crnorule -\cskip |VT \cskip |VT \cskip |VT\cskip|VT \crule |VT \crule \crpart - |VT |VT (au) |VT |VT initial state |VT final state \CR -SiCl$_4$ |VT outersphere |VT 6.21 |VT 0.7238 |VT 4 |VT 7 \crnorule - |VT Si |VT 2.20 |VT 0.7275 |VT 2 |VT 3 \crnorule - |VT Cl |VT 2.40 |VT 0.7233 |VT 2 |VT 3 ... -... -\endruledtable -\endtable -|endTeXexample -\bigskip\goodbreak - - - Ruled tables are normally centered on the page, but you can turn -off the centering with \cs{noncenteredtables}. -Then the table becomes just another piece to add to a horizontal list. -One thing this lets you do is have two tables side by side on the -page, like so: -\nobreak -\noncenteredtables\index{ruled tables!centered} -\bigskip -\line{\tenpoint\ruledtable -Item ABC | Item DEF \cr -Item GHI | Item JKL \endruledtable -\hfil -\ruledtable -Data 111 | Data 222 \cr -Data 333 | Data 444 \cr -Data 555 | Data 666 \endruledtable} -\bigskip -\pagecheck{5\baselineskip} -\noindent -This pair of tables was produced by saying: -\TeXexample -|smalltt\noncenteredtables -\medskip -\line{\ruledtable -Item ABC |VT Item DEF \cr -Item GHI |VT Item JKL \endruledtable -\hfil -\ruledtable -Data 111 |VT Data 222 \cr -Data 333 |VT Data 444 \cr -Data 555 |VT Data 666 \endruledtable} -\smallskip -|endTeXexample -\noindent Saying \cs{centeredtables} turns table centering back on. -Tables are then centered across the page, and a table is then -added to a {\sl vertical\/} list. -\bigskip\goodbreak - - Usually \cs{ruledtable} makes tables as wide as their natural -width, but it is possible to make them wider by setting the dimension -\cs{tablewidth} to the width desired before saying \cs{ruledtable}. We can -make the same table in \Tbl{example-II} but with the width set to -10cm: \index{ruled tables!size} -\bigskip -\noncenteredtables -\tablewidth=10cm -\line{\tenpoint\hfil\vbox{\singlespaced - \ruledtable - \multispan3\hfill AT\&T Common Stock \hfill\CR - Year \dbl Price | Dividend \cr - 1971 \dbl 41-54 | \$2.60 \cr - ~~~2 \dbl 41-54 | \$2.70 \cr - ~~~3 \dbl 46-55 | \$2.87 \cr - ~~~4 \dbl 40-53 | \$3.24 \cr - ~~~5 \dbl 45-52 | \$3.40 \cr - ~~~6 \dbl 51-59 | ~~.95\rlap* - \endruledtable - \hbox{* (first quarter only)} -\vss}\hfil} -\smallskip -\noindent -The careful reader will notice that the version of -\Tbl{example-II} in \TeXbook\ had a footnote to the last entry, -and we have added that here. To do so we had to put the footnote in an -\cs{hbox} and stack it under the table, so we had to turn off table -centering. The table is therefore a bit more complicated to make, but -not much: \index{ruled tables!footnotes} -\TeXexample -|smalltt\noncenteredtables -\tablewidth=10cm -\line{\tenpoint\hfil\vbox{\singlespaced - \ruledtable - \multispan3\hfill AT\&T Common Stock \hfill\CR - Year \dbl Price |VT Dividend \cr - 1971 \dbl 41-54 |VT \$2.60 \cr - ~~~2 \dbl 41-54 |VT \$2.70 \cr - ~~~3 \dbl 46-55 |VT \$2.87 \cr - ~~~4 \dbl 40-53 |VT \$3.24 \cr - ~~~5 \dbl 45-52 |VT \$3.40 \cr - ~~~6 \dbl 51-59 |VT ~~.95\rlap* - \endruledtable - \hbox{* (first quarter only)} -\vss}\hfil} -|endTeXexample -\centeredtables % turn back on! -\noindent -If we had not wanted to add the footnote, then the table would have -been typed the same way as \Tbl{example-II} except for setting -the \cs{tablewidth}. - - Important note: \cs{tablewidth} is turned ``off'' after the -table is made, so the next table will have its natural width unless -you explicitly set \cs{tablewidth} again! \index{ruled tables!size} -\bigskip\goodbreak - - \cs{ruledtable} normally inserts a \cs{quad} of space around each -item. If you have a very wide table, especially one with many columns, -you may wish to reduce this. \cs{TightTables} make this spacing a single -space, the minimum acceptable. \cs{LooseTables} restores the default -spacing. You can define this space to be something else by -re-defining \cs{tablespace}, for example as \index{ruled tables!spacing} -\TeXexample -\def\tablespace{\ \ } -|endTeXexample -\noindent -If the table is still too wide with \cs{TightTables}, you will probably -have to reformat it or print it in landscape mode (tilted 90\degrees on -the page). -\bigskip\goodbreak - - - The careful reader may also have noticed that in the -examples in \Tbl{example-II} and \Tbl{SiHCl} we said -\cs{singlespaced}. That's -because the spacing of the rows of a table can be controlled just like -the spacing of the text with \cs{singlespaced}, \cs{doublespaced}, -etc. \index{ruled tables!spacing} -The space between the rows of a table is set by a strut called -\cs{tstrut}, which holds the rows apart. Its default definition is -\TeXexample -\def\tstrut{\vrule height 3.1ex depth 1.2ex width 0pt} -|endTeXexample -\noindent -You can change the spacing between rows by changing the definition of -this strut. One of the things \cs{singlespaced} does is define the -\cs{tstrut} to be 0.5ex higher and deeper than a parenthesis. -\cs{doublespaced}, \cs{triplespaced}, and \cs{widenspacing} all increase the -height and depth of the strut in proportion to the increase in the -baseline spacing. - - If you put something in a table which is larger than the strut, -then it will touch the rules above or below. You can fix this by -inserting your own strut into that row. More simply, you can say -\cs{bigitem}\arg{stuff}, and the ``stuff'' will be positioned correctly -with a nice amount of space above and below. \index{ruled tables!spacing} -\medskip - - You can also decide whether or not you want diagnostic messages -printed when a table is created. Saying \cs{tableinfotrue} causes a -message to be printed on your terminal every time a ruled table is -created. The message tells you how many rows and columns were in the -table. This is useful information, because it can tell you immediately -if you made a mistake in the table or left out a row or column. -\cs{tableinfotrue} is the default, but you can turn off these messages -by saying -\cs{tableinfofalse}. In any case, you will be warned if a row has a -different number of columns from the previous one. -\medskip - - The tables we have demonstrated so far all contain numbers, but -sometimes it is desirable to have an entry in a table which is a -paragraph of text. \index{ruled tables!text} For that purpose, you can -use \cs{para}\arg{text}. The width of the paragraph is determined by -the dimension \cs{parasize}, which defaults to 4 inches. -\medskip - -Tables \use{Tb.tablemac;a} and \use{Tb.tablemac;b} summarize the most -important commands for making ruled tables. - - Finally, we can discuss how you can change how each column of -a table is constructed. The macros which build the table take -each entry and pass it to a macro called \cs{TableItem}. The -default definition of \cs{TableItem} is: -\vskip 0pt\goodbreak -\TeXexample -|smalltt\def\TableItem#1{% % centers item in ruled table - \hfil\tablespace % left glue - #1\killspace % item, no space after - \tablespace\hfil % right glue - }% -|endTeXexample - - -%% TABLE A - -\bottomtable{tablemac;a} -\caption{Basic table macros for use with {\tt\bs ruledtable}.}% -\intablelist{Basic macros for {\tt\bs ruledtable}}% -\tablewidth=\hsize -\LeftJustifyTables -\ruledtable -\sl Macro name\relax - | \sl Description \relax \crthick -\tt\bs ruledtable\relax - | \para{Starts a ruled table.}\cr -\vtop{\noindent\hsize=1.6in\normalbaselines - \tt\char124\quad \rm (vertical bar)\hfil\break - or \tt\bs vb\hfil}\relax - | \para{Separates one column from the next, with a - a thin vertical rule between them.}\cr -\tt\&\ \rm or\tt\ \bs tab \relax - | \para{Separates one column from the next, but with - no rule between them.}\cr -\tt\bs cr\relax - | \para{Ends the current row, and starts the next - one. The completed row will be separated from - the next with a thin horizontal rule.}\cr -\vtop{\noindent\hsize=1.6in\normalbaselines -\tt\bs crthick \hfil\break \rm or \tt\bs CR\hfil }\relax - | \para{Similar to {\tt\bs cr}, but the rows will - be separated with a thick horizontal rule.}\cr -\vtop{\noindent\hsize=1.6in\normalbaselines -\tt\bs crnorule \hfil\break \rm or \tt\bs nr\hfil }\relax - | \para{Similar to {\tt\bs cr}, but the rows will - not be separated by a rule.}\cr -\tt\bs\char124 \relax - | \para{Same as {\tt\char124}, but with a thick vertical rule.}\cr -\tt\bs dbl - | \para{Same as {\tt\char124}, but with two thin vertical rules.}\cr -\tt\bs endruledtable\relax - | \para{Ends the ruled table.}% -\endruledtable -\line{\hfil {\sl Continued...}}% -\endtable - -%% TABLE B (FULL PAGE) - -\fulltable{tablemac;b} -\caption{Additional macros for use with {\tt\bs ruledtable}.} -\intablelist{Additional macros for {\tt\bs ruledtable}} -\tablewidth=\hsize -\LeftJustifyTables -\line{{\sl Continued...}\hfil} -\smallskip -\ruledtable -\sl Macro name\relax - | \sl Description \relax \crthick -\tt\bs multispan\lb{\it n}\rb\relax - | \para{Makes the next entry span the next $n$ - columns, where $n$ is an integer, $n>0$. - See {\tt\bs omit} below.} \cr -\tt\bs omit \relax - | \para{This \TeX\ primitive causes the normal - template for its entry to be omitted, allowing - the user to do something else with this entry.} \cr -\tt\bs para\arg{text}\relax - | \para{Formats {\sl text\/} into a neat little - paragraph like this one. The width of the - paragraph produced is determined by the dimension - {\tt\bs parasize}. The default is 4 inches. } \cr -\tt\bs parasize=\meta{dimen} \relax - | \para{Sets the width of paragraphs for the {\tt\bs para} - macro.} \cr -\tt\bs TableItem\arg{stuff}\relax - | \para{Used in the standard template, this - macro centers its argument in the column. The - user can redefine it for special effects.} \cr -\tt\bs tablespace - | \para{The spacing around each item for {\tt\bs TableItem}.}\cr -\vtop{\noindent\hsize=1.4in\normalbaselines -\tt\bs LooseTables \hfil\break -\tt\bs TightTables\hfil}\relax - | \para{Set {\tt\bs tablespace} to {\tt\bs quad} and {\tt\bs\ } - respectively.\hfill\break\ }\cr -\vtop{\noindent\hsize=1.6in\normalbaselines -\tt\bs TrailingSpaces \hfil\break -\tt\bs NoTrailingSpaces \hfil}\relax - | \para{Use trailing spaces and glue items in table entries - (default) or ignore them. See text.}\cr -\tt\bs bigitem\arg{stuff}\relax - | \para{Use this for something that would normally - not fit in one line of a table to make the spacing - between rows large enough for this item.} \cr -\tt\bs vctr\arg{stuff}\relax - | \para{Centers the item {\sl vertically\/} so that - it can appear between two rows.}\cr -\tt\bs centeredtables\relax - | \para{Turns table centering on. Each table - will be centered left-to-right on the page. - This is the default.} \cr -\tt\bs noncenteredtables\relax - | \para{Turns table centering off. Each table - is returned as an {\tt\bs hbox}, and it is up - to the user to place it as desired.} \cr -\vtop{\noindent\hsize=1.6in\normalbaselines -\tt\bs tableinfotrue \hfil\break -\tt\bs tableinfofalse\hfil}\relax - | \para{Turns on or off the diagnostic message telling - you how many rows and columns were found in the - table. }\cr -\tt\bs thicksize=\meta{dimen} \relax - | \para{This dimension specifies the thickness - of the thick rules in the table. The default - size is 1.5 points.} \cr -\tt\bs thinsize=\meta{dimen} \relax - | \para{This dimension specifies the thickness - of thin rules in the table. The default - size is 0.8 points.} \cr -\tt\bs tablewidth=\meta{dimen} \relax - | \para{Specifies how wide to make the next - table. If not specified, the table is made to - its natural width. This value is reset - following the construction of each table.} -\endruledtable -\vfill -\endtable - - -The \cs{hfil} glue on both sides of the argument causes the item to be -centered in the column, while \cs{tablespace} (which defaults to \cs{quad}) -insures that there will be at least some amount of space between the -item and the vertical rules on each side. Because of the way that -\TeX\ handles macro arguments, if you type a table with spaces between -the text and the next column separator, an extra \cs{space} will be -inserted into the table. If you first say \cs{NoTrailingSpaces}, then -\cs{killspace} in the above macro is defined to remove any trailing glue -items. \cs{hfill} is redefined by the table macros so that if it is the -last token in an entry, then that entry is properly left justified, -but to insert any other trailing glue, you must say -\example -\meta{text}\meta{glue}|\null| -\endexample -\noindent -The default is \cs{TrailingSpaces}, which does incorporate any trailing -spaces into the table but which also treats any trailing glue items -normally. - - - You can change the definition of \cs{TableItem} to suit your own -purpose. The simplest modification is to omit the \cs{hfil} on the left -or right so that each entry is right or left justified. This is so -commonly used that saying \cs{RightJustifyTables} or -\cs{LeftJustifyTables} makes the appropriate change for you. Saying -\cs{NoJustifyTables} restores \cs{TableItem} to its original centering -function. \index{ruled tables!customization} - - Since \cs{TableItem} is used to create every column of the table, you -cannot use it to modify a single column. To justify just one column -you can simply put \cs{hfill} to the left or right of each item in the -column, since \cs{hfill} is infinitely more stretchy than \cs{hfil}. (The -behavior of glue items other than \cs{hfill} depends on whether -\cs{NoTrailingSpaces} has been set.) With a little more work it is -possible to design special or unusual tables by redefining the -``preamble'' of the table. This is possible because \cs{ruledtable} -uses \cs{halign} with a preamble called \cs{TablePreamble}. The default -definition of \cs{TablePreamble} is: -\TeXexample -\def\TablePreamble{% % \ruledtable preamble - \TableItem{####}% % the first item - \plaintab\plaintab % && means repeat this - \TableItem{####}% % the subsequent items - \plaincr}% % end of preamble -|endTeXexample -\noindent -The syntax for \cs{TablePreamble} is like an \cs{halign} preamble in Plain -\TeX\, but with |&| replaced by \cs{plaintab}, \cs{cr} replaced by -\cs{plaincr}, and |#| replaced by |####|. If you have read this far and -want to try changing \cs{TablePreable} then you should read the source -code and the comments that go with it in the file |TXSruled.tex.| - -As a final note we point out that it is also possible for you to create -your own column separators with the macro \cs{nextcolumn}. This macro -takes a single argument which is used to separate one column of the -table from another. Thus for example, the \cs{dbl} macro for creating a -double vertical rule between columns is defined as: -\TeXexample -\def\dbl{% - \nextcolumn{\vrule width\thinsize - \hskip\thinsize\vrule width\thinsize}} -|endTeXexample -\relax -\index{ruled tables!customization} - -%>>> EOF TXSruled.doc <<< diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSsects.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSsects.doc deleted file mode 100644 index 34263d458f4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSsects.doc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,899 +0,0 @@ -%% TXSsects.doc - Chapters and Sections - TeXsis version 2.18 -%% @(#) $Id: TXSsects.doc,v 18.3 2001/04/06 21:54:45 myers Exp $ -%======================================================================* -% (C) Copyright 1989-1998 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige -% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications -% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL). -% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL -%======================================================================* -\ifx\undefined\bs \texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\draft\input Manual.aux\fi - -\section{Typesetting Complete Papers\label{sect.papers}} - -The commands described so far are useful for creating the body of a -simple physics paper, but they are not enough to typeset a complete -paper. A physics paper generally has a title, one or more authors and -their addresses or professional affiliations, and perhaps an abstract. -Longer documents may be divided into sections, or even chapters, and -there might even be a table of contents or an index. This section -describes the commands for creating the basic structural elements of a -complete paper: the title material and divisions into chapters, -sections, and subsections. It also includes a discussion of more -advanced topics, such as how to create a table of contents or an index, -and how to control the running headlines at the top of the page. Later, -\Sect{fmts} discusses more specialized document layouts for conference -proceedings or for papers submitted to specific journals, while -\Sect{letr} describes the commands for producing letters, memos, referee -reports, and similar specialized documents. - -It is often convenient to be able to typeset the same document in more -than one format. Therefore, all complete papers in \TeXsis\ use the -same general structure, and one can select the particular document -format to be used by changing only one or two commands at the beginning -of the manuscript file. The commands to typeset the title page and -to break the paper up into sections are still the same, even if they -behave slightly differently -according to the particular format selected. For example, if you give -the \cs{paper} command then the title page material will appear at the -top of the first page, and the text of the paper will also begin on that -page. If you simply change \cs{paper} to \cs{preprint} the title page -material will appear on a page by itself, with a banner (defined by -\cs{banner}) across the top of the page, and the text will begin on the -next page. Using any of the other document formats described in -\Sect{fmts} will cause the title page material to be formatted -slightly differently. - -At this point an example may be more instructive than more discussion. -Here is how a famous paper\reference{BCS} J.~Bardeen, L.~N.~Cooper, and -J.~R.~Schrieffer, -\journal Phys. Rev.;108,1175(1957) -\endreference -would have begun had it been typeset with \TeXsis: -\TeXexample -|smalltt\texsis -\preprint -\pubdate{July 8, 1957} -\pubcode{hep-cats/yymmnnn} -\titlepage -\title -Theory of Superconductivity -\endtitle -\author -J.~Bardeen -Department of Physics -University of Illinois -Urbana, Illinois 61801 -\endauthor -\and -\author -L.~N.~Cooper -Department of Physics and Astronomy -The Ohio State University -Columbus, OH 43210 -\endauthor -\and -\author -J.~R.~Schrieffer -Department of Theoretical Physics -University of Birmingham -Birmingham, England B15 2TT -\endauthor -\abstract -A theory of superconductivity is presented, based on -the fact that... - -\endabstract -\toappear{Physical Review} -\endtitlepage - -\section{Introduction} -The main facts which a theory of superconductivity -must explain are... -|endTeXexample -\noindent -A more complete example paper is given in the file |Example.tex|, which -is included in the standard distribution of \TeXsis. -In the rest of this section each of the elements in these examples and -several others related to the overall structure of a complete paper will be -explained. - - -%==================================================* -\subsection{Types of Documents \label{sect.types}} - -A complete \TeXsis\ paper should start with the \cs{texsis} macro -described in \Sect{start}. (While this is not required if you also use -one of the macros listed below, it does serve to indicate unambiguously -that the document is -to be typeset with \TeXsis.) The \cs{texsis} macro can be followed by a -command to specify whether the document should be typeset as a simple -paper or conference proceeding, a preprint, a book, etc. This macro -will provide sensible defaults for the layout, although additional -commands can be given to override them. The following basic document -types are included in \TeXsis: - -\description{XManuscript\quad}\clump -% -\itm{\CS{paper}} -Produces a paper with the title and abstract at the top of the first -page, such as for submission to a conference proceeding. -The text begins on the first page, below the title and abstract. -% -\itm{\CS{preprint}} -Produces a paper in a preprint format, with the title material by -itself on the first page. A \cs{banner} is put across the top of the -title page, and the text begins on the page following. -% -\itm{\CS{eprint}} -Produces a paper in a format suitable for submission to the Los Alamos -preprint archives (the ``e-print bulletin boards,'' such as hep-ph, -hep-th, hep-lat, or qc-gr). -% -\itm{\CS{Manuscript}} -Similar to \CS{preprint}, but with true double spacing for manuscripts -submitted for publication in journals such as the {\sl Physical -Review}, which require this. -% -\itm{\CS{book}} -A book or other long document with a separate title page, running -headlines, a table of contents, etc. Page numbers are printed in -opposite corners on left and right handed pages. -% -\itm{\CS{thesis}} -Similar to \CS{book}, this format is for typesetting a doctoral -dissertation or similar document. -It may be customized for your own university. -% -\enddescription - -After the command defining the type of document you can add optional -commands to modify the default layout. For example, you might want to -use -\example -|\texsis| \n -|\paper| \n -|\hsize=|\meta{dimen} \n -|\vsize=|\meta{dimen} \n -|\singlespaced| -\endexample -to produce a single-spaced conference proceeding of a specified -size. Macros to create more specialized documents in some of the common -formats used by physics journals and conferences are described in -\Sect{fmts}. Since \TeXsis\ obviously cannot include all -the possible formats, that section also contains some hints about how -to modify a format to fit your needs. - -%==================================================* -\subsection{The Title ``Page'' \label{sect.title}} - -A complete paper almost always starts with a title. Most probably it -will also include the names of the authors, and often it will include -an abstract. Sometimes the title, author's name(s) and abstract -appear on a separate page, while sometimes they simply appear at the -top of the first page of the paper. In any case we will refer to all -this material together as the ``title page'' material. - -\TeXsis\ has a standardized method for entering the title page -material, whether it will actually appear on a page by itself or not. -You begin the title page material with \CS{titlepage} and end it with -\CS{endtitlepage}. -Between these two control sequences you can use any of the commands -listed below to enter the various parts of the title page material. -(An example appears at the beginning of this section). - -\description{Xendauthor}\clump\tolerance=1700 -% -\itm{\CS{title}} -Begins the title of the paper. All lines up to a following -\cs{endtitle} are centered and printed in \cs{Tbf} type. -Line endings in the input file {\sl are} respected, just as with -\cs{obeylines}. -% -\itm{\CS{author}} -Begins an entry for an author's name and address, which should -appear on the lines that follow. Line endings in the input file -{\it are} respected. The first line to follow is the author's -name, which is printed centered in |\bf| type. All subsequent -lines are centered in normal type. End with |\endauthor|. -% -\itm{\CS{and}} -Prints the word "and," centered and with appropriate vertical -separation. It can be used either between sets of |\author| -\dots\ |\endauthor| or between multiple addresses for the same -author. -% -\itm{\CS{authors}} -An alternative to |\author| for papers with many authors. Here -line endings are not respected; instead, the list of authors is -divided into lines as evenly as possible, and each line is -centered and printed in Roman type. End with \cs{endauthors}. -% -\itm{\CS{institution}\arg{symbol}\arg{address}} Prints the symbol and -the institution address centered on a line. A |\medskip| is placed -before the first address to separate the names and addresses. -|\institution| should be placed after the author list but before -|\endauthors| to work correctly. -% -\itm{\CS{abstract}} -Begins the abstract. The word "ABSTRACT" is centered above the -abstract. The left and right margins are brought in relative to -the text of the paper. End with |\endabstract|. -% -\itm{\CS{pacs}\arg{codes}} -Prints the PACS (Physics and Astronomy Classification Scheme) codes -on the title page. -% -\itm{\CS{submitted}\arg{Journal}} -Prints the phrase ``Submitted to {\sl Journal}'' centered on the page, -with the name of the journal printed in |\sl| type. -% -\itm{\CS{toappear}\arg{Journal}} -Similar to |\submitted|, this prints the phrase -``To appear in {\sl Journal}'' on the title page, -with the name of the journal printed in |\sl| type. -% -\itm{\CS{disclaimer}\arg{contract}} -Prints a standard DOE disclaimer for contract number -\meta{contract}, printed in 10~pt.\ type, as a footnote. -% -\enddescription - -The advantage to entering the title page material this way is that if -you change the overall document format, either from \cs{paper} to -\CS{preprint} or to one of the more specialized formats described in -\Sect{fmts}, then the title page material will automatically be changed -to match the document format selected. - -\bigskip - -The \cs{banner} macro is called in the \CS{preprint} document format to -put the date, a preprint code number, and the name of your institution -or organization at the top of the title page. The name of the -institution can be changed by saying -\example -|\def\ORGANIZATION{|\meta{name}|}| -\endexample -and this change can be made permanent by putting it into the file -|TXSsite.tex| when \TeXsis\ is being installed. -\def\tmp{}\ifx\ORGANIZATION\tmp -(When this manual was printed, the \CS{ORGANIZATION} macro was -empty.) -\else -When this manual was printed, the \CS{ORGANIZATION} macro was: -\example -\ORGANIZATION -\endexample -\fi -The preprint date and document number can be specified by putting -\example\obeylines -\CS{pubdate}\arg{date} -\CS{pubcode}\arg{code-number} -\endexample -before the \cs{titlepage}. If these are omitted, the date defaults to -the current month and year and the document number defaults either to -something set as the default when \TeXsis\ was installed or to the -current \TeXsis\ version number. The default at this installation is -\ATunlock "\@DOCcode". -\ATlock -If you really want to customize the look of your paper you can create -your own \cs{banner} macro. - -\bigskip - -If you are submitting your paper to one of the \idx{preprint archives} -at Los Alamos, such as |hep-lat|, |hep-ph|, or |hep-th|, you can have -the archive server automatically insert the preprint number it assigns -your document when it is submitted. -To do this put -% Important: putting \relax here and below inhibits any such substitutions -% in this manual if it gets put out on such a server. -\example -\CS{pubcode}|{hep-lat|\relax|/yymmnnn}| -\endexample -near the top of the document (change ``\idx{hep-lat}'' as appropriate -to the archive you are using). -When you submit a paper to an archive with the ``put'' command the -server will translate any occurrence in the input file of the sequence -``|hep-lat|\relax|/yymmnnn|'' to ``|hep-lat/|'' followed by the 7 -digit paper number. -You must use the exact string of characters ``|yymmnnn|'' for this to -work. -When someone else gets your paper from the server and prints a copy it -will have the assigned document code in the banner at the top of the -title page. - -\bigbreak - -The standard \cs{footnote} macro cannot be used to make footnotes to -titles and authors's names, because these special fields -use internal vertical mode, where footnotes are not allowed. You -should instead use the \cs{vfootnote} macro of plain \TeX\ for such -purposes. In this case you must put the reference mark in the title or -author list yourself (for example, with |${}^*$|), and then say -|\vfootnote*{The footnote}| somewhere else on the page, outside of the -internal vertical mode material (the author or title blocks). - -``Footnotes'' identifying institutions in a long list of authors -are often centered on lines immediately below the author list. -\CS{authors} and \CS{institution} can be used for this. For example, -the author list of one well known paper\reference{DIS} E.D. Bloom, et al., -Phys.\ Rev.\ Letters \vol{23}, 930 (1969) \endreference -could be typed as follows: -\TeXexample -|smalltt\authors -E.D.~Bloom,$^a$ M.~Breidenback,$^b$ D.H.~Coward,$^a$ -H.~DeStaebler,$^a$ J.~Drees,$^a$ J.I.~Friedman,$^b$ -G.C.~Hartmann,$^{b,c}$ H.W.~Kendall,$^b$ G.~Miller,$^a$ -L.W.~Mo,$^a$ R.E.~Taylor$^a$ -\institution{a}{Stanford Linear Accelerator Center, - Stanford, CA 94305} -\institution{b}{Department of Physics and Laboratory for Nuclear -Science, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, - Cambridge MA 02139} -\institution{c}{Xerox Corporation, Rochester, NY} -\endauthors -|endTeXexample -This produces -\authors -E.D.~Bloom,$^a$ M.~Breidenback,$^b$ D.H.~Coward,$^a$ -H.~DeStaebler,$^a$ J.~Drees,$^a$ J.I.~Friedman,$^b$ -G.C.~Hartmann,$^{b,c}$ H.W.~Kendall,$^b$ G.~Miller,$^a$ -L.W.~Mo,$^a$ R.E.~Taylor$^a$ -\institution{a}{Stanford Linear Accelerator Center, - Stanford, CA 94305} -\institution{b}{Department of Physics and Laboratory for Nuclear -Science, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, - Cambridge MA 02139} -\institution{c}{Xerox Corporation, Rochester, NY} -\endauthors -\noindent Note that \cs{institution} must come {\sl before} the -\cs{endauthors}. - -%==================================================* - -\subsection{Chapters and Sections \label{sect.sects}} - -The following commands can be used to create and automatically number -the divisions of a document, including chapters, sections, and -appendices: - -\singlelinetrue % make label overhang -\description{\hskip 3cm}\clump - -\itm{\CS{chapter}\arg{title}\quad} -Begins a chapter with \meta{title} printed in |\Tbf| -type on a new page. - -\itm{\CS{section}\arg{title}\quad} -Begins a section with the \meta{title} printed in |\tbf| -type. This does {\it not} begin on a new page (although you -certainly can start a section on a new page by saying -|\vfill\supereject| first.) - -\itm{\CS{subsection}\arg{title}\quad} -Begins a subsection with the \meta{title} printed in |\bf| -type. - -\itm{\CS{subsubsection}\arg{title}\quad} -Begins a sub-subsection entitled \meta{title}. This is a lower -level than even a subsection and should only be used when truly appropriate. - -\itm{\CS{Appendix}\arg{label}\arg{title}} -Begins a chapter-like appendix labeled by the letter \meta{label} -(generally A, B, C, \dots or I, II, III, \dots). The \meta{title} -is printed in |\Tbf| type at the top of a new page. - -\itm{\CS{appendix}\arg{label}\arg{title}} -Begins a section-like appendix labeled by the letter \meta{label} -(generally A, B, C, \dots or I, II, III, \dots). The \meta{title} -is printed in |\tbf| type. - -\itm{\CS{nosechead}\arg{title}} -The \meta{title} is typeset like a subsection headline, but without a -subsection number. This is suitable for acknowledgments, lists of -references and such. - -\enddescription -The title appears at the top of the section or subsection, left -justified in the appropriate typestyle for the document type and with -an appropriate amount of vertical spacing below. These and other -details of the layout vary with the document format. -In general \CS{chapter} is appropriate mainly -for books or theses; the manual you are reading now uses only -\CS{section} and \CS{subsection} divisions. - -As you may have noticed from this manual, the first paragraph of a -section or subsection is not indented. -This is the usual practice for most well-designed books, though it may -seem odd at first. -It isn't that strange if you think of the indentation of a paragraph -as a way to mark a {\sl separation between} paragraphs, rather than as -a way to mark the beginning of a paragraph. -But if you really want to indent that first paragraph, just begin it -with \cs{par}. -On the other hand, if you put any kind of commands or macro -definitions between the \CS{section} or \CS{subsection} and the first -paragraph then this will interfere with the suppression of the -indentation. -You can easily fix this by either moving your macro definitions -elsewhere or putting in a \cs{noindent} by hand. - - - - By default chapter, section, and subsection numbers are printed with -the titles, and the chapter and section numbers are also attached to -equation, figure and table numbers in the form ``$cc.ss.nn$'', where -$cc$ is the chapter number, $ss$ the section number, and $nn$ the -equation number. The inclusion of the chapter and section numbers can -be turned on or off with the commands -\description{~showchaptIDfalse\qquad} -\itm{\CS{showchaptIDtrue}} Display chapter numbers. -\itm{\CS{showchaptIDfalse}} Do not display chapter numbers. -\itm{\CS{showsectIDtrue}} Display section numbers. -\itm{\CS{showsectIDfalse}} Do not display section numbers. -\enddescription - -\bigskip - - \CS{Appendix} and \CS{appendix} give chapter-like and -section-like appendices, respectively. The chapter or section number is -replaced by a letter, which is given as the first argument, and the -title, which is the second argument, is printed in the same format as a -chapter or section title. For example, -\TeXexample -\appendix{A}{Review of Functional Integration} -|endTeXexample -\noindent -The letter labeling the appendix is attached to the equation -numbers if \CS{showchaptIDtrue} or \CS{showsectIDtrue} is used. You can -omit the letter by using an empty first argument, as in -\TeXexample -\appendix{}{Leading logarithm approximation} -|endTeXexample -\noindent -in which case the result is the same as setting -\CS{showchaptIDfalse} or \CS{showsectIDfalse}. - -\bigskip - - A skip called \CS{sectionskip} is used before the title of any -section-like division (i.e., a |\section| or an |\appendix)|; a skip -called \CS{subsectionskip} is used for any lower-level division, that is, a -\CS{subsection}, \CS{subsubsection}, or a \CS{nosechead}. Of course these -are all removed by \TeX\ if the section starts on a new page. -Furthermore, any of these divisions will start on a new page if less -than a minimum length given by \CS{sectionminspace} remains on the -current page. -The defaults for these parameters are -\TeXexample -\sectionskip=2cm plus 8pt minus 8pt % skip before \section -\subsectionskip=1cm plus 4pt minus 4pt % skip before \subsection -\sectionminspace=0.25\vsize % new page if less left -|endTeXexample -but they can be changed to any legal \TeX\ skip or dimension either -throughout the document or in a local group. For example, you could -use -\TeXexample -\begingroup -\subsectionskip=\sectionskip -\fourteenpoint -\nosechead{Acknowledgments} -\endgroup -|endTeXexample -to make a \CS{nosechead} which looks like a |\section|. - -\bigskip - - Ordinarily the order of appearance of the sections of a document -are not changed, so there is no automatic mechanism for labeling the -sections. Any of the divisions described above can be labeled by -inserting \cs{label}\arg{label} into the title text. The \meta{label} -should have the form \meta{type.name}, where \meta{type} is |chap|, -|sect|, etc., to avoid possible conflicts with other kinds of labels. -The corresponding numbers can then be referred to with -|\use{|\meta{type.name}|}|, as described in \Sect{labels}. - - If the title of a chapter or section is too long, a break in -the line can be inserted with the \cs{n} command. This will also -break the line in the title when it appears in the table of contents. -If running headlines are being used (see \Sect{headline}) then only the -first part of the title, up to the \cs{n}, will be used for the running -headline. -You can always reset the headline by hand with |\setHeadline| -(see \Sect{headline}). - - You can customize the behavior of the section-making macros by -adding your own definitions for the macros -\index{customization!chapters and sections}% -\example -\CS{everychapter}, \CS{everysection}, \CS{everysubsection}, -\CS{everysubsubsection}, -\endexample -which are called immediately before making the corresponding -division of the document, or for the macros -\example -\CS{afterchapter}, \CS{aftersection}, \CS{aftersubsection}, -\CS{aftersubsubsection}, -\endexample -which are called immediately afterwards. By default all of these macros -do nothing. As an example, if you wanted every section to begin on a -new page, and you wanted numbered footnotes created by \cs{NFootnote} to -start over counting from one at the begining of each section, you -could define: -\TeXexample -\def\everysection{\vfill\supereject \footnum=0} -|endTeXexample - -The full text of the title of the current chapter, section, and -subsection is saved in \CS{ChapterTitle}, \CS{SectionTitle}, and -\CS{SubsectionTitle}, so that you may do whatever you want with these -later in the chapter or section. An example of how these might be -used with \CS{aftersubsection} to change the running headlines is -given in \Sect{headline}. - - -Another way you can control the results produced by \CS{chapter} and -\CS{section} is to change the way the chapter or section number is -printed, by changing the definitions of the macros \CS{ChapterStyle}, -\CS{SectionStyle}, or \CS{SubsectionStyle}. These macros take -one argument, the chapter or section number, and by default they simply -return that argument. By substituting your own definition you can do -almost anything you like to the section number. For example, it is -often desired that the section number printed as a Roman numeral -rather than as an Arabic numeral. The following definition will convert -the section number to an upper-case Roman numeral: -\TeXexample -\def\SectionStyle#1{\uppercase\expandafter{\romannumeral #1}} -|endTeXexample - -Even more customized behavior of the section-making macros is possible. -For example, \cs{Tbf} and \cs{tbf} can also be defined as macros which -take a single argument, which is arranged to be the title of the -section or chapter. -To see how this works it may be best to look at the definitions of -\CS{chapter} and \CS{section} and the like in the source file -|TXSsects.tex|. For very specialized applications you could even copy -the definitions in this file to the TXSmods.tex file or your own -personal style file and then alter them however you like. - - -%==================================================* - -\subsection{The Master File} - - An useful concept for typesetting a long document is that of -the\index{master file} {\em Master File}. -The idea is to create one small file which initializes \TeXsis\ with -\cs{texsis}, makes any special definitions or sets parameters, and -then reads in the actual text of the document in sections using the -|\input| command. -As a simple example consider a manuscript called MUONS. -The master file is called |MUONS.tex|, and contains the following: -\TeXexample -|smalltt\texsis % initialize TeXsis -\input MyMacros % special macros for this paper -\input MUONSr % references for the paper -\input MUONS0 % title page for the paper -\input MUONS1 % first section of manuscript -\input MUONS2 % second section of manuscript -\ListReferences % print the reference list -\end -|endTeXexample -The file |MyMacros.tex| contains any special macro definitions used -in this paper. (If there are none, leave this line out.) The -file |MUONSr.tex| contains the references used in this paper, -beginning with |\referencelist| and ending with -|\endreferencelist|, as described in \Sect{refs}. The -file |MUONS0.tex| contains the commands for producing the title -page of the paper, as described in \Sect{fmts}. The -actual text of the manuscript is divided into two parts, which -are kept in the files |MUONS1.tex| and |MUONS2.tex|. To process the -entire document one simply runs \TeXsis\ on the master file with -the command -\TeXexample -texsis MUONS -|endTeXexample -\noindent -If you are familiar with computer programming you may think of -the master file as the main program and the other files as -subroutines called by the main program. - - One of the great advantages of using a master file, aside from -keeping the manuscript organized, is that it lets you work on a single -section of the paper at a time. For example, suppose you want to -run off a draft of just the first section of the paper called MUONS -above. You don't need to process the references, the title page, -or the second section of the paper. Recall that the percent sign -(|%|) is the comment character in \TeX\ --- anything appearing on -a line after a |%| is ignored by \TeX. Thus we simply edit the -master file and put a |%| in front of certain lines, like this: -\TeXexample -|smalltt\texsis % initialize TeXsis -\draft % optional draft mode -\input MyMacros % special macros for this paper -% \input MUONSr % references for the paper -% \input MUONS0 % title page for the paper -\input MUONS1 % first section of manuscript -% \input MUONS2 % section section of manuscript -% \ListReferences % print the references -\end -|endTeXexample -Now when you run \TeXsis\ on this file only the first section of -the paper will be processed, but it will use the macros defined -in |MyMacros.tex|, as well as any other definitions that you might -add to the master file. Once the first section is error free you -can repeat the process on the second section of the paper, -without rerunning the first section. After both sections are -correct you can reinstate all lines in the master file and -process the whole document. - -%==================================================* - -\subsection{Table of Contents \label{sect.conts}} - -The section-making macros just described automatically make an entry in -a \idx{table of contents} for the document being prepared. The title of -the chapter or section and the page number are stored in a table of -contents file (which ends with the extension ``|.toc|'') until needed, -then the table of contents is created simply -by saying \CS{Contents}. -If your document is divided into chapters, -like a book, the table of contents should appear on a page with a Roman -numeral page number (which is obtained by setting \cs{pageno} to a -negative value). For example: -\TeXexample -\book % document format for a book -\input Chapt1 % input chapters... -... -\vfill\supereject % eject last page, including figures -\pageno=-3 % print on pages iii, iv, ... -\nosechead{Contents} % label TOC without section # -\Contents % generate table of contents -|endTeXexample - -The table of contents is usually printed at the {\sl end\/} of the -document so that all the page numbers are correct. You then -simply move these pages to the front of the document by hand. -Alternately, you can say \CS{Contents} at the beginning of your document -to read in the table of contents file produced by a previous run of -\TeXsis, although then you must process the document twice to be sure -that the page numbers are correct. - -It is important to note that nothing is written to the table of contents -file unless \CS{Contentstrue} is set. The default for most documents -is \CS{Contentsfalse}, since one usually does not want a table of -contents for a short paper or a memo or a letter. The exceptions are -\cs{book} and \cs{thesis}, which automatically set -\CS{Contentstrue}. In any case, if you want a table of contents -you can explicitly state \CS{Contentstrue}. - - While an entry in the table of contents is created by -\cs{chapter} or \cs{section}, no entry is made for \cs{nosechead}. In -this case, or in any case, you can insert an entry into the table of -contents ``by hand'' by saying -\example -\CS{addTOC}\arg{level}\arg{title}\arg{page} -\endexample -where \meta{level} is the level of division for the entry being made, -with 0 for chapters, 1 for sections and 2 for subsections. This -controls how much vertical space is put around the table of contents -entry and how much the entry is indented in the list. -% -The \meta{title} is the text of the title as it should appear in the -table of contents. Text which is too long for one line will be split -over several lines, but you can force a line break where you want one -with \cs{n}. The \meta{page} is the page number for the entry you are -making. Generally you'll use \cs{folio} here to just use the current -page number, whatever that may be. Thus to make a section level entry -in the table of contents having the title ``Acknowledgments'' you would -simply say -\TeXexample -\addTOC{1}{Acknowledgments}{\folio} -|endTeXexample - -Entries made in the table of contents by \cs{chapter}, \cs{section}, -etc. will optionally begin with the chapter or section number, depending -upon whether \cs{showchaptIDtrue} and \cs{showsectIDtrue} are selected. -The decision whether or not to show the chapter or section number is -made when the table of contents is printed by \CS{Contents}, not when -the \cs{chapter} or \cs{section} is begun. Thus it is possible to have -the section numbers showing at the beginning of the section, but to then -have no section numbers in the table of contents by saying -\cs{showsectIDfalse} immediately before saying \CS{Contents}. - -\bigbreak - -It is possible to write commands or other text to the table of contents -file while it is being created, using the command -\CS{TOCwrite}\arg{stuff}. -For example, the heading separating the appendices from the rest of -the entries in the table of contents of this Manual was created by -saying -\TeXexample -\TOCwrite{\bigskip\noexpand\nosechead{Appendices:}} -|endTeXexample -\noindent -before the appendices were created. The \cs{noexpand} prevents the -|\nosechead| from being expanded until later, after the table of contents -file is read back in by \CS{Contents} - - -\bigbreak - - What if you want the table of contents to appear in the table -of contents itself!? Naturally it should appear first (even though it -may be printed at the end of the document). You can use the tagging -mechanism described in \Sect{labels} to make a ``forward reference'' -to the page number. At the beginning of the document you can create -the table of contents entry by saying -\TeXexample -\addTOC{0}{Table of Contents}{\noexpand\use{page.TOC}} -|endTeXexample -\noindent -The \cs{noexpand} prevents the \cs{use} from being expanded until later, -after the table of contents file is read back in. Later, when you actually -print the table of contents you would first tag the page number, then -invoke \CS{Contents}, like so: -\TeXexample -\nosechead{Table of Contents} -\tag{page.TOC}{\folio} -\Contents -|endTeXexample - -\Ignore % NO, WE DON'T DO IT -\noindent -As a demonstration of this we have done this for the table of contents -for this manual. For more information about \cs{tag} and \cs{use} see -\Sect{labels}.\relax -\endIgnore - -%======================================================================* - -\subsection{Running Headlines and Footlines \label{sect.headline}} - - In Plain \TeX, whenever a page is output an optional headline -and footline are added at the top and bottom of the page. In \TeXsis\ -the footline is normally blank, while the headline contains the page -number in the upper right corner. The \cs{book} and \cs{thesis} formats -also display a running headline, centered in 10~pt.\ italic type, -containing the chapter or section title. -Running headlines and page numbers are {\bf not} printed on any -page containing a \cs{title} or a new \cs{chapter}. -For an example of running headlines look at the top of -any page in this Manual. - - \CS{nopagenumbers} turns off the running headlines and -footlines, just as it does in Plain \TeX. In \TeXsis\ saying -\CS{pagenumbers} restores the standard headlines and footlines. -Saying \CS{bookpagenumbers} puts odd page numbers in the upper right -corner and even page numbers in the upper left corner, the normal -convention for books. This is the default for \cs{book}. - - \CS{RunningHeadstrue}, the default for \cs{book} (and -\cs{thesis}), displays the running headline text \cs{HeadText}, as well -as the page number. |\RunningHeadsfalse| turns off the running -headlines but leaves the page numbers. \cs{HeadText} is defined by -\cs{chapter} to be the chapter title in 10~pt.\ italic type; if no -chapters are used, then it is defined by \cs{section} to be the section -title. You can change the running headline yourself with the command -\CS{setHeadline}\arg{text}. For example, the headline at the top of -this page could have been created by saying -\example\tt -\CS{setHeadline}|{|\HeadText|}| -\endexample -The headline text appears in typestyle \CS{HeadFont}, which -you can change to suit your tastes. The default is -|\tenit|, -but for this manual we used |\def\HeadFont{\tensl}|. - - -Running headlines are not normally affected by \cs{subsection}, but it -is easy to have each subsection change the runing headlines by -defining \cs{aftersubsection} to include a \CS{setHeadline} command. -As a useful example, suppose that each subsection is to have a running -headline composed of both the title of the section and the title of -the subsection. You could have this done automatically by defining -something like: -\TeXexample -\def\aftersubsection{\setHeadline{\SectionTitle: \SubsectionTitle}} -|endTeXexample -The rest of this section will have such running headlines as an -example. -\def\aftersubsection{\setHeadline{\SectionTitle: \SubsectionTitle}} -\bigskip %<-- needed to force page break before next section! - - -%======================================================================* - -\subsection{How to Make an Index \label{sect.index}} - -The traditional way to make an index for a book was to write key~words -on 3$\times$5 ``index'' cards, and to then write on these card the -numbers of the pages on which the key words occurred. -The cards were then sorted by hand and then their contents also sorted -and typed in order to make the index. -This was a tedious and time consuming task. -Fortunately this whole process has been modernized so that an index -can be made almost automatically. -Still, it takes a certain amount of care to create a useful, well -constructed index. -An important part of designing a good index is deciding which -key~words will be useful in the index and which key~words will not. -A computer cannot make these decisions for you. - -Making an index with \TeX\ still involves collecting the index entries, -sorting them (and removing duplicate references), and then producing the -final index. The first and last steps are accomplished with a set of -plain \TeX\ macros known as |index.tex|, while the sorting and collating -of the index entries is done by a separate computer program called -|makeindex|.\index{makeindex}\ This is how we made the index for this -Manual, which starts on page~\use{pg.index}. - -To create an entry in the index you can say \CS{index}\arg{key}, where -\meta{key} is the key~word to be entered into the index, or more simply -you can say \CS{idx}\arg{word}, which both includes the word in the -text and makes an index entry for it; saying ``\CS{idx}|{Frisbee}|'' -is the same as saying ``|Frisbee|\CS{index}|{Frisbee}|''. -Either of these indexing commands writes the index entry to a file -with the name extension ``|.idx|''. -Once your document has been processed by \TeX\ this file will contain -all of the ``raw'' index entries. - -The entries in the raw index file are not sorted, and there may be many -duplications. The |makeindex|\index{makeindex} program will sort the -index entries and reformat them in a form appropriate for printing the -index. The output from the |makeindex| program is a file with the -extension ``|.ind|''. So if your -manuscript file is called |myfile.tex| and you have run it through -\TeXsis\ you should find a file called |myfile.idx| containing the raw -index entries. You would run the |makeindex| program like so, -\example -|makeindex myfile.idx| -\endexample -to produce the processed index file |myfile.ind|. -(You can leave off the |.idx| extension for the raw file and |makeindex| -will assume it.) - -To print the index you can either include it in another pass of the full -document, by saying -\TeXexample -\input \jobname.ind -|endTeXexample -\noindent -in the manuscript file, or you can print it separately by adding -``|\input index|'' to the begining of the |myfile.ind| file and running -it through \TeX\ or \TeXsis. - -If you set \CS{markindextrue} then indexed words selected with \CS{idx} -will appear in the printed output inside a ruled box -like so: -\begingroup -\markindextrue \idx{Frisbee}. -\endgroup -The box does not interfere with or change the word or line spacing. -These ``proof marks'' are useful for draft copies when you are putting -together the index, but obviously you do not want them to appear in the -final copy, so the default is |\markindexfalse|. - -The |index.tex| macros are distributed with \TeXsis, but |makeindex| -is not. -If you do not have the |makeindex| program you can get the C source -code for it from the \TeXsis\ anonymous ftp site, -|ftp.texsis.org|. -It is a well-known program, and is also available from CTAN in the -directory {\tt indexing/makeindex}. -Note that the |index.tex| macros work with plain \TeX\ as well as -\TeXsis, and they work with |makeindex| in its default mode, even -though that default mode was originally intended for \LaTeX\ code. - -For more information about how to make full use of |makeindex| see the -file |index.tex|, the Unix man page for makeindex(1), and the original -paper by Chen and Harrison\reference{makeindex} Pehong Chen and -Michael A. Harrison, ``Index Preparation and Processing'', in {\sl -Software: Practice and Experience}, \vol{19}, 897-915 (1988) -\endreference -describing how they designed the |makeindex| program. - -\def\aftersubsection{\relax} - -%>>> EOF TXSsects.doc <<< diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSsite.000 b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSsite.000 deleted file mode 100644 index a9825ef9621..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSsite.000 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,164 +0,0 @@ -%% file: TXSsite.tex (TeXsis version 2.17) -% $Revision: 18.0 $ : $Date: 2000/05/17 00:45:04 $ : $Author: myers $ -%======================================================================* -% This is the site dependent info file for TeXsis. Edit the things -% below to match your installation. Take out what you don't need or -% want and add any local macros or other stuff you want. Anything -% between \Ignore and \endIgnore is ignored, but will become active if -% you remove the \Ignore. Remember, this file is only read in once when -% texsis.fmt is made! - -% Change name to your own institution or site here: - -\message{Site dependent info.... Generic version.} - -\ATunlock % make @ a letter - -%===================================* -% \ORGANIZATION is the name of the issuing organization, which -% appears at the top of the title page, or on a \Memo. -% You can also change it before you call \titlepage. - -\Ignore % an example using mixed caps - \def\ORGANIZATION{{\eightrm {\tenrm B}ANSAI {\tenrm I}NSTITUTE}} -\endIgnore - -\def\ORGANIZATION{} - -%===================================* -% \LandscapeSpecial turns on landscape mode on the laser printer. -% How this is done is very site dependent. Uncomment the version -% that works for you, or insert your own if these don't work. - -% 1) This is how dv2ips does it, and you need to have landscape.ps -% accesable to the filter program - -\Ignore - \def\LandscapeSpecial{\special{psfile=landscape.ps}} -\endIgnore - -% 2) This is how dvips (Rokicki's version 5.484 and later) does it: - -\def\LandscapeSpecial{\special{papersize=11in,8.5in}} - - -%===================================* -% \manualfeed tries to put the printer in Manual Feed mode, for -% printing on letterhead stationary or envelopes. -% How you do this is really installation specific. - -% If you use 'dvi2ps' then use \special to read the file manfeed.ps. -% You can get it from ftp://feynman.physics.lsa.umich.edu/texsis/etc/manfeed.ps - -\Ignore - \def\manualfeed{\emsg{\@comment MANUAL FEED MODE SELECTED!}% - \special{psfile=manfeed.ps}} -\endIgnore - -% Rokicki's dvips will do manual feed if you use 'dvips -m' -% but this tries to do the same thing (and doesn't work! -EAM 98/03/06) - -\Ignore - \def\manualfeed{\emsg{\@comment MANUAL FEED MODE SELECTED!}% - \special{! @manualfeed}} -\endIgnore - - -%===================================* -% \@DOCcode is the document code that appears in the upper right -% part of the title page of a \preprint. It starts out at its default -% value, and is changed by calling \pubcode{<code>} before you call -% \titlepage. If you don't use anything you'll get \TeXsis. - -\Ignore - \def\@DOCcode{UTREL\hbox to 1.5cm{\hss}} -\endIgnore - -%===================================* -% \banner produces a banner across the top of the title page for -% a \preprint. Customize this however you like. - -\def\banner{\vskip 0pt - \line{{\ninepoint\@PUBdate \hfil - \hbox{\vbox{\hrule\vskip 4pt \hbox{\ORGANIZATION}\vskip 4pt\hrule}}% % - \hfil \@DOCcode}}% - \vskip 1.0cm -} - -\def\@PUBdate{\uppercase{\today}} % default is today - - -%===================================* -% \letterhead{phone} is for copying onto letterhead stationary. -% It just puts on the date and a phone number (if given). - -% THIS IS JUST AN EXAMPLE - MODIFY FOR YOUR OWN INSTITUTION. - -\Ignore -\def\letterhead#1{% letterhead for copying onto Univ. Michigan stationary - \def\PhoneNumber{#1}% - \emsg{Positioning date/phone for University of Michigan letterhead.}% - \begingroup % this header stuff is local - \parskip=0pt \parindent=0pt % - \null\vskip 0.6in % skip down to date line - \line{\hfill \hbox to 5in{\tensl \today\hfill}}% Today's Date - \line{\tenss \hfill (734) - \ifx\PhoneNumber\empty 764-4437\else \PhoneNumber\fi}% - \ifx\Email\undefined\else\line{\hfill \tt \Email}\fi - \vskip 10pt plus 1fil - \endgroup} -\endIgnore - -%===================================* -% \UMletterhead{phone} is a facsimile of the University of Michigan -% stationary. If \Email is defined it is included under the phone number. - -% THIS IS JUST AN EXAMPLE - MODIFY FOR YOUR OWN INSTITUTION. -% It uses a PostScript image of the Univ. Michigan seal, umseal.ps - -\Ignore -\def\UMletterhead#1{% Facsimile of UM letterhead - \def\PhoneNumber{#1}% - \begingroup % make these these things local - \null\vskip -27pt % masthead up a bit to match real thing - \UMmasthead % UM seal and name - \line{\hfill \hbox to 5in{\tensl \today\hfill}}% Today's Date - \line{\tenss \hfill (734) - \ifx\PhoneNumber\empty 764-4437\else \PhoneNumber\fi}% - \ifx\Email\undefined\else\line{\hfill \tt \Email}\fi - \vskip 10pt plus 1fil - \endgroup} - -\def\UMseal{{\hbox{\epsfbox{umseal.eps}}}}% - -\def\UMmasthead{\line{\llap{\UMseal\hskip -35pt}\hfill - \hbox{\vbox{\hsize=13.99cm \def\LC##1{{\twentyfourpoint\bf ##1}}% - \line{\hfill \twentypoint\bf \LC{T}HE \LC{U}NIVERSITY OF \LC{M}ICHIGAN}% - \vskip 0.85cm - \line{\tenss DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS \hfill 2071 Randall Laboratory}% - \line{\tenss \hfill Ann Arbor, MI 48109-1120}% - }}}}% -\endIgnore - -%===================================* -% Mailing Labels: you may have to change these depending on your -% printer and the kind of labels you use. - -\Ignore - -% This is for the "standard" inch high, 3 across the page labels - -\lblHsize=7.32cm % width of standard label -\lblVsize=2.54cm % height of standard label -\fullHsize=8.5in % hsize for page -\fullVsize=11.0in % vsize for page - -\lblVoffset=0pt % shift down this much -\lblHoffset=-1.8cm % shift over this much - -\endIgnore - -%>>> EOF TXSsite.tex <<< - - - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSsymb.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSsymb.doc deleted file mode 100644 index eef1dc39730..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSsymb.doc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,199 +0,0 @@ -%% file: TXSsymb.doc - Special Symbols - TeXsis version 2.18 -%% @(#) $Id: TXSsymb.doc,v 18.2 2000/05/17 00:19:46 myers Exp $ -%======================================================================* -% (C) Copyright 1989, 1992, 1995, 1997 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige -% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications -% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL). -% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL -%======================================================================* -\ifx\undefined\meta \texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\input Manual.aux\draft\fi - -\subsection{Special Symbols \label{sect.symb}} - -\TeXsis\ defines some special symbols and other constructions which -are not included in plain \TeX\ and which either are commonly used -by physicists or are not trivial to construct. The following -macros, which are listed here by related groups, provide these -additional special symbols for use in equations: -\index{symbols!physics} -\bigskip -\itemize - \itm \CS{bra}\arg{text} and \CS{ket}\arg{text} produce the -notations $\bra{\hbox{\it text}}$ and $\ket{\hbox{\it text}}$ -respectively for quantum mechanical states. \CS{vev}\arg{text} -produces $\vev{\hbox{\it text}}$ for a VEV (\idx{Vacuum Expectation Value}). - - \itm \CS{del}, \CS{grad}, and \CS{square} produce the notations -$\del$, $\grad$, and $\square$ for various derivatives. (The first two -are just synonyms for \cs{partial} and \cs{nabla}.) - - \itm \CS{degrees} is the degrees symbol. For example, |90\degrees| -produces ``90\degrees''. You can use \CS{degree} as a synonym. These -work equally well in math or text mode. - - \itm \CS{frac}\arg{numerator}\arg{denominator} produces the fraction -|{|\<numerator> |\over| \<de\-nomi\-nator>|}|, while -\hskip 0pt plus 6pt\CS{smallfrac}\arg{numerator}\arg{denominator} -\hskip 0pt plus 6pt -produces the same fraction in the smaller -subscript style type. \CS{half} produces a $\half$ in a size appropriate -to its usage. - - \itm \CS{simle} and \CS{simge} make the symbols $\simle$ and -$\simge$ to indicate "less than about" and "greater than about," -respectively. Synonyms for these are \CS{ltsim} and \CS{gtsim}. - - \itm \CS{parenbar} puts a bar in parentheses above a character; -this is often used to indicate either a particle or its antiparticle. -\CS{nunubar} and \CS{ppbar} are special cases. Thus -\TeXexample -$$ n \parenbar{n} \qquad \nu \nunubar \qquad p \ppbar $$ -|endTeXexample -gives -$$ -n \parenbar{n} \qquad \nu \nunubar \qquad p \ppbar -$$ - -\goodbreak - - \itm \CS{subrightarrow}\arg{text} puts the text under a right -arrow of the appropriate length. Thus -\TeXexample -$$ f(x) \subrightarrow{x \to 0} f(0) $$ -|endTeXexample -gives -$$ -f(x) \subrightarrow{x \to 0} f(0) -$$ - - \itm \CS{buildchar}\arg{\#1}\arg{\#2}\arg{\#3} gives character |#1| with -|#2| above it and |#3| below it, allowing the construction of a variety -of special symbols. \CS{overcirc} is a special case of this which puts -a small circle above a character, as in $\overcirc R$. This is often -used in general relativity and related fields. - - \itm \CS{vbigl}\arg{delim}\arg{size} and -\CS{vbigr}\arg{delim}\arg{size} produce very (or variably) big -delimiters, generalizing the Plain \TeX\ macros \cs{bigl}, \cs{Bigr}, -etc. They produce, respectively, the left and right delimiters -\meta{delim} with height \meta{size}, which can be given in pt., cm., -in., or any other valid units. Any valid delimiter may be used, but you -must be careful if you use parentheses and automatic parenthesis sizing -is also in effect (\Sect{paren}), because these conflict. You must -either turn off automatic parenthesis sizing (with \cs{offparens}) or -use \cs{lparen} or \cs{rparen} in place of `|(|' and `|)|'. - -\itm \CS{Leftcases}\arg{size} and \CS{Rightcases}\arg{size} give left -and right braces of size \meta{size} smashed to zero height; these can -be used in place of the \cs{cases} of Plain \TeX\ when it is desired to -put an equation number on each line. For example, -\TeXexample -|smalltt$$\EQNalign{ -m_e &= ~.511~\MeV \EQN lep;a \cr -m_\mu &= ~105~\MeV - \quad \Rightcases{50pt} \quad {\rm Leptons} - \EQN lep;b \cr -m_\tau &= 1784~\MeV \EQN lep;c \cr} -$$ -|endTeXexample -gives\index{equations!alignment} -$$\EQNalign{ -m_e &= ~.511~\MeV \EQN lep;a \cr -m_\mu &= ~105~\MeV - \quad \Rightcases{50pt} \quad {\rm Leptons} - \EQN lep;b \cr -m_\tau &= 1784~\MeV \EQN lep;c \cr} -$$ -Note that |\Leftcases| and |\Rightcases| do not provide automatic -spacing, which must be adjusted by the user as in the previous example. -There seems to be no simple way to obtain automatic spacing and to -allow an equation number on each line. - - - \itm \CS{sterling} produces the British currency mark \sterling. - - \itm The astronomical symbols for the sun and the earth are -\CS{sun} and \CS{earth}. For example, |$M_\sun$| and |$M_\earth$| give -$M_\sun$ and $M_\earth$. You can also use them outside of math mode. - - - \itm \CS{dimensions}\arg{units}\arg{power} is used for dimensional -analysis. The units appear in square brackets, raised to the given -power. For example to produce \dimensions{mass}{-3} you would type -|\dimensions{mass}{-3}|. - - \itm \CS{slashchar}\arg{letter} puts a slash through a character, the -notation for the contraction of a vector with Dirac $\gamma$ matrices -in Feynman graphs. For example -\TeXexample -$$ {\cal L} = - \bar\psi[i\slashchar{\partial} - e\slashchar{A}-m]\psi $$ -|endTeXexample -gives -$$ -{\cal L} = - \bar\psi[i\slashchar{\partial} - e\slashchar{A}-m]\psi -\,. -$$ -The results produced by |\slashchar| are not as good as one would -like. You can do somewhat better by adjusting the kerning of the |/| -by hand for each character. For example, -\TeXexample -\def\Aslash{A\kern -0.47em/} -|endTeXexample -\def\Aslash{A\kern -0.47em/}% -produces ``$\Aslash$''. But note that the angle of the slash is still -not quite what one would like for a slashed ``$A$.'' To really get good -looking slashed characters someone will have to create a new slashed -character math font using MetaFont. Meanwhile you can get by with -|\slashchar| or define your own using kerning. - -\enditemize -\bigskip\pagecheck{0.2\vsize} - - Abbreviations for units are normally set in Roman type even when used -in formulas. Special function (e.g., sine, cosine and logarithm) or -operator names are also set in Roman type, and \TeXsis\ adds some new -names to go with the old standards. - -\itemize - \itm \CS{Tr} and \CS{tr} give ``$\Tr$'' and ``$\tr$'' respectively for the -trace of an operator or of a matrix. \CS{diag} is used to denote a -diagonal matrix, as in $\eta_{\mu\nu}=\diag(-1,1,1,1)$. - - \itm \CS{real} and \CS{imag} give the symbols $\real$ and $\imag$ -for the real and imaginary parts of an expression; the spacing is like -that for any other function or operator. - - \itm \CS{eV}, \CS{keV}, \CS{MeV}, \CS{GeV}, and \CS{TeV} give the -abbreviations for energy units $\eV$, $\keV$, $\MeV$, $\GeV$, and -$\TeV$ respectively. - - \itm \CS{mb}, \CS{mub}, \CS{nb}, \CS{pb}, and \CS{fb} give the -abbreviations for cross section units $\mb$, $\mub$, $\nb$, $\pb$, and -$\fb$ respectively, while \CS{cmsec} gives $\cmsec$, the standard units -for luminosity in colliding beam accelerators. - - \itm \CS{units}\arg{name} is a generic macro to print in Roman type -the name of any units not covered by the macros above. For example, -you can say \CS{units}|{furlongs}| and \CS{units}|{fortnights}| -if you are using that particular system of units. -\enditemize - - - - Note that all of the abbreviations for units above are defined -without any spacing; to produce -$$ -{\cal L} = 10^{33}\,\cmsec, \qquad p_\perp = 8.3\,\GeV -$$ -you should type -\TeXexample -$$ -{\cal L} = 10^{33}\,\cmsec, \qquad p_\perp = 8.3\,\GeV -$$ -|endTeXexample -with a |\,| to make a thin space between the number and the units. - - -%>>> EOF TXSsymb.doc <<< diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXStags.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXStags.doc deleted file mode 100644 index 768e4f1692f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXStags.doc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,212 +0,0 @@ -%% file: TXStags.doc - Tags and Labels - TeXsis version 2.18 -%% @(#) $Id: TXStags.doc,v 18.1 1999/07/30 18:34:24 myers Exp $ -%======================================================================* -% (C) Copyright 1989, 1992, 1997 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige -% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications -% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL). -% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL -%======================================================================* -\ifx\undefined\meta \texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\draft\input Manual.aux\fi - - -\section{Labels and Tags \label{sect.labels}} - -One of the most useful features of \TeXsis\ is that it automatically -numbers things like equations and references and lets you refer to -these things by means of symbolic names or ``labels.'' -This section explains how to get the most use out of this labeling -mechanism. - -\subsection{Tagging} - - Here is a rough outline of how labeling or ``tagging'' works. -\TeXsis\ keeps track of numbers for equations, figures, tables, and -other useful things in counters. Whenever you create a new equation, -figure, table or reference the appropriate counter is incremented. At -the same time, a new macro instruction is defined, with the label -incorporated into the name, and the definition of this macro is -simply the (new) value of the counter. Thus if you create a displayed -equation and label it ``Newton'' then a macro called ``|\Eq.Newton|'' is -created and it is automatically defined to be whatever the next number -is for the equation. - - The actual mechanism is somewhat more subtle. Normally you can -only use letters in macro names, but \TeXsis\ uses \cs{csname} |...| -\cs{endcsname} to allow numbers and punctuation to be used in -labels. -Also, an extra |@| is added at the beginning and end of each macro -name. -If this were not done then, for example, using ``|end|'' as a label -(using \CS{tag}) could redefine \cs{end}, and you would not be able to -get out of \TeX! -So the macro containing the equation number for the equation named -``Newton'' actually ends up being named ``|\@Eq.Newton@|''. - - Once a label macro is defined you can use it to refer to the -thing it labels, and it will yield the proper number. -In the case of the equation called ``Newton,'' saying |\Eq{Newton}| is -really saying |Eq.~(\@Eq.Newton@)|. -(Again, since punctuation is not allowed in names, \TeXsis\ actually -uses \cs{csname} |...| \cs{endcsname} in the definition.) -References, equations, figures, tables, etc., all produce their -numbers in this way. - - Each of the \TeXsis\ macros which uses labels attaches to -the label a unique prefix identifying the kind of object labeled. -These objects and the corresponding prefixes are shown in -\Tbl{labels}. -Because of these prefixes the same label can be used for different -kinds of objects. -For example, the name ``Witten'' can be used as a label for an -equation and as a reference, since their internal labels are -|Eq.Witten| and |Ref.Witten|, respectively (and in reality the names -are bracketed by |@| characters). -The prefixes are automatically inserted by \TeXsis\ macros like -\cs{Eq} and \cs{cite}. - - At the most primitive level you can always associate a label with -some value by saying \CS{tag}\arg{label\/}\arg{value}. You can then -reference the value, whatever it is, by its name using the command -\CS{use}\arg{label\/}. In this case if there is to be a prefix in the -label you must put it in explicitly. Thus to say just the number of the -equation labeled ``Newton'' without any parentheses or anything you -would say |\use{Eq.Newton}|. To get the number of the reference labeled -``Knuth'' you would say |\use{Ref.Knuth}|, which produces -``\use{Ref.Knuth}'' because ``Knuth'' is the label of the first document -we referenced in this manual and ``Ref'' is the prefix used for -references. - -\table{labels} -\caption{Prefixes for labels and the corresponding counters for -various objects.} -\def\CS#1{{\tt\char92{#1}}} -\def\\{\hfill} -\ruledtable -Entity \\| Tag Prefix | Counter \CR -Corollary \\| {\tt Cor.} | \CS{corollarynum} \\\cr -Definition \\| {\tt Df.} | \CS{definitionnum} \\\cr -Equation \\| {\tt Eq.} | \CS{eqnum} \\\cr -Figure \\| {\tt Fg.} | \CS{fignum} \\\cr -Lemma \\| {\tt Lem.} | \CS{lemmanum} \\\cr -Reference \\| {\tt Ref.} | \CS{refnum} \\\cr -Table \\| {\tt Tb.} | \CS{tabnum} \\\cr -Theorem \\| {\tt Thm.} | \CS{theoremnum} \\ -\endruledtable -\endtable - - One particularly useful way to use \CS{tag} and \CS{use} is to -refer to a topic which is discussed on some other page in the -document. -On the page you want to reference you could define the tag -``page.cool'' to be the page number by saying -\CS{tag}|{page.cool}{|\cs{folio}|}|. -Then somewhere else in the document if you want to refer to the -information on that page you could do so with -\CS{use}|{page.cool}|, as in ``This difficulty is discussed in -more detail on page |\use{page.cool}|.'' -Then even if the document is rearranged so that the page numbers -change, the page number you referred to will come out correct. - -Here is another useful example. -Suppose you want to state the number of questions at the begining of -an examination (or similarly, the number of chapters in a book). -A count of the questions could be kept in |\Qcount|, but it won't be -set correctly until the end of the job. -Even so, when the count is known we can tag it with a name like ``NQ'' -and use it in the text with |\use{NQ}|. -The first time this is encountered it will display as an undefined tag -and an error message will appear in the log. -But at the end of the document we say -\TeXexample -\tag{NQ}{\Qcount} -|endTeXexample to assign the final value of |\Qcount| to the -tag~``NQ''. -The next time the job is run saying |\use{NQ}| will be defined as the -value from the previous run. -Unless you've recently changed things (by adding or removing a -question) then this will be the correct count. - - - Knowing about \CS{use} and the prefixes in \Tbl{labels} also lets you -change how the macros that refer to these objects work. For example, to -refer to figure~\use{Fg.Penguin} in section~\use{sect.figs} you would -normally say \cs{Fig}|{Penguin}|. This produces -``Fig.~\use{Fg.Penguin},'' but suppose you want it to say the full word -``figure'' instead of just ``Fig.'' You can make this change throughout -the document simply by changing the definition of \cs{Fig} to: -\TeXexample -\def\Fig#1{figure~\use{Fg.#1}} -|endTeXexample -\noindent -Then ``\cs{Fig}|{Penguin}|'' would produce ``figure~\use{Fg.Penguin}.'' - - -\bigskip - - Whenever you create any of the objects listed in \Tbl{labels} a -label is automatically created. However, chapters, sections, and -subsections are not automatically labeled because their values are not -ordinarily changed. If you want to remember the number of a chapter or -section of your document to be able to refer to it somewhere else, put -\CS{label}\arg{label\/} in the text of the title of the chapter or -section. \CS{label}\arg{label\/} is the same as -\CS{tag}\arg{label\/}\arg{counter}, where \meta{counter} is the current -section or chapter number, as appropriate. For example you might have: -\TeXexample -\section{Supersymmetry and Supergravity \label{sect.SUSY}} -|endTeXexample -\noindent -To refer to that section later on you would say |\use{sect.SUSY}|. -Note that \CS{label} does not insert any prefix in front of the label, -so you must include it explicitly if you want one. -We suggest ``sect'' for sections, ``chapt'' for chapters, and so -forth, but you are free to use whatever you want. - - -%==================================================* -\pagecheck{0.33\vsize} - -\subsection{Forward References} - -If you label an equation or a figure or a section you can refer to -the number of that object later in the text, but what if you want to -refer to the thing before it has been tagged? Then the label won't -exist yet. This is called making a forward reference. To allow for -this \TeXsis\ also writes the definition of every label to an auxiliary -file, which has a name ending in |.aux|. The label will still be -undefined the first time you make the forward reference, but the next -time you run the document through \TeXsis\ it will automatically read in -the auxiliary file at the beginning of the job and define the label. -Thus on the second pass the label will already be defined when it is -called for. Having to make a second pass may sound like extra work, -but when you are editing a document and putting the finishing -touches on it you will find you end up making the extra pass without -thinking about it. Just don't delete the |.aux| file between runs. -\index{forward references} - - If you try to reference a label that does not exist you'll be -told so at the end of the run (when you say \cs{bye}) and another pass -will be suggested. Undefined references are also noted in the log file -when they occur, and the label itself is inserted into the output text -in boldface to make it easier for you to track down the problem. In -\cs{draft} mode the mark ``{\tt UNDEF}'' is also put in the right -margin to help you find the problem. - -% Describe \twopass here, if we ever decide to publicize it - - - -%==================================================* -\pagecheck{0.33\vsize} - -\subsection{Hypertext \label{sect.hypertext}} - -(Documentation for Hypertext linking will go here) - - - - - - - -%>>> EOF TXStags.doc <<< diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/index.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/index.tex deleted file mode 100644 index dbb9a09bf13..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/index.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,296 +0,0 @@ -%% file: index.tex - creating an index - TeXsis 2.18 -% @(#) $Id: index.tex,v 18.0 2000/05/16 22:37:11 myers Exp $ -%======================================================================* -% index.tex -- Macros for creating an index using MakeIndex -% -% Use \index{key} or \idx{word} to make an entry in the index file -% [\idx{word} is more or less the same as ``word\index{word}'']. -% At the end of the job the file \jobname.idx is the raw index file, -% ready to be fed into the MakeIndex program to create the index. -% The MakeIndex output file \jobname.ind is then fed back through TeX with -% the output formatting macros below to print the final formatted index. -% -% To process the index file with MakeIndex the command is simply -% -% makeindex jobname.idx -% -% You can leave off the .idx extension for the raw file and makeindex -% will assume it. This will produce the processed index file, called -% \jobname.ind. To print the index you can either include it in -% another pass of the full document with ``\input \jobname.ind'' or -% print it separately by adding ``\input index'' to the begining of the -% \jobname.ind file and running it through TeX. -% -% If you set \markindextrue then indexed words selected with \idx -% will appear in the printed output inside a ruled box. This is -% useful for draft copies when you are putting together the index, -% but obviously you do not want to use it in a final copy. -% The box does not interfere with or change the line spacing. -% -% These macros are completely compatible with Plain TeX, although -% they can also be used with TeXsis (some of the macros used below -% are a part of TeXsis). Note however that these macros support output -% from MakeIndex in it's default LaTeX mode. You don't need a separate -% style file for MakeIndex! -% -% For more information about how to make full use of MakeIndex read -% the man page for makeindex(1) and/or the paper ``Index Preparation -% and Processing'' by Pehong Chen and Michale A. Harrison, -% Software: Practice and Experience, Vol 19, No. 9, Sep. 1988, pp. 897-915 -% (a copy is available at ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/index/index.tex ) -% -% It is possible to make more than one index by creating a few extra -% macros based on the ones below. See the documentation at the end -% of this file for details. -% -%======================================================================* -% (C) Copyright 1992, 1999, 2000 by Eric Myers and Frank Paige. -% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications -% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL). -% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL -%======================================================================* -\message{- indexing macros} -\catcode`@=11 % @ is a letter here to hide workings - -\newif\ifmarkindex \markindexfalse % put proof marks in text? -\newif\ifmakeindex \makeindextrue % set false to suppress .idx output - -%---------------------------* -% Index Entries: -% -% \idx{word} is the quickest way to make an index entry. -% The word is put in the text and an index entry is made at the -% same time. It is the same as typing ``word\index{word}''. -% If \markintdextrue is selected the word appears in the text with a -% box around it so you know it has been included in the index. - - -\def\idx#1{% include a word in the index output file - #1\index{#1}% % put word in text and \index it - \ifmarkindex % proof marks? - \llap{\lower\jot\vbox to 0pt{\vss % box it - \tightboxit{\loosebox{\phantom{#1}}}}\hskip-\jot}% - \fi} % put a ruled box around word - - -% \index{key} makes an index entry for the given key. -% Since MakeIndex can use special characters like @ | ! and " in the key -% we must make sure that they are printed correctly to the raw index file. - -\def\index{% make an index entry for a given key - \begingroup % turn MakeIndex special characters to letters - \catcode`@=11 \catcode`"=11 \catcode`!=11 \catcode`|=11 \catcode`-=11 - \@index} - -\def\@index#1{% get the index entry and write it to the file - \endgroup % special characters back to before - \ifmakeindex % .idx file output enabled? - \indexwrite\indexout{\indexentry{#1}}% write entry to file - \fi} - - -% \loosebox put a loose box around a box. -% \tightboxit draws a rule box around the box #1 without any added space - -\def\loosebox#1{% - \vbox{\vskip\jot - \hbox{\hskip\jot #1\hskip\jot}% - \vskip\jot}} - -\def\tightboxit#1{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\vbox{#1}\vrule}\hrule}} - -%---------------------------* -% Index Formatting (printing the processed index file) - - -% The index is begun by \theindex or \begin{theindex} and ended -% with \endtheindex or \end{theindex} - - -\def\theindex{% begin a formatted index - \begingroup - \parskip = 0pt % no extra space between items - \def\item{\indexitem{0pt}}% % level 0 item separator - \def\subitem{\indexitem{20pt}}% % level 1 item separator - \def\subsubitem{\indexitem{30pt}}% % level 2 item separator - \def\indexspace{\medskip}% % intergroup vertical space - \def\setcounter##1##2{\global\csname ##1no\endcsname=##2}% to set page counter - \def\bold##1{{\bf ##1}}% % boldface for |bold - \def\italic##1{{\it ##1}}% % italics for |italic - \def\slanted##1{{\sl ##1}}% % slanted for |slanted - \def\see##1##2{{\it see} ##1}% % italics for |see - \def\seealso##1{{\it see also}##1}%% italics for |seealso - \def\also##1{{\it see also}##1}% % italics for |also - } - -\def\indexitem#1{% how to make an entry for an item in the index - \vskip 0pt % force vertical mode - \hangindent=30pt\hangafter=1 % hanging indent for extra lines - \noindent\hskip #1} % level N item separator - -\def\endtheindex{% end a formatted index - \endgroup} - - -% If you don't have MakeIndex you can still make a sorted index. -% (Even though it may not look as good. If you are really going to -% do it right, do get MakeIndex). The Unix sort(1) command or a similar -% program can be used to sort the \jobname.idx file. You can then -% edit the file to collect all the page numbers for a key into -% one \indexentry, like ``\indexentry{foo}{29,47-48}'' , and \indexentry -% will format the items as best it can. - - -\def\indexentry#1#2{% prints an index entry (from the raw file) - \indexitem{0pt}#1, #2} % keyword, page number - - -%-------------------------* -% Simple \begin .. \end support (like in LaTeX): There is a conspiracy -% to preserve job security for typists by making sure one has to -% type \begin{thing} and \end{thing} everywhere. In TeXsis it's just -% \thing and \endthing, so here we just make \begin{thing} become \thing -% and \end{thing} become \endthing. Then we can use MakeIndex in it's -% default mode, even though that is for LaTeX. -% Note: we don't check that you begin and end the same thing. After all, -% you might want to say \begin{midfigure} followed by \end{figure}. - - -\def\begin#1{% \begin{foo} just becomes \foo - \begingroup % changes to \end are temporary - \let\end=\endbegin % now \end will end the \begin - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax\relax % is \thing defined? - \def\next{\beginerror{#1}}% NO: flag an error - \else % - \def\next{\csname #1\endcsname}% YES: just invoke it - \fi\next} - -\def\endbegin#1{% \end{foo} just becomes \endfoo - \endgroup % now \end goes back to normal - \expandafter\ifx\csname end#1\endcsname\relax\relax % is \endthing defined? - \def\next{\begingroup\beginerror{end#1}}% % NO: flag an error - \else % - \def\next{\csname end#1\endcsname}% YES: just invoke it - \fi\next} - - -\newhelp\beginhelp{begin: - The \string\begin\space or \string\end\space marked above is for a^^M% - non-existant environment. Check for spelling errors and such.} - - -\def\beginerror#1{% \begin{foo} or \end{foo} fail if no \foo or \endfoo - \endgroup % make sure \end is back to normal - \errhelp=\beginhelp % longer help message - \newlinechar=`\^^M % ^^M is line break - \errmessage{Undefined environment for \string\begin\space or \string\end}} - - -%---------------------------* -% Index file output: -% - -\newwrite\indexout % raw index output file - - -% \indexinit will only get called once. It opens the output file, -% write an identifying comment to it, and then undefines itself. - -\def\indexinit{% open and initialize raw index file - \immediate\openout\indexout=\jobname.idx % open file as \jobname.idx - \immediate\write\indexout{\@comment Raw index file ``\jobname.idx''}% - \immediate\write\indexout{\@comment ====================================}% - \gdef\indexinit{\relax}} % so we initialize only once - -% \@comment is for writing % to a file. It expands to '% '. - -{\catcode`\%=11 \gdef\@comment{% }} - - -% \indexwrite writes an entry to the raw index file named by #1. Argument -% #2 is the \indexentry{foo}, so it is not expanded (which is why this is so -% complicated), while \@indexpage is the page number, which *is* expanded. - -\def\indexwrite#1#2{% % write entry to raw index file - \indexinit % open output file if not already - \def\@finwrite{\write#1}% % to write to index output file (#1) - \begingroup % begin collecting tokens on stack - \aftergroup\@finwrite % put \write\indexout on stack - \aftergroup{\relax % put { on stack - \@stackNX#2\@endstack % puts \noexpand\token... on stack - \aftergroup\@indexpage % expanded {enclosed} page number - \aftergroup}\relax % put } on stack - \endgroup} % now dump from stack to \write - -\def\@indexpage{{\folio}} % to get the {enclosed} page number - -% Saying \@stackNX <stuff>\@endstack will take all the tokens -% in <stuff> and put them on the stack, with every control sequence -% prefaced by \noexpand. \indexwrite uses this for unexpanded write. - -\def\@stackNX{\futurelet\next\@stackswitch} - -\def\@stackswitch{% decides what to do with various types of tokens - \ifx\next\@endstack\relax % if \@endstack then we'll quit - \else\ifcat\noexpand\next\@stoken % if token is a space, - \aftergroup\space\let\next=\@eatnext% write \space and eat token - \else\ifcat\noexpand\next\bgroup % if token is \bgroup - \aftergroup{\let\next=\@eatnext % write { and eat it - \else\ifcat\noexpand\next\egroup % if token is \egroup - \aftergroup}\let\next=\@eatnext % write a } and eat it - \else % otherwize - \let\next=\@stacktoken % just copy to the stack with \NX - \fi\fi\fi\fi % end all \if's - \next} % do it to the token - -\def\\{\global\let\@stoken= }\\ - -% \@eatnext ignores the \next token and goes on to the -% one following in the argument list - -\def\@eatnext{\afterassignment\@stackNX\let\next= } - -% \@stacktoken copies one token to the stack with \aftergroup, -% then calls \@stackNX to get the one following. - -\long\def\@stacktoken#1{% write token to stack, unexpanded - \ifcat\noexpand#1\relax % if token is a control sequence - \aftergroup\noexpand % preface with \noexpand - \else\ifcat\noexpand#1\noexpand~\relax % if token is an active character - \aftergroup\noexpand % preface with \noexpand - \fi\fi % - \aftergroup#1\relax % put the next token on the list - \@stackNX} % do next token from argument... - -\def\@endstack\@endstack{} % just marks the end of token list - -\catcode`@=12 % @ goes back to \other, not a letter - -%---------------------------* -% MULTIPLE INDICES: -% -% If you want more than one index I can't guess how you will want to -% use them, so all I can do is tell you how to use the macros above to -% create another (or several other) additional indices: -% -% 1) Create another output file and open it, with something like: -% -% \newwrite\otherindexout -% \immediate\openout\otherindexout=other.idx -% -% 2) Define a macro to make the entry to the second index, following -% the pattern of \index and \@index above, but using the other index -% file (but don't use @ in a macro name). For example: -% -% \def\OtherIndex{\begingroup % special characters letters -% \catcode`@=11 \catcode`"=11 \catcode`!=11 \catcode`|=11 -% \catcode`-=11 -% \Oindex} -% -% \def\Oindex#1{\endgroup % special characters return -% \indexwrite\otherindexout{\indexentry{#1}}} -% -% Then saying \OtherIndex{word} will make an entry into the alternate -% index for ``word''. -% -%>>> EOF index.tex <<< diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/letr b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/letr deleted file mode 100644 index ad4697fc80e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/letr +++ /dev/null @@ -1,230 +0,0 @@ -#!/bin/sh -# -# letr - a Unix shell script for printing a letter with an addressed -# envelope, using TeXsis (the TeX macros for physicists). The syntax is: -# -# letr [ -q ][ -Pprinter ] [ dvips flags ] [ filename ] -# -# where "filename" is the name for your TeX job. The TeX instructions -# for creating your letter will be put in the file filename.tex, while -# the instructions for creating the printed envelope will be in the -# file filename.env. If no name is given the default is "TeXletter". -# -# You first edit your letter with your default EDITOR, then it is run -# through TeXsis. You can preview the letter, and then choose whether -# or not to print it, and whether or not to print the addressed envelope. -# -# Use the -q flag to bypass the editor, and -P to specify an alternate -# printer. All other flags are passed to dvips. So, for example, if -# you give the -m flag it will go to dvips and the letter (not just the -# envelope) will be printed in manual feed mode, so you can put your own -# paper in the printer for it. -# -# To get the envelope to print in landscape mode and with manual feed -# we call dvips explicitly. If you need to, change the DVIPS command -# and ENVFLAGS below to match your local site configuration. -# -# Eric Myers <myers@umich.edu> - 27 January 1996 -# Department of Physics, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor -# @(#) $Id: letr,v 1.7 2000/06/01 20:02:30 myers Exp $ -###################################################################### -# Local Customization: - -EDITOR=${EDITOR-"emacs"} # editor (default to emacs) -DVIVIEW=${DVIVIEW-"xdvi"} # dvi file viewer (dviview is more general) -DVIPS=${DVIPS-"dvips -q"} # general dvips command -ENVLFLAGS="-m -t landscape" # dvips flags for the envelope - -#====================(end of customization)====================* - -## Parse command line arguments. Unrecognized ones are saved for dvips - -FNAME=${FNAME-"TeXletter"} # name of file to process -FLAGS=" " # flags to pass on to dvips -NOEDIT="" - -while [ $# != 0 ] -do case "$1" in - -P*) PRINTER=`echo $1 | tail +3c` # strip off the -P - LPDEST=$PRINTER ;; - -q) NOEDIT="NOEDIT" ;; - -*) FLAGS="$FLAGS $1" ;; - *) FNAME="$1" ;; - esac - shift -done - -PROG=`basename $0` - -############### -# Determine which printer we shall use, and how. In NeXTStep the lpr -# command ignores the $PRINTER variable, so we will correct for that -# here by always using `lpr -P$PRINTER`, with "Local_Printer" as the -# default. For other Unix change default printer to 'lp'. For SYSV -# we need to use "lp -d$LPDEST" instead. - -if [ -x /usr/ucb/lpr ]; then - if [ -x /sdmach ]; then # NeXTStep - PRINTER=${PRINTER-"Local_Printer"} - else # other BSD - PRINTER=${PRINTER-"lp"} - fi - # The -h option suppresses the banner page - LPR="/usr/ucb/lpr -h -P$PRINTER" -fi - -if [ -x /usr/bin/lpr ]; then # BSD (Linux, Solaris) - PRINTER=${PRINTER-"lp"} - # The -h option suppresses the banner page - LPR="/usr/bin/lpr -h -P$PRINTER" -fi - -if [ -x /usr/bin/lp ]; then # SYSV (eg. HP-UX) - LPDEST=${LPDEST-"lp"} - # The -onb option suppresses the banner page on HP LaserJet3/4 (and 5?) - LPR="/usr/bin/lp -onb -d${LPDEST} " -fi - -if [ ! $?LPR ]; then - echo "Cannot determine lpr/lp command." - exit 2 -fi - -## Figure out line end suppression for BSD or SYSV - -if [ "`echo 'EC\c'; echo HO`" = "ECHO" ]; then - SYSVNL="\c"; BSDNL="" # System V line control -else - BSDNL="-n"; SYSVNL="" # BSD line control -fi - -## the function `ask_def default text` asks a question and returns -## the user's answer, using the default if just <cr> is pressed. - -ask_def () { - DEFAULT=$1 ; shift - echo ${BSDNL} "$* [${DEFAULT}] ${SYSVNL}" - read ANS - if [ -z "$ANS" ]; then ANS=$DEFAULT ; fi - export ANS; } - - -## Strip off .tex from the filename, if it is included. -## Any trailing . is also removed (helps for tcsh filename completion). - -FNAME=`basename $FNAME .tex` # get just the file name, strip .tex -FNAME=`basename $FNAME .` # get just the file name, strip "." - -## If the named TeX file does not exist, create it with a simple -## TeXsis \letter template - -if [ ! -f ${FNAME}.tex ]; then -cat >${FNAME}.tex <<End-of-Text -\\texsis -\\letter -\\withEnvelope % if you also want to print an envelope -\\def\\Email{}% <-- set e-mail address if you want it in the letterhead -\\letterhead{}% <-- phone number or extension goes here -\\address -NAME OF ADDRESSEE HERE -ADDRESS GOES HERE -AS MANY LINES AS YOU NEED - -\\body -Dear WHOEVER, - -BODY OF LETTER GOES HERE. - -AS MANY PARAGRAPHS AS YOU WANT. - -\\closing -Sincerely, -YOUR NAME HERE - -\bye -End-of-Text -fi - - -## Edit the file with EDITOR, unless -q flag was given - -if [ -z "$NOEDIT" ]; then - if $EDITOR ${FNAME}.tex - then echo " " - else - echo "${PROG}: ${EDITOR} editing error ($?). Bailing out..." - exit 1 - fi -fi - -if [ ! -f ${FNAME}.tex ]; then exit 0 ; fi - -## Process through TeXsis - -if [ -z "$NOEDIT" ]; then - ask_def yes "Process file ${FNAME}.tex through TeXsis? " -else - ANS="yes" -fi - -case $ANS in - yes|Y|y|YES|Yes) - if texsis ${FNAME}.tex - then - echo " " - else - echo "${PROG}: TeXsis error ($?). Bailing out..." - exit 1 - fi ;; - *) exit 0 -esac - - -## Preview the .dvi file, if desired - -if [ -f ${FNAME}.dvi ]; then - - ask_def yes "Do you want to preview the letter? " - case $ANS in - yes|Y|y|YES|Yes) echo " " - $DVIVIEW ${FNAME} #>/dev/null 2>&1 - sleep 1 ;; - esac - - echo " " - echo "Default printer is '${PRINTER}'." - ask_def yes "Do you want to print this now? " - case $ANS in - yes|Y|y|YES|Yes) - ${DVIPS} ${FLAGS} ${FNAME}.dvi # >/dev/null 2>&1 - echo "Printing the letter..." - ${LPR} ${FNAME}.ps ;; - *);; - esac - -fi - - -## Process envelope, if desired and it exists - -if [ -f ${FNAME}.env ]; then - - ask_def yes "Do you want to print the envelope? " - case $ANS in - yes|Y|y|YES|Yes) - /bin/rm -rf ${FNAME}.dvi ${FNAME}.ps - texsis ${FNAME}.env - $DVIPS ${FLAGS} ${ENVLFLAGS} ${FNAME}.dvi ## >/dev/null 2>&1 - echo "Printing the envelope... Please feed the printer. " - ${LPR} ${FNAME}.ps - esac - -else - echo "No envelope file ${FNAME}.env was found." -fi - -# Clean up: remove .dvi file, .ps file, and .log file (but keep .env file). - -/bin/rm -f ${FNAME}.dvi ${FNAME}.log ${FNAME}.ps - -exit 0 diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/penguin.eps b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/penguin.eps deleted file mode 100644 index af54d9dfec9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/penguin.eps +++ /dev/null @@ -1,507 +0,0 @@ -%!PS-Adobe-2.0 EPSF-1.2 -%%Title: penguin.ps -%%Creator: FeynDiagram 2.4 by Bill Dimm -%%CreationDate: Dec 15 10:44 -%%For:paige paige -%%Pages: 1 -%%DocumentFonts: -%%BoundingBox: 100 299 513 650 -save -countdictstack -mark -newpath -/showpage {} def -%%EndProlog -%%Page 1 1 -%! -% @(#) abbrev.ps 1.10@(#) - -/CP /charpath load def -/CF /currentflat load def -/CPT /currentpoint load def -/C2 /curveto load def -/RC2 /rcurveto load def -/FP /flattenpath load def -/L2 /lineto load def -/M2 /moveto load def -/NP /newpath load def -/PBX /pathbbox load def -/RM2 /rmoveto load def -/SD /setdash load def -/SLC /setlinecap load def -/SLW /setlinewidth load def -/S /show load def -/ST /stroke load def - -% @(#) max.ps 1.9@(#) - -/max { 2 copy lt {exch} if pop } bind def - -% @(#) arrow.ps 1.9@(#) - -/tan - { - dup - sin exch cos div - } bind def - -/arrow_dict 12 dict def -arrow_dict /arrow_mtrxstor matrix put - -/arrow - { - arrow_dict - begin - - /alpha exch def - /y2 exch def - /x2 exch def - /y1 exch def - /x1 exch def - - /arrow_oldmtrx arrow_mtrxstor currentmatrix def - - /dx x2 x1 sub def - /dy y2 y1 sub def - - /len dx dx mul dy dy mul add sqrt def - - /theta 1 alpha tan atan def - /rad len alpha tan mul - theta sin alpha tan theta cos -1 add mul add div def - - x1 y1 translate - dy dx atan rotate - - len 0 M2 - rad neg 0 rad theta 360 theta sub arcn - closepath - - arrow_oldmtrx setmatrix - end - } bind def - -% @(#) text.ps 1.9@(#) - -/text_dict 20 dict def -text_dict /text_mtrxstor matrix put - -/SF* { exch findfont exch scalefont setfont } bind def - -systemdict /selectfont known - { /SF /selectfont load def } - { /SF /SF* load def } - ifelse - -/txtsta - { - text_dict begin - - /angle exch def - /y exch def - /x exch def - - /text_oldmtrx text_mtrxstor currentmatrix def - - x y translate - angle rotate - } bind def - - -/txtend - { - text_oldmtrx setmatrix - end - } bind def - -save - -NP -1.638 SLW -1 SLC -306 314.1 M2 -118.8 314.1 L2 -ST -1 SLW -0 SLC -217.805 314.1 206.995 314.1 22 arrow -fill -NP -1.638 SLW -1 SLC -493.2 314.1 M2 -306 314.1 L2 -ST -1 SLW -0 SLC -405.005 314.1 394.195 314.1 22 arrow -fill -NP -1.638 SLW -1 SLC -120.028 590.132 112.239 269.373 338.007 arc -ST -1 SLW -0 SLC -177.719 493.855 186.711 499.849 22 arrow -fill -NP -1.638 SLW -1 SLC -306 560.775 82.875 188.797 351.203 arc -ST -NP -1.638 SLW -1 SLC -491.971 590.132 112.239 201.993 270.627 arc -ST -1 SLW -0 SLC -425.289 499.849 434.281 493.855 22 arrow -fill -NP -1.638 SLW -1 SLC -488.676 396 65.676 86.0501 273.95 arc -ST -1 SLW -0 SLC -423.222 401.399 423.222 390.601 22 arrow -fill -NP -1.638 SLW -1 SLC -306 314.1 M2 -299.762 314.724 294.862 319.696 294.862 326.817 C2 -294.862 333.939 299.762 338.911 306 339.535 C2 -314.131 340.348 317.138 338.436 317.138 335.465 C2 -317.138 332.494 314.131 330.583 306 331.396 C2 -ST -1 setgray -4.914 SLW -0 SLC -[] 0 SD -306 331.396 M2 -299.762 332.019 294.862 336.991 294.862 344.113 C2 -ST -0 setgray -1.638 SLW -1 SLC -306 331.396 M2 -299.762 332.019 294.862 336.991 294.862 344.113 C2 -294.862 351.235 299.762 356.207 306 356.83 C2 -314.131 357.644 317.138 355.732 317.138 352.761 C2 -317.138 349.79 314.131 347.878 306 348.691 C2 -ST -1 setgray -4.914 SLW -0 SLC -[] 0 SD -306 348.691 M2 -299.762 349.315 294.862 354.287 294.862 361.409 C2 -ST -0 setgray -1.638 SLW -1 SLC -306 348.691 M2 -299.762 349.315 294.862 354.287 294.862 361.409 C2 -294.862 368.53 299.762 373.502 306 374.126 C2 -314.131 374.939 317.138 373.027 317.138 370.057 C2 -317.138 367.086 314.131 365.174 306 365.987 C2 -ST -1 setgray -4.914 SLW -0 SLC -[] 0 SD -306 365.987 M2 -299.762 366.611 294.862 371.583 294.862 378.704 C2 -ST -0 setgray -1.638 SLW -1 SLC -306 365.987 M2 -299.762 366.611 294.862 371.583 294.862 378.704 C2 -294.862 385.826 299.762 390.798 306 391.422 C2 -314.131 392.235 317.138 390.323 317.138 387.352 C2 -317.138 384.381 314.131 382.47 306 383.283 C2 -ST -1 setgray -4.914 SLW -0 SLC -[] 0 SD -306 383.283 M2 -299.762 383.906 294.862 388.878 294.862 396 C2 -ST -0 setgray -1.638 SLW -1 SLC -306 383.283 M2 -299.762 383.906 294.862 388.878 294.862 396 C2 -294.862 403.122 299.762 408.094 306 408.717 C2 -314.131 409.53 317.138 407.619 317.138 404.648 C2 -317.138 401.677 314.131 399.765 306 400.578 C2 -ST -1 setgray -4.914 SLW -0 SLC -[] 0 SD -306 400.578 M2 -299.762 401.202 294.862 406.174 294.862 413.296 C2 -ST -0 setgray -1.638 SLW -1 SLC -306 400.578 M2 -299.762 401.202 294.862 406.174 294.862 413.296 C2 -294.862 420.417 299.762 425.389 306 426.013 C2 -314.131 426.826 317.138 424.914 317.138 421.943 C2 -317.138 418.973 314.131 417.061 306 417.874 C2 -ST -1 setgray -4.914 SLW -0 SLC -[] 0 SD -306 417.874 M2 -299.762 418.498 294.862 423.47 294.862 430.591 C2 -ST -0 setgray -1.638 SLW -1 SLC -306 417.874 M2 -299.762 418.498 294.862 423.47 294.862 430.591 C2 -294.862 437.713 299.762 442.685 306 443.309 C2 -314.131 444.122 317.138 442.21 317.138 439.239 C2 -317.138 436.268 314.131 434.356 306 435.17 C2 -ST -1 setgray -4.914 SLW -0 SLC -[] 0 SD -306 435.17 M2 -299.762 435.793 294.862 440.765 294.862 447.887 C2 -ST -0 setgray -1.638 SLW -1 SLC -306 435.17 M2 -299.762 435.793 294.862 440.765 294.862 447.887 C2 -294.862 455.009 299.762 459.981 306 460.604 C2 -314.131 461.417 317.138 459.506 317.138 456.535 C2 -317.138 453.564 314.131 451.652 306 452.465 C2 -ST -1 setgray -4.914 SLW -0 SLC -[] 0 SD -306 452.465 M2 -299.762 453.089 294.862 458.061 294.862 465.183 C2 -ST -0 setgray -1.638 SLW -1 SLC -306 452.465 M2 -299.762 453.089 294.862 458.061 294.862 465.183 C2 -294.862 472.304 299.762 477.276 306 477.9 C2 -ST -NP -1.638 SLW -1 SLC -224.1 548.1 M2 -235.781 550.101 236.647 553.765 227.389 561.308 C2 -218.13 568.852 220.005 573.416 231.893 572.273 C2 -243.781 571.13 245.74 574.346 239.273 584.386 C2 -232.806 594.427 236.003 598.186 246.952 593.417 C2 -257.901 588.648 260.76 591.098 257.721 602.648 C2 -254.683 614.197 258.887 616.781 267.82 608.855 C2 -276.753 600.929 280.231 602.373 280.919 614.296 C2 -281.608 626.219 286.405 627.374 292.444 617.07 C2 -298.483 606.767 302.236 607.063 306.584 618.186 C2 -310.933 629.309 315.852 628.921 318.402 617.253 C2 -320.952 605.586 324.612 604.705 332.192 613.934 C2 -339.772 623.163 344.329 621.27 343.139 609.387 C2 -341.95 597.504 345.157 595.532 355.223 601.959 C2 -365.289 608.386 369.035 605.175 364.223 594.245 C2 -359.411 583.314 361.85 580.446 373.412 583.439 C2 -384.973 586.432 387.541 582.218 379.58 573.316 C2 -371.618 564.414 373.049 560.931 384.969 560.196 C2 -396.889 559.46 398.025 554.658 387.9 548.1 C2 -ST -114.12 477.9 0 txtsta -0 0 M2 -CF dup 5 mul setflat -CPT -/Times-Roman 28.08 SF -(s) true CP -FP PBX -3 -1 roll sub -3 1 roll sub neg --1 mul 2 1 roll -0.5 mul -NP -4 2 roll M2 RM2 -setflat -/Times-Roman 28.08 SF -(s) S -txtend -114.12 314.1 0 txtsta -0 0 M2 -CF dup 5 mul setflat -CPT -/Times-Roman 28.08 SF -(d) true CP -FP PBX -3 -1 roll sub -3 1 roll sub neg --1 mul 2 1 roll -0.5 mul -NP -4 2 roll M2 RM2 -setflat -/Times-Roman 28.08 SF -() S -CF dup 5 mul setflat -CPT -/Times-Roman 28.08 SF -(d) true CP -FP PBX -7 -1 roll setflat -4.212 add -3 -1 roll pop dup 3 1 roll -NP M2 1.9656 SLW -L2 ST -M2 -/Times-Roman 28.08 SF -(d) S -txtend -324.72 396 0 txtsta -0 0 M2 -/Times-Roman 28.08 SF -(g) S -txtend -306 489.6 0 txtsta -0 0 M2 -CF dup 5 mul setflat -CPT -/Times-Roman 28.08 SF -(u, c, t) true CP -FP PBX -3 -1 roll sub -3 1 roll sub neg --0.5 mul 2 1 roll 0 mul -NP -4 2 roll M2 RM2 -setflat -/Times-Roman 28.08 SF -(u, c, t) S -txtend -306 630 0 txtsta -0 0 M2 -CF dup 5 mul setflat -CPT -/Times-Roman 28.08 SF -(W) true CP -FP PBX -3 -1 roll sub -3 1 roll sub neg --0.5 mul 2 1 roll 0 mul -NP -4 2 roll M2 RM2 -setflat -/Times-Roman 28.08 SF -(W) S -txtend -497.88 477.9 0 txtsta -0 0 M2 -CF dup 5 mul setflat -CPT -/Times-Roman 28.08 SF -(d) true CP -FP PBX -3 -1 roll sub -3 1 roll sub neg -0 mul 2 1 roll -0.2 mul -NP -4 2 roll M2 RM2 -setflat -/Times-Roman 28.08 SF -(d) S -txtend -497.88 461.52 0 txtsta -0 0 M2 -CF dup 5 mul setflat -CPT -/Times-Roman 28.08 SF -(u) true CP -FP PBX -3 -1 roll sub -3 1 roll sub neg -0 mul 2 1 roll -0.8 mul -NP -4 2 roll M2 RM2 -setflat -/Times-Roman 28.08 SF -() S -CF dup 5 mul setflat -CPT -/Times-Roman 28.08 SF -(u) true CP -FP PBX -7 -1 roll setflat -4.212 add -3 -1 roll pop dup 3 1 roll -NP M2 1.9656 SLW -L2 ST -M2 -/Times-Roman 28.08 SF -(u) S -txtend -497.88 330.48 0 txtsta -0 0 M2 -CF dup 5 mul setflat -CPT -/Times-Roman 28.08 SF -(u) true CP -FP PBX -3 -1 roll sub -3 1 roll sub neg -0 mul 2 1 roll -0.2 mul -NP -4 2 roll M2 RM2 -setflat -/Times-Roman 28.08 SF -(u) S -txtend -497.88 314.1 0 txtsta -0 0 M2 -CF dup 5 mul setflat -CPT -/Times-Roman 28.08 SF -(d) true CP -FP PBX -3 -1 roll sub -3 1 roll sub neg -0 mul 2 1 roll -0.8 mul -NP -4 2 roll M2 RM2 -setflat -/Times-Roman 28.08 SF -() S -CF dup 5 mul setflat -CPT -/Times-Roman 28.08 SF -(d) true CP -FP PBX -7 -1 roll setflat -4.212 add -3 -1 roll pop dup 3 1 roll -NP M2 1.9656 SLW -L2 ST -M2 -/Times-Roman 28.08 SF -(d) S -txtend -restore -showpage -%%Trailer -cleartomark -countdictstack exch sub { end } repeat -restore -%%EOF diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/penguin2.eps b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/penguin2.eps deleted file mode 100644 index 46819fc95ef..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/penguin2.eps +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1041 +0,0 @@ -%!PS-Adobe-3.0 EPSF-3.0 -%%Creator: Adobe Illustrator(TM) 3.2 -%%For: (Neal Tucker) (ntucker@adobe.com) -%%Title: (penguin.eps) -%%CreationDate: (4/29/96) (8:20 AM) -%%BoundingBox: 4 2 221 258 -%%DocumentProcessColors: Black -%%DocumentSuppliedResources: procset Adobe_packedarray 2.0 0 -%%+ procset Adobe_cshow 1.1 0 -%%+ procset Adobe_customcolor 1.0 0 -%%+ procset Adobe_IllustratorA_AI3 1.0 1 -%AI3_ColorUsage: Black&White -%AI3_TemplateBox: 306 396 306 396 -%AI3_TileBox: 31 31 583 761 -%AI3_DocumentPreview: Header -%%EndComments -%%BeginProlog -%%BeginResource: procset Adobe_packedarray 2.0 0 -%%Title: (Packed Array Operators) -%%Version: 2.0 -%%CreationDate: (8/2/90) () -%%Copyright: ((C) 1987-1990 Adobe Systems Incorporated All Rights Reserved) -userdict /Adobe_packedarray 5 dict dup begin put -/initialize -{ -/packedarray where - { - pop - } - { - Adobe_packedarray begin - Adobe_packedarray - { - dup xcheck - { - bind - } if - userdict 3 1 roll put - } forall - end - } ifelse -} def -/terminate -{ -} def -/packedarray -{ -array astore readonly -} def -/setpacking -{ -pop -} def -/currentpacking -{ -false -} def -currentdict readonly pop end -%%EndResource -Adobe_packedarray /initialize get exec -%%BeginResource: procset Adobe_cshow 1.1 0 -%%Title: (cshow Operator) -%%Version: 1.1 -%%CreationDate: (1/23/89) () -%%Copyright: ((C) 1987-1990 Adobe Systems Incorporated All Rights Reserved) -currentpacking true setpacking -userdict /Adobe_cshow 3 dict dup begin put -/initialize -{ -/cshow where - { - pop - } - { - userdict /Adobe_cshow_vars 1 dict dup begin put - /_cshow - {} def - Adobe_cshow begin - Adobe_cshow - { - dup xcheck - { - bind - } if - userdict 3 1 roll put - } forall - end - end - } ifelse -} def -/terminate -{ -} def -/cshow -{ -exch -Adobe_cshow_vars - exch /_cshow - exch put - { - 0 0 Adobe_cshow_vars /_cshow get exec - } forall -} def -currentdict readonly pop end -setpacking -%%EndResource -%%BeginResource: procset Adobe_customcolor 1.0 0 -%%Title: (Custom Color Operators) -%%Version: 1.0 -%%CreationDate: (5/9/88) () -%%Copyright: ((C) 1987-1990 Adobe Systems Incorporated All Rights Reserved) -currentpacking true setpacking -userdict /Adobe_customcolor 5 dict dup begin put -/initialize -{ -/setcustomcolor where - { - pop - } - { - Adobe_customcolor begin - Adobe_customcolor - { - dup xcheck - { - bind - } if - pop pop - } forall - end - Adobe_customcolor begin - } ifelse -} def -/terminate -{ -currentdict Adobe_customcolor eq - { - end - } if -} def -/findcmykcustomcolor -{ -5 packedarray -} def -/setcustomcolor -{ -exch -aload pop pop -4 - { - 4 index mul 4 1 roll - } repeat -5 -1 roll pop -setcmykcolor -} def -/setoverprint -{ -pop -} def -currentdict readonly pop end -setpacking -%%EndResource -%%BeginResource: procset Adobe_IllustratorA_AI3 1.1 3 -%%Title: (Adobe Illustrator (R) Version 3.0 Abbreviated Prolog) -%%Version: 1.1 -%%CreationDate: (3/7/1994) () -%%Copyright: ((C) 1987-1994 Adobe Systems Incorporated All Rights Reserved) -currentpacking true setpacking -userdict /Adobe_IllustratorA_AI3 61 dict dup begin put -/initialize -{ -userdict /Adobe_IllustratorA_AI3_vars 58 dict dup begin put -/_lp /none def -/_pf {} def -/_ps {} def -/_psf {} def -/_pss {} def -/_pjsf {} def -/_pjss {} def -/_pola 0 def -/_doClip 0 def -/cf currentflat def -/_tm matrix def -/_renderStart [/e0 /r0 /a0 /o0 /e1 /r1 /a1 /i0] def -/_renderEnd [null null null null /i1 /i1 /i1 /i1] def -/_render -1 def -/_rise 0 def -/_ax 0 def -/_ay 0 def -/_cx 0 def -/_cy 0 def -/_leading [0 0] def -/_ctm matrix def -/_mtx matrix def -/_sp 16#020 def -/_hyphen (-) def -/_fScl 0 def -/_cnt 0 def -/_hs 1 def -/_nativeEncoding 0 def -/_useNativeEncoding 0 def -/_tempEncode 0 def -/_pntr 0 def -/_tDict 2 dict def -/_wv 0 def -/Tx {} def -/Tj {} def -/CRender {} def -/_AI3_savepage {} def -/_gf null def -/_cf 4 array def -/_if null def -/_of false def -/_fc {} def -/_gs null def -/_cs 4 array def -/_is null def -/_os false def -/_sc {} def -/_i null def -Adobe_IllustratorA_AI3 begin -Adobe_IllustratorA_AI3 - { - dup xcheck - { - bind - } if - pop pop - } forall -end -end -Adobe_IllustratorA_AI3 begin -Adobe_IllustratorA_AI3_vars begin -newpath -} def -/terminate -{ -end -end -} def -/_ -null def -/ddef -{ -Adobe_IllustratorA_AI3_vars 3 1 roll put -} def -/xput -{ -dup load dup length exch maxlength eq - { - dup dup load dup - length 2 mul dict copy def - } if -load begin def end -} def -/npop -{ - { - pop - } repeat -} def -/sw -{ -dup length exch stringwidth -exch 5 -1 roll 3 index mul add -4 1 roll 3 1 roll mul add -} def -/swj -{ -dup 4 1 roll -dup length exch stringwidth -exch 5 -1 roll 3 index mul add -4 1 roll 3 1 roll mul add -6 2 roll /_cnt 0 ddef -{1 index eq {/_cnt _cnt 1 add ddef} if} forall pop -exch _cnt mul exch _cnt mul 2 index add 4 1 roll 2 index add 4 1 roll pop pop -} def -/ss -{ -4 1 roll - { - 2 npop - (0) exch 2 copy 0 exch put pop - gsave - false charpath currentpoint - 4 index setmatrix - stroke - grestore - moveto - 2 copy rmoveto - } exch cshow -3 npop -} def -/jss -{ -4 1 roll - { - 2 npop - (0) exch 2 copy 0 exch put - gsave - _sp eq - { - exch 6 index 6 index 6 index 5 -1 roll widthshow - currentpoint - } - { - false charpath currentpoint - 4 index setmatrix stroke - }ifelse - grestore - moveto - 2 copy rmoveto - } exch cshow -6 npop -} def -/sp -{ - { - 2 npop (0) exch - 2 copy 0 exch put pop - false charpath - 2 copy rmoveto - } exch cshow -2 npop -} def -/jsp -{ - { - 2 npop - (0) exch 2 copy 0 exch put - _sp eq - { - exch 5 index 5 index 5 index 5 -1 roll widthshow - } - { - false charpath - }ifelse - 2 copy rmoveto - } exch cshow -5 npop -} def -/pl -{ -transform -0.25 sub round 0.25 add exch -0.25 sub round 0.25 add exch -itransform -} def -/setstrokeadjust where - { - pop true setstrokeadjust - /c - { - curveto - } def - /C - /c load def - /v - { - currentpoint 6 2 roll curveto - } def - /V - /v load def - /y - { - 2 copy curveto - } def - /Y - /y load def - /l - { - lineto - } def - /L - /l load def - /m - { - moveto - } def - } - { - /c - { - pl curveto - } def - /C - /c load def - /v - { - currentpoint 6 2 roll pl curveto - } def - /V - /v load def - /y - { - pl 2 copy curveto - } def - /Y - /y load def - /l - { - pl lineto - } def - /L - /l load def - /m - { - pl moveto - } def - }ifelse -/d -{ -setdash -} def -/cf {} def -/i -{ -dup 0 eq - { - pop cf - } if -setflat -} def -/j -{ -setlinejoin -} def -/J -{ -setlinecap -} def -/M -{ -setmiterlimit -} def -/w -{ -setlinewidth -} def -/H -{} def -/h -{ -closepath -} def -/N -{ -_pola 0 eq - { - _doClip 1 eq {clip /_doClip 0 ddef} if - newpath - } - { - /CRender {N} ddef - }ifelse -} def -/n -{N} def -/F -{ -_pola 0 eq - { - _doClip 1 eq - { - gsave _pf grestore clip newpath /_lp /none ddef _fc - /_doClip 0 ddef - } - { - _pf - }ifelse - } - { - /CRender {F} ddef - }ifelse -} def -/f -{ -closepath -F -} def -/S -{ -_pola 0 eq - { - _doClip 1 eq - { - gsave _ps grestore clip newpath /_lp /none ddef _sc - /_doClip 0 ddef - } - { - _ps - }ifelse - } - { - /CRender {S} ddef - }ifelse -} def -/s -{ -closepath -S -} def -/B -{ -_pola 0 eq - { - _doClip 1 eq - gsave F grestore - { - gsave S grestore clip newpath /_lp /none ddef _sc - /_doClip 0 ddef - } - { - S - }ifelse - } - { - /CRender {B} ddef - }ifelse -} def -/b -{ -closepath -B -} def -/W -{ -/_doClip 1 ddef -} def -/* -{ -count 0 ne - { - dup type (stringtype) eq {pop} if - } if -_pola 0 eq {newpath} if -} def -/u -{} def -/U -{} def -/q -{ -_pola 0 eq {gsave} if -} def -/Q -{ -_pola 0 eq {grestore} if -} def -/*u -{ -_pola 1 add /_pola exch ddef -} def -/*U -{ -_pola 1 sub /_pola exch ddef -_pola 0 eq {CRender} if -} def -/D -{pop} def -/*w -{} def -/*W -{} def -/` -{ -/_i save ddef -6 1 roll 4 npop -concat pop -userdict begin -/showpage {} def -0 setgray -0 setlinecap -1 setlinewidth -0 setlinejoin -10 setmiterlimit -[] 0 setdash -/setstrokeadjust where {pop false setstrokeadjust} if -newpath -0 setgray -false setoverprint -} def -/~ -{ -end -_i restore -} def -/O -{ -0 ne -/_of exch ddef -/_lp /none ddef -} def -/R -{ -0 ne -/_os exch ddef -/_lp /none ddef -} def -/g -{ -/_gf exch ddef -/_fc -{ -_lp /fill ne - { - _of setoverprint - _gf setgray - /_lp /fill ddef - } if -} ddef -/_pf -{ -_fc -fill -} ddef -/_psf -{ -_fc -ashow -} ddef -/_pjsf -{ -_fc -awidthshow -} ddef -/_lp /none ddef -} def -/G -{ -/_gs exch ddef -/_sc -{ -_lp /stroke ne - { - _os setoverprint - _gs setgray - /_lp /stroke ddef - } if -} ddef -/_ps -{ -_sc -stroke -} ddef -/_pss -{ -_sc -ss -} ddef -/_pjss -{ -_sc -jss -} ddef -/_lp /none ddef -} def -/k -{ -_cf astore pop -/_fc -{ -_lp /fill ne - { - _of setoverprint - _cf aload pop setcmykcolor - /_lp /fill ddef - } if -} ddef -/_pf -{ -_fc -fill -} ddef -/_psf -{ -_fc -ashow -} ddef -/_pjsf -{ -_fc -awidthshow -} ddef -/_lp /none ddef -} def -/K -{ -_cs astore pop -/_sc -{ -_lp /stroke ne - { - _os setoverprint - _cs aload pop setcmykcolor - /_lp /stroke ddef - } if -} ddef -/_ps -{ -_sc -stroke -} ddef -/_pss -{ -_sc -ss -} ddef -/_pjss -{ -_sc -jss -} ddef -/_lp /none ddef -} def -/x -{ -/_gf exch ddef -findcmykcustomcolor -/_if exch ddef -/_fc -{ -_lp /fill ne - { - _of setoverprint - _if _gf 1 exch sub setcustomcolor - /_lp /fill ddef - } if -} ddef -/_pf -{ -_fc -fill -} ddef -/_psf -{ -_fc -ashow -} ddef -/_pjsf -{ -_fc -awidthshow -} ddef -/_lp /none ddef -} def -/X -{ -/_gs exch ddef -findcmykcustomcolor -/_is exch ddef -/_sc -{ -_lp /stroke ne - { - _os setoverprint - _is _gs 1 exch sub setcustomcolor - /_lp /stroke ddef - } if -} ddef -/_ps -{ -_sc -stroke -} ddef -/_pss -{ -_sc -ss -} ddef -/_pjss -{ -_sc -jss -} ddef -/_lp /none ddef -} def -/A -{ -pop -} def -currentdict readonly pop end -setpacking -/annotatepage -{ -} def -%%EndResource -%%EndProlog -%%BeginSetup -Adobe_cshow /initialize get exec -Adobe_customcolor /initialize get exec -Adobe_IllustratorA_AI3 /initialize get exec -%%EndSetup -0 A -u -*u -0 O -0 g -0 i -0 J 0 j 1 w 4 M []0 d -%AI3_Note: -0 D -74.8907 215.0693 m -74.041 243.9622 85.304 256.7226 108.6809 257.1476 c -132.0577 257.5727 146.7214 245.2467 149.6966 229.0954 c -152.6719 212.9441 150.9717 191.6925 156.9222 180.6416 c -162.8727 169.5907 166.698 161.09 176.8988 148.339 c -187.0996 135.588 193.4751 122.6245 196.4503 106.8983 c -199.4255 91.172 201.1257 83.7339 193.4751 75.6583 c -185.8245 67.5827 172.2234 54.4066 162.0226 69.2828 c -156.9158 76.7302 156.362 85.9914 164.9978 87.9843 c -170.5233 89.2594 174.4902 88.8343 178.5989 86.7092 c -182.7076 84.584 183.6993 85.5757 178.7406 89.2594 c -173.7819 92.943 172.7901 89.5427 174.4902 95.4932 c -176.1904 101.4437 178.4436 112.1015 173.7682 123.8608 c -171.6149 129.2767 164.3121 144.122 157.4349 147.7774 C -156.799 148.1155 154.9871 148.8579 156.2138 147.3473 c -158.0807 145.0483 167.9587 130.4785 170.7682 121.7774 c -173.7716 112.4762 174.2069 103.5688 172.6484 97.9017 c -171.09 92.2346 168.3981 89.9678 165.1395 89.9678 c -161.8809 89.9678 158.9057 88.4093 158.9057 95.9182 c -158.9057 103.4272 159.6849 114.7614 155.6471 124.3246 c -151.6093 133.8879 146.7214 140.4759 145.6588 144.5137 c -144.5962 148.5515 142.2585 159.3899 137.3706 165.5529 c -132.4828 171.7159 130.3576 175.7537 132.9078 182.7667 c -135.458 189.7798 133.5453 191.6925 128.4449 193.1801 c -123.3445 194.6677 116.544 196.7929 114.8439 200.1931 c -113.1437 203.5934 114.2063 210.3939 118.0316 212.0941 c -121.8569 213.7942 128.2324 211.4565 128.4449 206.5686 c -128.6575 201.6807 126.3198 199.1305 126.9573 198.068 c -127.5949 197.0054 130.9951 195.3052 132.6953 197.2179 c -134.3954 199.1305 134.8204 205.081 133.1203 210.6064 c -131.4202 216.1319 130.5701 219.9572 124.4071 221.2323 c -118.2441 222.5074 115.4814 222.0823 112.5062 218.257 c -109.531 214.4317 108.2559 208.2688 109.1059 203.8059 c -109.956 199.3431 108.2559 201.8933 105.2806 202.1058 c -102.3054 202.3183 103.1555 202.5308 100.1802 202.3183 c -97.205 202.1058 98.2676 204.0184 98.055 207.2062 c -97.8425 210.3939 97.4175 216.9819 92.9546 219.5321 c -88.4918 222.0823 80.8412 219.1071 81.0537 208.4813 c -81.2662 197.8554 84.879 192.755 87.0042 196.5803 c -89.1293 200.4056 88.0668 198.493 85.9416 200.1931 c -83.8164 201.8933 82.3288 208.9063 84.6665 211.0315 c -87.0042 213.1566 89.7669 213.1566 91.2545 211.8815 c -92.7421 210.6064 95.0798 206.3561 94.6548 203.5934 c -94.2297 200.8307 94.0172 200.6182 91.2545 198.7055 c -88.4918 196.7929 87.4292 195.0927 84.2415 192.9676 c -81.0537 190.8424 79.7786 185.9545 82.3288 184.6794 c -84.879 183.4043 85.0915 183.6168 87.2167 180.4291 c -89.3419 177.2413 92.9546 175.7537 101.8804 177.2413 c -110.8061 178.7289 114.472 180.8449 121.2194 183.1918 c -126.1073 184.8919 124.4071 184.6794 126.1073 186.5921 c -127.8074 188.5047 130.5701 185.742 128.0199 184.0419 c -125.4697 182.3417 119.7318 180.6416 115.4814 179.154 c -111.2311 177.6663 106.3432 173.416 97.4175 173.841 c -88.4918 174.2661 94.6548 174.0536 91.8921 174.2661 c -89.1293 174.4786 87.8542 174.0536 90.8295 171.9284 c -93.8047 169.8032 93.5922 169.1657 96.1424 168.3156 c -98.6926 167.4655 102.0929 167.4655 106.1307 168.9532 c -110.1685 170.4408 120.3693 174.9036 123.5571 177.0288 c -126.7448 179.154 129.295 176.3912 126.1073 174.2661 c -122.9195 172.1409 122.0694 172.7785 119.0942 170.8658 c -116.119 168.9532 110.5935 165.7654 106.9808 162.3651 c -103.368 158.9649 102.5179 158.7523 98.055 158.5398 c -93.5922 158.3273 90.8295 163.0027 88.9168 165.1278 c -87.0042 167.253 87.2167 168.5281 84.879 171.0783 c -82.5413 173.6285 82.3288 172.991 81.9038 170.2283 c -81.4787 167.4655 78.291 160.4525 75.5283 155.7771 c -72.7655 151.1017 72.553 145.3638 72.9781 141.326 c -73.4031 137.2882 72.3405 136.8631 69.1528 132.1878 c -65.965 127.5124 60.6521 113.6988 59.802 109.2359 c -58.952 104.7731 57.8894 95.6349 58.3144 90.3219 c -58.7394 85.009 57.2518 83.9464 53.4265 87.5592 c -49.6012 91.172 48.3261 95.2098 48.5386 100.5227 c -48.7204 105.068 49.3516 108.2774 49.9349 109.9441 c -50.5182 111.6108 49.9557 112.7983 48.7512 110.7236 c -46.1324 106.2131 45.9884 98.3976 46.626 95.6349 c -47.2635 92.8721 47.4761 87.9843 54.4891 81.3962 c -61.5022 74.8082 71.703 65.67 80.2036 59.507 c -88.7043 53.344 91.6795 45.6934 79.141 40.168 C -87.0042 29.5421 91.2545 24.0167 87.8542 17.0037 C -94.8673 21.0415 92.1685 30.5606 88.7682 33.1108 c -85.368 35.661 87.4292 37.6178 90.4044 35.7051 c -93.3797 33.7925 94.4423 29.9672 106.1307 30.1797 c -117.8191 30.3922 130.4218 31.5766 137.4349 41.7774 c -144.4479 51.9783 145.8017 43.3946 144.1016 37.4441 c -142.4014 31.4936 138.2207 18.0662 144.8087 19.3413 C -145.6588 27.2045 147.5715 34.005 147.5715 42.5057 c -147.5715 51.0063 148.4349 55.1108 147.7682 67.4441 c -147.1259 79.3277 152.2468 80.1211 157.5597 80.1211 c -162.8727 80.1211 161.1725 76.7209 157.7723 76.9334 c -154.372 77.1459 150.7592 75.8708 150.5467 67.1576 c -150.3342 58.4444 150.5467 59.2945 152.0343 51.4314 c -153.5219 43.5682 153.7344 41.2306 152.4593 32.5174 c -151.1842 23.8042 150.1217 19.1288 155.8596 13.8159 c -161.5976 8.503 170.3108 9.9906 174.7736 13.3909 c -179.2365 16.7911 187.7371 24.6543 195.3877 27.2045 c -203.0383 29.7547 211.114 31.6673 215.3643 35.9176 c -219.6147 40.168 218.5521 43.1432 214.0892 45.4809 c -209.6264 47.8186 205.376 46.756 201.9757 50.5813 c -198.5755 54.4066 196.8753 62.9073 198.1504 67.3701 c -199.4255 71.833 200.9132 69.9203 200.9132 66.7326 c -200.9132 63.5448 201.1257 60.5696 204.3134 56.5318 c -207.5012 52.494 210.4764 50.5813 215.5768 47.3936 c -220.6772 44.2058 223.865 39.1054 217.4895 34.6425 c -211.114 30.1797 207.5012 27.6295 202.1883 25.5043 c -196.8753 23.3792 188.1622 18.2788 182.8492 12.9658 c -177.5363 7.6529 174.5611 2.9776 164.1478 2.9776 c -153.7344 2.9776 148.9787 5.4759 145.8713 11.6907 c -143.7462 15.9411 142.6836 15.3035 137.7957 15.516 c -132.9078 15.7286 116.544 15.9411 103.793 15.7286 c -91.042 15.516 86.7917 13.3909 81.0537 8.7155 c -75.3157 4.0401 73.1906 0.4273 62.3522 4.0401 c -51.5139 7.6529 45.7759 11.6907 29.6246 14.8785 c -13.4734 18.0662 22.1865 16.5786 12.4108 18.7038 c -2.635 20.829 3.2726 25.5043 4.5477 29.3296 c -5.8228 33.1549 9.0105 39.1054 6.2478 46.9685 c -3.4851 54.8316 4.5477 62.9073 11.9857 62.9073 c -19.4238 62.9073 26.4369 61.4197 29.4121 71.1954 c -32.3874 80.9712 33.2374 73.3206 32.3874 70.7704 c -31.5373 68.2202 31.1123 61.2071 24.5242 60.1446 c -17.9362 59.082 16.4486 60.5696 12.4108 60.5696 c -8.373 60.5696 6.6728 57.8069 8.798 53.1315 c -10.9232 48.4561 13.2608 43.5682 12.8358 39.5304 c -12.4108 35.4926 11.9857 34.005 9.0105 30.1797 c -6.0353 26.3544 6.4603 24.4417 11.7732 23.1666 c -17.0861 21.8915 26.6494 19.3413 35.5751 17.2162 c -44.5008 15.091 45.1384 15.091 60.6521 11.0532 c -76.1658 7.0154 80.4161 14.2409 81.6912 22.9541 c -82.9664 31.6673 77.0159 39.9555 71.4904 48.2436 c -65.965 56.5318 60.0145 66.095 52.789 74.8082 c -45.5634 83.5214 41.3131 84.159 37.7003 82.2463 c -34.0875 80.3337 33.4499 80.7587 33.2374 85.6466 c -33.0249 90.5345 32.5999 93.7222 36.6377 100.9478 c -40.6755 108.1734 44.2883 116.0365 48.5386 128.1499 c -52.789 140.2634 56.6143 142.6011 63.8398 153.0144 c -71.0654 163.4277 67.8777 159.3899 72.9781 166.4029 c -78.0785 173.416 76.5908 172.1409 76.1658 183.1918 c -75.7408 194.2427 75.3157 200.6182 74.8907 215.0693 c -f -1 D -54.5971 128.6793 m -55.6961 127.3382 57.2428 130.4814 58.871 131.6548 c -60.3363 132.9959 60.9469 134.8818 60.6213 136.7258 c -60.4584 137.7316 58.8303 137.3963 58.5046 137.0611 c -57.5278 136.0552 57.7262 134.4523 57.0393 133.0378 c -56.2252 131.3615 53.498 130.0204 54.5971 128.6793 c -f -145.951 173.0707 m -148.2714 171.137 149.6701 169.4579 150.9452 172.3269 c -152.2203 175.1958 152.2203 176.3647 149.1388 177.5335 c -146.0573 178.7024 144.6759 179.9775 143.2946 181.5713 c -141.9132 183.1652 141.4224 180.4368 142.5507 177.746 c -143.9321 174.452 144.7375 174.0819 145.951 173.0707 c -f -98.0873 199.4234 m -96.4935 199.7421 94.5808 199.6359 93.5182 198.3608 c -93.0932 197.9357 93.3057 196.7669 94.0495 196.4481 c -95.0058 196.0231 95.6434 196.9794 95.8559 197.7232 c -95.9622 198.042 96.0684 198.467 96.3872 198.5733 c -96.8122 198.7858 97.4336 198.6093 97.8748 198.7858 c -98.4061 198.9983 98.1936 199.4234 98.0873 199.4234 c -f -105.5994 199.1305 m -106.2369 198.1742 107.4058 198.1742 108.3621 197.7492 c -108.8934 197.5367 109.956 197.2179 110.2748 197.9617 c -111.0186 200.2994 107.8346 199.5556 106.3432 199.5556 c -106.0244 199.5556 105.2806 199.6618 105.5994 199.1305 c -f -121.1016 209.4441 m -122.5269 209.3691 124.5182 206.7774 124.7124 203.8036 c -124.7431 203.3336 125.9489 203.3623 126.2015 203.838 c -126.8964 205.0116 126.4187 206.3414 126.0992 207.7666 c -125.8436 208.9067 124.4549 210.1084 123.2792 210.6309 c -122.4954 211.0229 121.7116 211.1535 120.6665 211.0229 c -120.4052 210.8922 119.5182 209.5274 121.1016 209.4441 c -f -89.4377 210.1679 m -88.1053 210.0672 88.5823 209.0454 88.6441 208.2274 C -90.4855 207.1912 90.6621 204.8539 91.0372 203.0018 c -91.0901 202.3005 92.1243 202.6138 92.2235 202.8563 c -93.0524 204.3294 92.0434 206.0161 91.6772 207.7514 c -91.3728 208.6687 90.7674 209.6807 89.8964 210.3201 c -89.7707 210.4281 89.5546 210.1767 89.4377 210.1679 c -f -130.0182 242.7358 m -128.7024 243.8124 126.6432 244.2358 126.0182 242.4858 c -125.3932 240.9858 125.6432 239.4858 125.2682 237.8608 c -125.2682 237.3608 124.6432 237.2358 124.2682 236.7358 c -123.7682 236.1108 123.8932 235.3608 124.1432 235.1108 c -125.3932 233.8608 127.6432 236.3608 129.2682 237.2358 c -130.5182 237.9858 132.2682 236.9858 133.6432 237.8608 c -134.0182 238.1108 134.1432 238.7358 133.7682 239.2358 c -132.8932 240.7358 131.3932 241.6108 130.0182 242.7358 c -f -*U -0 D -168.2848 73.7743 m -168.5016 74.6532 168.9399 76.3409 169.7682 76.6108 c -170.0768 76.7112 170.3298 76.5961 170.4302 76.2876 c -170.6103 75.7354 170.0485 72.6062 170.2761 71.9079 c -170.5247 71.1445 171.3895 71.2465 172.023 71.4529 c -173.4685 71.9237 174.2959 73.6304 174.2429 73.7927 c -174.2219 73.8576 174.1949 73.8848 174.1464 73.869 c -173.9189 73.7949 173.7245 73.013 173.0585 72.7962 c -172.6525 72.6638 172.3397 72.7417 172.2023 73.164 c -172.0594 73.6024 172.6218 76.8395 172.3784 77.5868 c -172.1352 78.3338 171.3801 78.5011 170.698 78.2789 c -169.1062 77.7604 168.4145 75.3615 168.0211 73.922 C -167.9833 73.9276 L -168.1952 77.2482 L -166.2463 76.6135 L -166.145 69.7539 L -167.9804 70.3516 L -168.0209 71.5506 168.0627 72.9115 168.2848 73.7743 c -f -176.8278 73.0178 m -178.4034 73.5309 179.1132 75.4328 179.0445 75.644 c -179.0232 75.709 178.9751 75.7472 178.9263 75.7312 c -178.7964 75.6889 178.4863 74.6 177.593 74.309 c -177.2032 74.182 176.8475 74.2816 176.7627 74.5416 c -176.6359 74.9313 176.7162 75.6223 176.7309 76.1839 C -176.7792 79.2896 L -178.9394 79.993 L -178.9284 80.7439 L -176.7519 80.0351 L -176.8533 82.9783 L -174.9009 81.8573 L -174.8182 75.3274 L -174.8024 74.6037 174.7658 73.9989 174.8716 73.6741 c -175.1466 72.8296 176.0159 72.7535 176.8278 73.0178 c -f -U -%%PageTrailer -gsave annotatepage grestore showpage -%%Trailer -Adobe_IllustratorA_AI3 /terminate get exec -Adobe_customcolor /terminate get exec -Adobe_cshow /terminate get exec -Adobe_packedarray /terminate get exec -%%EOF diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/texsis.1 b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/texsis.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 241319867b8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/texsis.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,219 +0,0 @@ -.\" Unix Manual Pages for TeXsis, the TeX macros for physicists -.\"====================================================================== -.\" (C) Copyright 1991,1994,2000 by Eric Myers and Frank Paige. -.\" This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications -.\" are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL). -.\" See the file COPYING or ftp://feynman.physics.lsa.umich.edu/texsis/LPPL -.\"====================================================================== -.\" To view this file without the man command type: -.\" 'nroff -man texsis.1 | more' -.\" or, on some versions of man, just man -l texsis.1 -.\" -.\" @(#) $Id: texsis.1,v 18.0 2000/05/17 00:52:43 myers Exp $ -.TH TEXSIS 1 "16 May 2000" "TeXsis 2.18" "User Manuals" -.SH NAME -TeXsis \- TeX macros for Physicists - -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B texsis -[ filename ] - -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B TeXsis -is a collection of -.B TeX -macros for typesetting physics documents such as papers and preprints, -conference proceedings, books, theses, referee reports, letters, and -memos. -.B TeXsis -macros provide automatic numbering of equations, automatic -numbering and formatting of references, double column formatting, macros -for making tables and figures, with or without captions, including -tables with horizontal and vertical rules. -.B TeXsis -supports a wide variety of type sizes and a number of -specialized document formats, and it even includes macros for making -form letters for job applications or letters of recommendation. -.PP -TeXsis is an extension of "plain" TeX, so anything you know how to do -in plain TeX you can do in TeXsis. -TeXsis macro instructions are simply abbreviations for often used -combinations of control sequences used to typeset physics documents. -For more information about plain TeX see the man pages for -.BR tex (1), -and/or -.I The TeXbook, -by D.E. Knuth. -.PP -TeXsis is stored as a pre-loaded format so that it loads quickly (see -the man pages for -.BR initex (1), -and/or "preloaded formats" in -.I The TeXbook -). -To run TeXsis simply give the command -.B texsis -in place of the -.B tex -command, i.e. -.br -.sp -.in +2 -.B texsis -[ filename ] -.in -2 -.br -.sp -where -.I filename.tex -is the name of a file containing TeX and/or TeXsis -\\controlsequences. -.PP -TeXsis is initally in plain TeX mode, i.e. 10pt type and singlespaced, -but the control sequence \\texsis selects 12pt type, doublespacing, -and enables other useful features. -Alternatively, \\paper turns on these features and sets things up to -typeset a paper, \\thesis does the same for typesetting a thesis, -\\letter is used to produce a letter using macros similar to those -listed in the back of -.I The TeXbook, -\\memo gives a setup for producing memoranda, and so on. -.PP -A manual which describes all of the TeXsis macro instructions is -available. -It is written in TeXsis, so it serves as its own example of how to -write a document with TeXsis. -The source code is also heavily commented, so it is possible to -extract useful macros from the source code and modify them to suit -your own purposes. -Provisions are made for local customization of TeXsis. -In particular, the file -.I TXSmods.tex, -if it exists, is read from the current directory or from the path -.B TEXINPUTS -whenever TeXsis is started. -You can therefore put your own custom macros for a given project in a -directory and they will automatically be loaded when TeXsis is run -from that directory. - -.SH INSTALLATION -There is an appendix to the printed manual containing detailed -installation instructions, but they are also provided in a form which -can be processed by plain TeX, in the file -.I Install.tex. - -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -TeXsis informational messages are written to the terminal and the log -file begining with `% '. -Warning and error messages begin with `> '. - -.SH FILES -The source files for TeXsis and the TeXsis manual are usually installed -in the same place the rest of TeX is kept. -Although this may vary from intallation to installation, it will -generally include a root directory named -.I texmf. -Common examples are -.I /usr/share/texmf/, -.I /usr/lib/teTeX/texmf, -or -.I /usr/local/lib/texmf. -Filenames here are relative to this -.I texmf -root directory. -.br -.TP 2.5i -.I web2c/texsis.fmt -TeXsis pre-loaded format. -.TP -.I tex/texsis/TXS*.tex -TeXsis source code. -.TP -.I tex/texsis/*.txs -"Style" files which can be read in at run time for special document -formats. -.TP -.I doc/texsis/TXS*.doc -Source for the printed TeXsis manual (written in TeXsis). -.TP -.I tex/texsis/TXSsite.tex -Local site customization instructions -(this is read only once, when the format file is created). -.TP -.I tex/texsis/TXSpatch.tex -Run time patch file (like a system TeXsis.rc file, it is read -every time TeXsis is run). -.TP -.I TXSmods.tex -Run time init file (this is read every time TeXsis is run from the -current directory, or from the search path in -.B TEXINPUTS -). - -.SH RESTRICTIONS -Please note that TeXsis is designed to be completely compatible with -plain TeX. -As a result it cannot be compatible with LaTeX. -.PP -Having the full manual written in TeXsis can cause a problem if you -don't have a version of TeXsis already running. -To get around this you can run -.I Manual.tex -through plain TeX and it will load the TeXsis files before processing -the manual. -This takes longer, but not by much. - - -.SH BUGS -Please report bugs (or suggestions for improvements) to -texsis@feynman.physics.lsa.umich.edu. -.PP -Patchs to correct small problems or make small improvements -are available at - - ftp://feynman.physics.lsa.umich.edu/texsis/ - -in the file -.I TXSpatch.tex -(If that file doesn't exist then there are no current patches.) - -.SH SEE ALSO -.BR initex (1), -.BR tex (1), -.BR virtex (1) -.br -Donald E. Knuth, -.I The TeXbook; -.br -Michael Doob, -.I A Gentle Introduction to TeX. - -.SH AUTHORS -Eric Myers <myers@umich.edu> -.br -Department of Physics -.br -University of Michigan -.br -Ann Arbor, Michigan USA -.sp 1 -and -.sp 1 -Frank E. Paige <paige@bnl.gov> -.br -Physics Department -.br -Brookhaven National Laboratory -.br -Upton, New York 11973 USA -.fi - -.SH VERSION -.de VL -\\$2 -.. -Revision Number: 2.18/beta3 -.br -Release Date: 16 May 2000 - -.end diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/texsis.el b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/texsis.el deleted file mode 100644 index 41e251e31b0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/texsis.el +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ -;; file: texsis.el (TeXsis version 2.18) -;; @(#) $Revision: 18.3 $ / $Date: 1998/09/26 23:57:01 $ / $Author: myers $ -;;======================================================================* -; GNU emacs support for TeXsis (A TeX macro package for Physicists) -; -; The function texsis-mode makes TeXsis the version of TeX run by the -; commands TeX-buffer and TeX-region. If the mode is not already -; "TeX" then plain-tex-mode is invoked first. -; -; The function look-for-texsis looks for "\texsis" (or actually, just -; the word "texsis") and sets texsis-mode if such is found. Put this -; in your TeX-mode-hook to automatically set texsis-mode for TeXsis files. -; -; This file is a part of TeXsis. -; -; Eric Myers, University of Texas at Austin, 22 September 1990 -; (with help from lion@navier.stanford.edu -- thanks, leo.) -;======================================================================* - -(defun look-for-texsis () - "search for \"texsis\" within first 256 characters of the file. -If found, turn on texsis-mode." - (goto-char (point-min)) - (if (search-forward "texsis" (min (point-max) (+ (point-min) 255)) t) - (texsis-mode)) -) - - -(defun texsis-mode () "TeX mode for processing TeXsis files." - (if (or (equal mode-name "TeX") (equal mode-name "TeXsis") ) - (progn - (setq TeX-command "texsis") ;; emacs 18.xx - (setq tex-command "texsis") ;; emacs 19.xx - (setq mode-name "TeXsis") ;; mode name is TeXsis - (goto-char (point-min)) - (message "TeXsis mode.") - ) - - ;; if not a TeX mode then first invoke plain-tex-mode - - (progn - (plain-tex-mode) - (if (not (equal mode-name "TeXsis")) (texsis-mode) ) - ) - ) -)
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/texsis.lsm b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/texsis.lsm deleted file mode 100644 index 44dcd8d9f95..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/texsis.lsm +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ -Begin3 -Title: TeXsis - TeX Macros for Physicists - -Version: 2.18 - -Description: A collection of TeX macros for typesetting many kinds - of documents used by physicists, including research - papers, preprints and ``e-prints,'' conference - proceedings, theses, books, referee reports, letters, - and memoranda. Provides for automatic numbering of - equations, automatic numbering and formatting of - references, double column formatting, macros for - making tables and figures, with or without captions, - and including tables with horizontal and vertical - rules. Supports a wide variety of type sizes and a - number of specialized document formats, and it even - includes macros for making form letters for job - applications or letters of recommendation. - -Keywords: plain tex, physics, macros - -Author: Eric Myers <myers@umich.edu> and - Frank E. Paige <paige@bnl.gov> - -Maintained-by: texsis@umich.edu - -Primary-site: http://www.texsis.org/ - -Alternate-site: mirrored by CTAN (Common TeX Archive Network) - -Platform: Any implementation of Plain TeX - -Copying-policy: Versions previous to 2.18 were marked "academic use only", - but version 2.18 is covered by the LaTeX project - Public License (LPPL) - -End3 - - - - - - - - - |